Shut-off valves type DA and EA - Comar Fluid Power

Shut-off valves type DA and EA

D 1741Shut-off valves type DA, EA

Septembre 2006-00© 1960 by HAWE Hydraulik

HAWE HYDRAULIK SE

STREITFELDSTR. 25 • 81673 MÜNCHEN

2.2

Pressure pmax = 700 bar

Flow Qmax = 150 lpm

1. General information

2. Available versions, main data

aThese 2/2-way directional seated valves are manually actuatedand serve to block (zero leakage) the flow in one or both directions.They are mounted directly in the piping of hydraulic circuits.

Version

Standard, control leverwith female thread M8at the shaft end

Control lever withcross drilling #3 at theshaft end

Actuation shaft with-out hand lever goingthrough on both sides

Standard, actuationshaft with femalethread M8 at the shaftend

DA 2

DA 2L

DA 2B

DA 3

EA 2

EA 2L

EA 2B

EA 3

Coding, size and Symbolsshut-off valves

Double acting Single acting

Pressurepmax

(bar)

FlowQmax

(lpm)

Tapped ports A and B DIN ISO228/1 (BSPP)

700 60

150500 G 1

G 3/4

Schematic drawing

Flow blocked in both directions Free flow in both directions

Flow: A → B blockedA ← B open, but not intendedfor free flow!

Direction A ← B flow

Switching position 0 Switching position a

Typ DA..

Typ EA..

D 1741 page 2

3. Further characteristic data

Design Seated ball valve

Material Steel, internal functional parts hardened and ground, valve ball made from bearing steel quality

Body surface Zinc galvanized

Mounting D(E)A 2.. in the pipingD(E)A 3 in the piping or via thread M8, see dimensional drawing (sect. 4)

Installation position D(E)A 2.. level, actuation lever upD(E)A 3 arbitrary; level if vibrations may occur, actuation levers up

Actuation forces max. force at the end of the actuation lever with 500 bar:and moments DA 2.. approx. 75 N

DA 3 approx. 300 N (EA.. approx. 60%)

max. moment with 500 bar:DA 2.. approx. 15 Nm;DA 3 approx. 60 Nm (EA.. approx. 60%)

Static overload capacity 2.0 x pmax

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conforming DIN 51524 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conforming DIN 51519.Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 1500 mm2/s;opt. operation approx. 10... 500 mm2/s.Also suitable are biologically degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) andHEES (synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70 °C.

Temperatures Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80 °CFluid: -25 ... +80°C, note the viscosity range !Permissible temperature during start: -40°C (observe start-viscosity!), as long as the service temperature is at least 20K higher for the following operation. Biologically degradable pressure fluids: Observe manufacturer's specifications. By considerationof the compatibility with seal material not over +70 °C.

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

Flow Q (lpm) Flow Q (lpm)

|p-Q-curves

Oil viscosity during testsapprox. 53 mm2/s

Mass (weight) Type DA 2(L) = approx. 1.5 kg Type EA 2(L) = approx. 1.4 kg

DA 2B = approx. 1.3 kg EA 2B = approx. 1.3 kg

DA 3 = approx. 3.2 kg EA 3 = approx. 3.0 kg

D 1741 page 3

4. Unit dimensions

All dimensions in mm and subject to change without notice!

Type DA 2L and EA 2L

Type DA 2B and EA 2B

Type DA 2 and EA 2 Type DA 3 and EA 3

Switching position Switching position

M8, 6 deep

M8, 6 deep

M8, 8 deep

Missing dimensions like type DA 2 and EA 2

M issing dimensions like typeDA 2 and EA 2

Directional spool valve type SG and SPVersions for direct pipe connection or manifold mounting

D 5650/1Directional spool valve

type SG and SP

March 2013-01

HAWE HYDRAULIK SESTREITFELDSTR. 25 • 81673 MÜNCHEN

2.1

© 1969 by HAWE Hydraulik

Directional spool valves are generally employed in oil-hydraulic systems. They serve to control the oil flow and thus the direction of movement of the consumers (hydraulic cylinders and hydr. motors). These valves are designed for individual installation. They feature an internal leakage compensation, hence no leakage connection is required. All valve versions are available either for:

o direct pipe connection or

o manifold mounting

Every directional spool valves consists of a control element (valve spool incl. housing) and a directly mounted actuation.The valve unit is manufactured entirely of steel, thus rendering the housing insensitive to pressure surges and leakage as can sometimes be observed after prolonged periods of use with cast housings. This is caused usually by hairline cracks which form and migrate externally, especially when the permissible pressure range has been fully utilized. Such phenomena are ruled out right from the start. The housing bores are diamond-honed. The hardened and ground valve spools are polished/deburred. This preserves their roundness and exact geometric shape (the control edges are not worn down or widened) ensuring even sealing gaps with a minimum leakage rate. Cast material (zinc and aluminum die casting) is used solely for non-pressurized components e.g. actuation housing, spring dome, base plates, etc. There is also a version available where the housing of the manual actuation is made of spheroidal cast iron which is intended especially for rough operation conditions or when these valves are connected in series.

Pressure pmax = 400 barFlow Qmax = 100 lpm

Version for pipe connection

Actuation modes (illustration represents size 3)

Version for manifold mounting

Example: SP 3 G - AK

Example: SG 1 L - AK

Example: SG 3 H - NM

Size0 and 1

Size2, 3, and 5

Manual acc. to D 6511/1

Pressure acc. to D 6250

Shielded or un-shieldeddesign

For brief description and main data, see table 4 in sect. 2.1!

AC or DC voltage

Roller head

Ball head

Pneumatic or hydraulic and resp. combinations pneumatic/manual or hydraulic/manual

Solenoid acc. to D 7055

Mechanical acc. to D 5870

1. General

D 5650/1 page 2

2. Available versions, main data2.1 Type coding

Order examples: Version for pipe connection


Desired pressure setting (bar) for the pressure limiting valve

SG 3 L 3E - AK - 120

SP 3 G - MD 23/24

Table 1: Basic type and size

Table 2: Flow pattern symbols

Table 3: Optional pressure limiting valve (only type SG)

For actuation mode, see table 4

Coding

SG 0

SG 1

SG 2

SG 3

SG 5

SP 1

SP 3

SP 5

Port size

A, B, P R

G 1/4 G 3/8

G 3/8

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 1

Flow 1)

Qmax (lpm)

12

20

30

50

100

12

50

100

Pressure pmax

(bar) at portsA, B, P R

400

400

400

400

315

400

400

315

Dep. on ac-tuation, see tab. 4 2)

Connection desig

Pipe mount-ing acc. to ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

Manifold mounting

See dimensional drawings in sect. 4 ++

Basic type

SG 0SG 1

SG 2SG 3SG 5

Spring housing made ofZinc die casting 3) Steel 4)perm. pressure at pressure atR = 20 bar R > 20 bartool ad manu. tool ad manu.justable adjust. justable adjust.

1B 2B --- ---

1C 2C --- ---

1E 2E --- ---

1F 2F --- ---

3B 4B 6B 7B

3C 4C 6C 7C

3E 4E 6E 7E

3F 4F 6F 7F

Pressure range(bar)

(315) ... 400

(160) ... 315

(80) ... 160

20 ... 80

(315) ... 400

(160) ... 315

(80) ... 160

20 ... 80

Essential note:

Permissible pressure at R depends on the spring housing material (see above). Connection R must always be the return, any pressure at R adds itself to the pressure setting. Do not use for series connections. In parallel connections, only equip one valve with a pressure limiting valve. Attention: Pressure limiting valves are not available for all flow pattern symbols (see table 2).

Basic flow pattern symbols and switch-ing positions

Avail. for type SG..

L 13) P F 13) H Y 7) 11) S 13) X 7) K 6) 7) 8) LS 12)13) 13) FS 12)13) 14) SS 12)13) 9) 10)

Suited for series connec-tion

With pres-sure limiting valve

Avail. for type SP..

Remarks on use:

If several single valves are being used in a system, attention must be paid to the connec-tion (parallel, series). In a series connection, the permissible system pres-sure = permissible pres-sure in the return!Hence, not all modes of actuation are suitable for aseries connection (ect. 4).

Check valve insert type ER 21 optionally available for type SP 1:

The check valve type it 21 must be ordered separately.The check valve insert type ER 21 acc. to D 7325 may be installed in port P, when required. This is advantageous when several directional spool valve sections (flow pattern symbols D, E, G, N, R, V, and W) are connected in parallel and situations might occur where two valve sections are actuated subsequently but simultaneous. Thereby preventing a pressure drop of the first actuated consumer.

Overlap between two switching positions:

None (neutral)

Positive (intermedi-ate blocked position)

Negative (slight intermediate blocked position)

Suited for parallel connec-tion

G C D E N W R V 5) Q 5) 6) Z U 6) 7) B 7) 8) 9) 10)

Size 0 and 1

Size2, 3, 5

1) Recommended value; if the pump output flow is near the specified limits, the plunger side must be connected at A if differential cylinders are being used as consumers

2) In SP design with flow pattern for parallel connection depending on actuation, although not in excess of 100 bar

3) Standard material for models with pressure limiting valve 4) Normally only for special applications: Resistant to pressure surges up to

300 bar (pay attention to permissible pressures for actuations). For maritime versions, see D 6511/15) Port R must be connected to the tank as leakage drain 6) Not available for size 0 and 17) Without pressure limiting valve8) Only available with manual actuation Y... acc. to D 6511/1 (detent, four

switching positions)9) Not available for SP.. manifold mounting10) Not for size 511) Observe the position of the ports in the dimensional drawings, see also notes

in sect. 3 ++12) Version to the avoidance of decompression surges (only size 5), see sect. 2.213) Not available for type SG 5 with pressure limiting valve14) Not available for type SG 0(1)

Coding is omitted for versions without pressure limiting valve!

6) 7) 10)

D 5650/1 page 3

1) For versions fitted with a pressure limiting valve, observe table 3, the lower pressure applies. Furthermore, not more than 100 bar in SP 2) Not for size 5

Table 4: Actuation modes (Selection table, for more detailed information refer to the corresponding pamphlets)

Actuation

Manual

(spring return/detent)acc. toD 6511/1

Coding Notes, remarks

AD, CD: (zinc die cast.) for normal conventional use. Only for parallel connection!

AK, CK: (spheroidal cast iron) for especially rough use. Suited for series connection

BX: Sturdy but not shield-ed design; only for parallel connection; corrosion-pro-tected by galvanized and nitrided components

AIso avaiIable with emer-gency manual actuation. Suffix code N: MD2/... N, etc. Attention: Permis. pressure at R only approx. 40 bar during use. Pay attention to the special note for actuating emergency manual operation as ex-plained in D 7055!

Only for parallel connection !In case of double stroke, idle pos. is determined by cam.

Only for parallel connection !NE, ND and NU:

also available with emer-gency manual operation, add coding H: NDH etc. Pressure-relieved version (D 6250) can be subjected to pressures up to 200 bar in the return

Only for parallel connection !

SymbolsPressurepmax (bar)at portsA, B, P R 1)

Solenoid

acc. to D 7055

Mechan-

ical

acc. to D 5870

Pressure

acc. toD 6250

Control mediumair or oil

Size

Shielded design

Unshieldeddesign

Voltage UN

12 24 110 W 230 W

12 V DC 24 V DC 110 V AC 230 V AC 50 and 60 Hz

400 50 (20)

400 315 (20)

400 50 (20)

200 200 (20)

200 200

315 200

200 200

400 100 (20)

400 40 (20)

400 30

400 12

With spring return0 and 1 2, 3 and 5

A AD

AK(S) AK(S)

--- BX 2)

With detent0 and 1 2, 3 and 5

C CD

CK(S) CK(S)

--- ---

Size0 and 1

Size2 and 3

Size2, 3,and 5

Size0 and 1

Size2, 3,and 5

Size0 ... 5

Size2, 3 and 5

ME 1 12 V DC

ME 2 24 V DC

ME 81 110 V AC 50/60 Hz

ME 8 230 V AC 50/60 Hz

MD 1 12 V DC

MD 2 24 V DC

MD 81 110 V AC 50/60 Hz

MD 8 230 V AC 50/60 Hz

ME 2/... Single stroke

MD 2/... Double stroke

MU 2/... Reverse stroke







Single stroke

Double stroke

RE Single stroke

RD Double stroke

BE Single stroke

BD Double stroke

NE Single stroke

ND Double stroke

Air or oil

Standard design

Standard design

Double stroke

hand/air

hand/oil

KD Double stroke

KM Double stroke

NE Single stroke

ND Double stroke

NU Reserve stroke

NM Single stroke and

Double stroke

A CAD CDAK CKBX

ME.. MD..

MU..

RE BERD BD

NE NUND

NM

KD KM

Output45 W100% ED

Output 60W 100% oper-ating factor

Output150 WS3-35% ED5 min

Output65 W100% ED

Observe the note in D 5870

Roller head

Ballhead

(size 2, 3)

(size 5)

The manual actuation is also available without hand lever (add coding 1, e.g. A 1, CK 1 etc.)

AKS, CKS = Seaworthy version

air

oil

D 5650/1 page 4

Design Spool-type directional control valve

Mounting Type SG: See unit dimensions in sect. 3.1 Type SP: Onto manifold

Pipe connection Tapped ports conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP) Suited for male fittings, shape B acc. to DIN 3852 P = Pump port A, B = Consumer ports R = Return port (pressure resistance dep. on the actuation, see also table 4)

Installed position Any

Flow direction According to symbol but also reverse, pay attention to permissible pressure at R

Operation pressure pmax = 400 bar, dep. on size and actuation

Static overload capacity approx. 2 x pmax

Pressure adjustment ofthe pressure limiting valve

Mass (weigth) approx. kg

Pressure SG 0(1) SG 2(3) SG 5range

B 100 80 80

C 55 35 35

E 19 17.5 17.5

|p (bar) per 1 rev.

2.2 Additional parameters and notes

Type

SG 0(1)SP 1

SG 2(3)SP 3

SG 5

SP 5

Pressure Complete incl. actuatuionlimiting Manual Solenoid Mecha- Pressurevalve MD.. ME 2/.. MD(U) 2/.. MD 3/.. nical Standard Combined AD AK BX ME.. MU.. ME 23/.. MD(U) 23/.. ME 3/.. MU 3/.. actuation actuation

without 1.0 1.0 --- 1.4 1.7 --- --- --- --- 1.1 0.9 ---

with 1.2 1.2 --- 1.6 1.9 --- --- --- --- 1.3 1.1 ---

without 3.0 3.5 2.5 --- --- 3.9 5.0 4.5 4.8 2.7 2.5 2.9

with 3.3 3.8 2.8 --- --- 4.2 5.3 4.8 5.0 3.0 2.8 3.2

without 3.4 3.9 2.9 --- --- 4.3 5.4 4.9 5.1 3.1 2.9 3.3

with 4.7 5.2 --- --- --- 5.6 6.7 6.2 7.0 4.4 4.2 4.6

without 4.3 4.8 --- --- --- 5.2 6.3 5.8 6.6 4.0 3.8 4.2

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conf. DIN 51524 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conf. DIN 51519 Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 1500 mm2/s Optimal operation: approx. 10 ... 500 mm2/s Also suitable for biological degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and

HEES (Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70°C

Temperature range Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80°C Fluid: -25 ... +80°C, Note the viscosity range Permissible temperature during start: -40°C (observe start-viscosity!), as long as the

service temperature is at least 20K higher for the following operation Biological degradable pressure fluids: Observe manufacturer‘s specifications. Considering

the compatibility with seal material not over +70°C. Attention: Observe the restrictions regarding the permissible operation duration of the

actuation solenoids, see sect. 3.1 in D 7055!

Notes for flow pattern symbols LS, FS, and SS:

Directional spool valves to the avoidance of decompression surg-es (only available for type SG 5!)

It is common practice in the shipbuilding industry to utilize directional spool valves with big sized ports (even for very low flows) to minimize the back pressure within the usually very lengthy pipe system. Such high in-pipe volume usually cause pressure surges being very strainous for the complete hydraulic equipment. The directional spool valves versions type SG 5 ... S feature valve spools with long notches which cause a rather smooth pressure built-up during switching operations, thus minimizing such pressure surges. The big-port design (G 1) enables use of pipes #25 with accordingly low back pressure.Technical data: All technical data and dimensions are like with the standard version, beside the |p-Q curve.

D 5650/1 page 5

|p - Q - characteristicsThe flow resistance values (recommended values) are understood without pipe fittings (SG) and without manifold (SP)

Double-acting consumers with unequal area ratios (differential cyl.):The return flow Qreturn may be lower or higher than the inlet flow Qinlet (pump deliv-ery flow) depending on the direction of movement. The flow resistance |ptotal of the directional spool valve must always be related to the inlet side (connection P):

Directional spool valves for parallel connection:The cylinder port of the piston side (larger surface) should always be connect-ed to port A.

Valves for parallel connections Valves for series connectionsType

SG 0SG 1SP 1

SG 2

SG 3SP 3

SG 5SP 5

Flow Q (lpm)Flow Q (lpm)




Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)F

low

res

ista

nce

|p

(bar

)F

low

res

ista

nce

|p

(bar

)

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)F

low

res

ista

nce

|p

(bar

)

Note

SP 3SG 3

SP 3SG 3

Fluid viscosity during tests approx. 60 mm2/s

Aout

Aout

Ain

Ain

Qin

Qin

Qout

Qout

|ptotal = |pin + |poutAout

Ain

Qreturn = QinAout

Ain

D 5650/1 page 6

3. Dimensions All dimensions in mm, subject to change without notice!

3.1 Directional spool valves for direct pipe connection

Type SG 0 and SG 1

M 8, 10 deep, core bore #6.5 is a thru-hole

M 8, 10 deep (rear side), core bore #6.5 is a thru-hole

1) Port B is omitted with coding N, S, and R

Plugged with coding X

Provision for a lead sealTool adjustable

Manually adjustable

Version with pressure limiting valve

(For pressure adjustment, see sect. 2.2)

Ports ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

Size

0

1

Coding

D, E, G, W, N, R

F, H, L, P, V, S, X

Y

Other codings

a b c d h P, A, and B R

17.5 20.5 9.5 20.5 59.5 G 1/4 G 3/8

21.5 12 9.5 20.5 59.5 G 1/4 G 3/8

18.5 21.5 11 17.5 70 G 3/8 G 3/8

18.5 21.5 11 17.5 59.5 G 3/8 G 3/8

Type SG 5 2)

Ports ISO 228/1 (BSPP):P, R, A, B = G 1

#10.5thru-hole



Type SG 2 and SG 3 2)

Manually adjustable

Tool adjustableProvision for a lead seal

Ports ISO 228/1 (BSPP):P, R, A, B = G 3/8 (SG 2) G 1/2 (SG 3)

Dimension a = 30 for coding B, C, K, YDimension b = 11 for coding U 16 for other codings

#10.5thru-hole

Pay attention to the differing dimensions of the base plate for the pressure compensated ver-sion with pressure actuatuation (see D 6250).

1)



2) Port B is omitted with coding N, S, R, U, and X. Ports P and A are mixed up with coding Y. Port A is stamped R with coding U

Provision for a lead sealT

oo

l ad

just

able

Man

ual

ly a

dju

stab

le

(For actuations, see sect. 3.3, on page 8 ++)

max. approx. 91

max. approx. 80

max. approx. 102

max. approx. 92

D 5650/1 page 7

1) Port B is missing with coding N, S, R, U, and X.

Ports A and R can be used alterna-tively as return with coding U

Type SP 1

Washer ISO 7089/7090-6.4-140 HV-A2K

Washer ISO 7089/7090-8.4-140 HV-A2K

Valve housing

Manifold

Sealing of ports A, B, P, and R via O-rings NBR 90 Sh. (There is also a seal kit available, order No. )

Attention: Port B is omitted with directional spool valves coding N, S, and R

Position of the ports with coding Y

Check valve insert type ER 21 (not available with coding Y,see also sect 2.1, table 2).

Important notes (for SG valves, all sizes)

Type SG 0 and SG 1 Type SG 3 and SG 5

Type SP 3 1) Type SP 5 1)

Dimensions a1 = 11 with coding D, E, G, N, R, U, V, W, X and Z 15 with coding C, F, L, P, S, H

Washer ISO 7089/7090-10.4-140-HV-A2K

Type #d O-ring Order no.

SP 3 11 12x2.5 DS 5650/1-3

SP 5 16.5 20x2.5 DS 5650/1-5

Ports A, B, R P

#d 7 7 to 9

O-ring 8x2 14x2

Valve housing

Manifold

Sealing of ports A, B, P, and R viaO-rings NBR 90 Sh. (There is also a seal kit available, order no. DS 5650/1-1)

3.2 Directional spool valve for manifold mounting (For actuations, see sect. 3.3 on page 8 ++)

Washers must be in-stalled betwean valve and mounting area to prevent warping of the valve housing in case of uneven mounting surfaces.

D 5650/1 page 8

3.3 Actuation modes, orientation and main data

For missing specifications, see respective pamphlets!

Manual actuation

Size 0 and 1codingA, AK, C and CK

c = 28 for version with DC-solenoid

= 35 for version with AC-solenoid

This dimension de-pends on the manufac-turer and may be max. 40 mm (acc. to DIN 43650)!

Solenoid actuation

Mechanical actuation

Coding RE and RD Coding BE and BD

Size Coding

0 a. 1 ME.. and MD..

2, 3 ME(D, U) 2/..and 5 ME(D, U) 23/..

ME(D, U) 3/..

a b b1 h h1

32 39 51 104 135

54 51.5 60 158 199

54 #72 #72 158 199

Size 0 and 1 2, 3, and 5

h2 66 102

s 5 10

Hand lever can also be mount-ed here

Flange (mounting) area with directional spool valve type SP 1

Size 2, 3 and 5codingAD, AK, CD and CK

Flange (mounting) area with directional spool valve type SP 3(5)

Size 2 and 3 coding BX

Flange (mounting) area with directional spool valve type SP 3

Hand le-ver can also be mounted here

Occasionally lube the ar-ticulatet bolt

Hand lever can also be mounted here

Double actuation coding KM and KD

PortsISO 228/1 (BSPP):1 and 2 = G 1/4

Pressure actuation

Standard versions, coding NE, ND, NU and NM

Size h3

0 and 1 60

2, 3 97and 5

Flange (mounting) area with directional spool valve type SP..

PortsISO 228/1 (BSPP):1 and 2 = G 1/4

app

rox.

13

2 app

rox.

23

5

app

rox.

20

0

app

rox.

342

Lifting / Lowering valve type HSV and HZV

D 7032Lifting/Lowering valve

type HSV, HZV

August 2003-04© 1976 by HAWE Hydraulik


2.2

Flow Qmax = 160 lpm



This valve combination type HSV or HZV is preferably used for controlling lifting equipment with one or two single acting hydraulic cylinders.

The valve consists of:

' Solenoid actuated 2/2-way directional seated valve for lowering the lifted load

' Adjustable throttle valve (optional) for limiting the drop rate

' The 2-way flow control valve, available as option for valves type HSV 23-R6 and HZV 21(22)-R6, ensure a largely load independentdrop rate.

' Pressure limiting valve for the limitation of the permissible load (max. operation pressure). Factory set to 220 bar, adjustable upto 400 bar.

' Check valve prevents load pressure from acting on the switched off pump, when the load is lifted and prevents e.g. reverse rotation of the pump. The location of the check valve in relation to the pressure limiting valve depends on the application. Version R2 and R4 (S2 and S4) prevents uncontrolled lowering of the load in case the pressure limiting valve is "floating" (loadpressure in the range of the set pressure).

Type HSV 21(22)

Type HSV 41(61)

Example circuits Type HZV 21 R6/10 - 150 - G 24

Type HSV 21 R2 - 150 - G 24

D 7032 page 2


Coding

HSV 21 1)

HSV 22 1)

HSV 23 1) 3)

HSV 41

HSV 61

HSV 61 UNF

HSV 71 2)

HZV 21 3)

HZV 22 3) 5)

Flow

Qmax 6)

(lpm)

20

30

40

40

60

60

160

20

20

Pres-surepmax

(bar)

315

315

315

400

400

400

400

315

315

P A, R, H

G 3/8

G 3/8 G 1/2

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 1/2

7/8-14 UNF-2B

G 3/4

G 3/8

G 3/8

J

---

---

---

---

---

--

---

G 3/8

G 1/4

Order examples: HSV 21 - R2 R-150 - G 24

HSV 41 - R1 - WG 230

Ports conformingISO 228/1 (BSPP) resp.SAE J514 (SAE-10)

Table 1: Basic type Table 4: Nom. voltage of the solenoid

Tab. 3: Pressure limiting valve (with option ofpressure setting in bar. Example: HSV 21 R2R-150-G 24

HZV 22 R6/14-170/150-G 24

Other voltages on request!

No coding R

Tool ad-justable

Manuallyad-justable

Table 2: Design, flow pattern of the solenoid valve and location of the check valve in relation to thepressure limiting valve

Basic type With throttle valve Without throttle valve With 2-way flow control valve

HSV 21 1)HSV 22 1)

HSV 41 HSV 61HSV 61 UNFHSV 71 2)

R 1 R 2 R 3 R 4

S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4

R 1

R 6

R 2 R 3 R 4

HSV 23 HZV 21

HZV 22

1) Suited for mounting onto compact hydraulic power packs, see appendixin sect. 5

2) Only available as version ...S4 and R4, featuring a tool adjustable pressure limiting valve.

3) Only available as version ...R64) Type HZV without flow controller (similar to version R 4) only on request

Note for HZV 21 and HZV 22:

Specify the flow Q (lpm) to be set for the 2-wayflow control valve (drop rate brake), here 10 lpm.Example: HZV 21 R6/10-150-G24

4)

4)

Standard without with plug Nom.(with plug) plug featuring voltage

LED's

G 12 X 12 L 12 12 V DC

G 24 X 24 L 24 24 V DCG 24 EX 7) --- ---

WG 230 --- --- 230 V AC50 / 60 Hz

G 205 X 205 --- 205 V DC

5) With second pressure stage for lifting and additional functions

6) See also |p-Q-curves in sect. 3.17) Explosion-proof version

(Only available as type HSV 21 and HSV 22!)

D 7032 page 3

Nomenclature, design 2/2-way directional seated valve (cone seated valve), solenoid actuated, combined with a pressure limiting, a throttle and a check valve in one valve body.

Pipe connection P = Inlet for pressurized oilA, H, J = ConsumerR = Return

Mounting position Any

Mass (weight) Type HSV 21(22, 23) HSV 41 HSV 61 HSV 71 HZV 21 HZV 22

approx. kg 2.2 2.2 2.5 3.1 3.9 4.0

Flow direction P → A lifting; A → R loweringThe function of the valves rule ports P, R and A(H, J) and mustn't be interchanged. R is the return port always (|p < 20 bar)

Perm. pressure max. 400 bar

Perm. flow see section 2 and |p-Q-curves

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conforming DIN 51524 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conforming DIN 51519.Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 1500 mm2/sec;opt. operation approx. 10... 500 mm2/sec .Also suitable for biological degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES (Synth.Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70°C

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40...+80°C; Fluid: -25...+80°C, pay attention to the viscosity range! Start temperature down to -40°C are allowable (Pay attention to the viscosity range during start!), as longas the operation temperature during subsequent running is at least 20K higher. Biological degradable pressure fluids: Pay attention to manufacturer's information. With regard to the compatibility with sealingmaterials do not exceed +70°C.Restrictions for version with ex-proof solenoid!

|p-Q-curves

3. Additional parameter3.1 General and hydraulic data

Flo

wre

sist

ance|

p(b

ar)

Op

erat

ion

pre

ssure

p(b

ar)

Flow rate Q (lpm)

2-way flow control valve (with type HSV 23-R6)

Flow rate Q (lpm)

Flow rate Q (lpm)

Flow rate Q (lpm) Flow rate Q (lpm)

Oil viscosity during tests approx. 60 mm2/s

ISO 228/1 (BSPP), for pipe fittings with male thread shape B, DIN 2852 page 2Type HSV 61 UNF with thread 7/8-14 UNF-2B (acc. to table 1)

D 7032 page 4

Electrical data for ex-proof solenoids

ATEX-Certificate of conformity TÜV-A 03ATEX 0017 XCoding II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 T4

II 2 D Ex mbD 21 T135°COper. duration 100% EDDuty cycle IP 67 (IEC 60529)Nom. voltage UN 24 VDC

Power PN 23 W

Restrictions for use:

Ambient temperature -35 ... +40°Cmax. fluid temperature +70°Cel. protection against overload(conf. IEC 60127) IF < 1.6 A-T

Surface coating Housing galvanically zinc coatedCoil and connection cavity are moulded

Electrical connection 3x0.5 mm2

Cable length 3 m, Option 10 m (cable ÖLFLEX-440P ® Co. LAPP, D-70565 Stuttgart)

Attention : Protect the complete valve against direct sun light.Observe the operation manuals B 03/2004 and B ATEX!Electrical lay-out and testing conforming EN 60079, VDE 0170-1, VDE 0170-5

Plugs (connectionand circuitry)

All plugs EN 175 301-801 A

DC-voltage coding G 24

AC-voltage coding WG 230

Terminals atthe solenoid

3.2 Electrical data

Coding HSV 21(22) HSV 23(41) HSV 61(...UNF) HSV 71 HZV 21(22)

Nom. voltage UN

For further data seesolenoid valve type ...acc. to pamphlet ...

Nom. power PN (W)

on

off

Switchings

Protection mode

24 V DC 230 V AC50/60 Hz

G 24G 24 EX 2)

WG 2301)

24 V DC 230 V AC50/60 Hz

G 24 WG 2301)

24 V DC 230 V AC50/60 Hz

G 24 WG 2301)

24 V DC 230 V AC50/60 Hz

G 24 WG 2301)

24 V DC 230 V AC50/60 Hz

G 24 WG 2301)

m1: EM 21V (D 7490/1)m2a/m2b: VZP1 (D 7785A)m1 m2.. m1 m2..

26.4

100

80

26. 6

200

160

21

50

150

21

100

300

21

50

150

21

100

300

30

50

150

30

100

300

21

100

80

27

~50

~65

21

200

160

26

~70

~130

BVG 2 BVP 2D 7400

EM 21VD 7490/1

EM 31VD 7490/1

EM 41VD 7490/1

max. approx. 2000 (roughly even distributed)

IP 65, acc. to IEC 60529 (plug properly mounted)

Switching time(guideline) ms

1) With bridge rectifierin the plug (solenoid 205 V DC)

2) Only available for type HSV 21 and HSV 22.For detailed informa-tion, see below.

Device socket

with LED and safety circuitwith 2 diodes

with clamp diode

for all valves

SVS 296048SVS 3129020

MSD 3-209 C1

add. with HZV 21(22)

SVS 296107

MSD 4-309 C2

Order coding

The valve order coding always includes the plug. Additionally available plugs (for more details, see D 7163):

D 7032 page 5

4. Unit dimensions All dimensions are in mm and subject to change without notice!

4.1 Type HSV 21-.. and HSV 22-...

Cable gland

Plug may bemounted offsetby 4x90°

Manual emergencyactuation (see below)

Throttlevalve

Pressure limiting valve

#8.3 Thru-hole

Additionalthru-holes#8.5 with typeHSV 21-R-...

M8, 8 deep

(tool adjustable) max. 128

(manually adjustable) max. 136.5

Important notes:

This valve may be mounted onto customer furnished manifold also. The ports will then be sealed to the outside by O-rings.Two socket head bolts ISO 4762-M8x65-10.9-A2K are required for mounting.

Manual emergency actuation

Actuation aid (max # 4.5 mm). Do not use any sharp edged parts.Actuation force $ 10 N

Thread ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

#d

#d1

O-ringNBR 90 Sh

HSV 21-..A, P and R

G 3/8

22.5

14

18x2.5

A and R

G 1/2

26.5

19

22x2.5

P

G 3/8

22.5

14

18x2.5

HSV 22-...

Manifold not part of delivery from HAWE !

Ex-proof solenoid

approx. 34

D 7032 page 6

Cable gland Plug may bemounted offsetby 4x90°

Drain valve a/f 5

4.2 Type HSV 23-R6/...

Pressure limitingvalve

#8.5 Thru-hole

#8.5 Thru-hole

M8, 8 deep

Metering throttle fordrop-rate braking valve,adjustable (0) ... 40 lpm

(tool adjustable) max. 116

(manually adjustable) max. 128

Important notes:

This valve may be mounted onto customer furnished manifold also. The ports will then besealed to the out-side by O-rings 18x2.5 NBR 90 Sh(customer furnished).Two socket head bolt ISO 4762-M8x65-10.9-A2Kare required for mounting.

4.3 Type HSV 41-..

Cable gland Plug may bemounted offsetby 4x90°

Throttlevalve

Drainvalve a/f 5

Pressurelimitingvalve

#8,5 Thru-hole

M8, 10 deep

(tool adjustable)max. 79

(manually adjustable)max. 90

Ports conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP): A, P and R = G 1/2

Ports conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP): A, P, and R = G 3/8

Important notes:

This valve may be mounted onto customer furnishedmanifold also. The ports will then be sealed to the out-side by O-rings 22x2 NBR 90 Sh (customer furnished).Two socket head bolt ISO 4762-M8x65-10.9-A2Kare required for mounting.

approx. 32

approx. 32

D 7032 page 7

4.5 Type HSV 71-...

a/f 6Pressure limitingvalve

Drain valve a/f 5

Plug may bemountedoffset by4x90°

Cable gland #11 Thru-hole

Ports conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP): A, P, and R = G 3/4

4.4 Type HSV 61-.. and HSV 61 UNF

Cable gland

Plug may bemounted off-set by 4x90°

M8, 10 deep

(tool adjustable)

(manually adjustable)

Ports A, P, and R conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP) = G 1/2 (type HSV 61)conforming SAE J 514 (SAE-10) = 7/8-14 UNF-2B (type HSV 61 UNF)

max. adjustmenttravel

Drain valvea/f 5


Thro

ttle

valv

eo

pen

clo

sed

approx. 32

approx. 32

app

rox.

38

D 7032 page 8

4.6 Type HZV 21-R6/...-... and HZV 22-R6/...-...

Terminals at thesolenoid m2a: 1-3m2b: 1-2

Cable gland

2)

2)

Pressurelimitingvalves

M8, 10 deep

Ports conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP): H, P, and R = G 3/8

J = G 1/4

1) Pressure limiting valve S2 only apparent with type HZV 22 - R6/...-...

2) Plug may be mounted offset by 4x90°

Drop rate brakingvalve

1)

5. Appendix, mounting onto compact hydraulic power packs

Order example: HC 24/0,64 - HSV 23 - R6 - G 24

Directly mounted lifting/lowering valveacc. to sect. 2,suited types: HSV 21.., HSV 23-R6

Example circuit corresponding to theorder coding example above

3) Including O-ringsand screw set

For missing data ofcompact hydraulicpower packs, referto the correspond-ing pamphlets

Order No. of the complete connection block:6905 910 3)

For dimensions oftype HSV 23-R6-...,see sect. 4.2

Compact hydraulic power pack Suited types:HC acc. to D 7900HCG acc. to D 7900 G

MP acc. to D 7200D 7200 H

HK acc. to D 7600-2D 7600-3D 7600-4

app

rox.

32.5

app

rox.

32.5

Switch unit type CRwith an automatic pre-relieving feature (shock-free decompression)

for the control of bottom-ram presses with dual stage drive

either manual or solenoid actuation

D 7150Switch unit type CR

September 1999-02

HAWE HYDRAULIK SE


2.2

' Opening the press

Type CR 4 M

CR 5 M

Type CR 4 H

Pressure pmax = 400 bar (high pressure)

= 60 bar (low pressure)

Flow Qmax = 300 lpm

Example type CR 4 H


' Compression cycle

Combines both pump delivery flows for the rapid approach cycle. Ful-ly automatic switch-over of the low-pressure pump to idle circulation,when the pressure equals or exceeds the low-pressure value selected for the rapid approach cycle. Both pressure stages are safe-guarded by a built-in high pressure limiting valve and by the pressurelimiting function of the low-pressure switch-over valve.

' Maintaining the pressure

2/2-way valves, check valves and all other functional parts show zero leakage while connected to consumer port A. An additional pumpis not required during the compression interval. The two-stage pumpis cut-off by the pressure switch unit when the compression pressureis attained (see pamphlet 5440). Prerequisite: Press cylinders with noleakage.

Electrical actuation of the pilot-operated solenoid valve initiates a soft pressure reduction (decompres-sion) down to approx. 10 bar. This occurs without any pressure surges, thus protecting the unit from dam-age, and then passes over into a rapid and complete opening of the 2/2-way valve which also occurs with-out any pressure surges. Optimum lowering rates are attained from a tare or deadweight pressure of approx. 2 bar or more.

When the hand lever is thrown into position a , the operator will first distinctly feel a straining point at whicha pre-relieving valve connected in parallel to the return valve opens, thereby effecting shock-free de-compression. The straining point disappears upon completion of decompression and the hand lever canbe moved until it stops, thereby opening the return line completely. The deadweight pressure should be higher than 0.5 bar.

LP

D 7150 page 2

Electrical Applies to CR 4 and CR 5

Solenoid, conf. VDE 0580

Coding M-G 24 M-WG 110 M-WG 230

Nom. 24V DC 110V AC 230V ACvoltage UN

Current IN (A) 1.1 0.26 0.13

Power 26 26 26PN (W)

On 140 140 140

Off 55 150 150

Manual Hand lever (only for CR 4!)

Coding H Only little manual force necessary

Further data

Design 2/2-way ball seated valve (main valve) with direct or indirect operation depending on the respectivetype, combined with ball type check valves and pressure valves. Automatic decompression whenopening procedure is initiated.

Line connection HP, NP, A, B, M = for fittings with tapped journal conf. DIN 3852, Bl. 2 shape G or F.R = for threaded pipes conf. DIN 2440 or pipe sections and elbows conf. DIN 2980

Installed position Preferably in a vertical upright position with ports NP and R at the bottom

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conforming DIN 51524 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conforming DIN 51519.Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 1500 mm2/s;opt. operation approx. 10... 500 mm2/s.Also suitable are biologically degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES(Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70 °C.

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80 °CFluid: -25 ... +80°C, Note the viscosity range !Permissible temperature during start: -40°C (observe start-viscosity!), as long as the service temper-ature is at least 20K higher for the following operation.Biologically degradable pressure fluids: Observe manufacturer's specifications. By consideration ofthe compatibility with seal material not over +70 °C.

|p-Q-Characteristics


Example:


Pressure setting (bar):Low pressure High pressure

Application

Coding

HP

NP

A→R

Pressure pmax1) 2)

Mass (weight)

Deadweight pressure

Symbols

Bottom-ram presses with deadweight return

CR 4 M-... CR 5 M-... CR 4 H

8 20 8

80 160 80

200 300 200

5.2 kg 10.0 kg 4.7 kg

≥ 2 bar ≥ 2 bar ≥ 0.5 bar

Table 2: Actuation / mode

CR 4 M - WG 230 - 400/60

CR 4 H

Flow Qmax (lpm)

Switching

time (ms)

High pressure (HP): = 400 barLow pressure (NP): = (0) ... 60 bar

1) Available with a fixed setting only, specify thedesired pressure setting when ordering; seesect. 3 for adjustability

2) Pressure rangeHigh pressure : (0) ... 400 barLow pressure: (0) ... 30 bar

(0) ... 60 bar

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)

Wei

ght

pre

ssure

(bar

)

Dec

om

pre

ssio

n t

ime

t (s

)

Flow Q (lpm)

Return flow as a function of dead-weight (standard value)

Decompression time (standard value) CR 4 M.. and CR 5 M..

CR 5

CR 4

Return flow Q (lpm) Pressurized cylinder volume Vo (l)

Viscosity during measurements approx. 60 mm2/s

NP→

R re

leas

ed

NP→A

NP→

A(R) r

elea

sed

LP LP

50 and 60 Hz

D 7150 page 3

Manual emergency operation 1)

M10, 12 deep in front andback (thread),thru-hole

3. Unit dimensions All dimension in mm and subject to change without notice!

Type CR 4 M.. and CR 5 M..

High pressure adjustmentpossible after loosening thelock nut.Clock-wise rotation= pressure increase.1 turn , 80 bar.

CR 4...: Washer #18x#10.5x0.5Part No. 5650 005 (1 mm , 8 bar)

CR 5 M..: Washer #13 (1 mm , 1 bar)

1) Press the emerg. bolt inwardly with an appropriate tooI (screw driver, etc.), max. operating force is 150 Nm.The manual emergency function can be put out of commission by inserting a screw M3 x 5 DIN 921

M10, 12 deep infront and back(thread), thru-hole

Possible attachments (Example CR 4 M..)

Attachment to tank cover; Low pressure enters directly from below, high pressure enters through cover, for example by means of a rubber grommet

Lateral attach-ment to theassembly wallor elbow

Double nipple DIN 2982

Discharge funnel

Abil seals

Type Part No.

CR 4... 7161 050

CR 5 M.. 7181 050

Washer forcompensatingunevenness

Ports DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP):

A, R HP NP M

G 1 G 1/4 G 3/4 G 1/4

Type L B H a b b1 c e e1 e2 e3 e4

CR 4 M 100 50 130 31 34 31 9.5 36 57 70 11 31

CR 5 M 135 63 160 124 24 21 0 46 69 100 10 36

Ports DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

Type f f1 h1 h2 i k A a. R HP NP M

CR 4 M 44 33 90 66 6 54 G 1 G 1/4 G 3/4 G 1/4

CR 5 M 56 41 112 86 9 70 G 1 1/4 G 3/8 G 1 G 1/4

Grommet

Type CR 4 H

Subsequent pressure adjustment

(always check using a manometer)monitored by a pressure gange and pumps running

Low pressure adjustment up to 30 resp. 60 bar possi-ble by adding or removingwashers

LP

LP

approx. 90

approx. !90

D 7150 page 4

4. Typical circuit diagrams

4.1. Bottom-ram press with CR 4 M..- or CR 5 M..- control

(CR 4 H analogously)

CR 4 M..orCR 5 M..

Two-stage pumpType RZ acc. to D 6910 H Type MP acc. to D 7200 H

DG..

Cycle chart for this circuit

Cycle

1

2

3

4

5

Platenmovement

Remarks

Start by pushingbutton

Automatic relief oflow pressure pump

Pressure switch incycle 2 - end, e.g.also starts timer forcycle 3

By pressing a but-ton or expiration oftimer

By limit switch, but-ton release, etc.

PumpM3+

on

on

off

off

off

CR 4 M..CR 5 M..

m1

de-energized

de-energized

de-energized

energized

de-energized

Pressureswitch

DG..

1 - 2

final press.1 - 3

M off

1 - 3

1 - 2

1 - 2

In the CR 4 H control, cycles 1 (hand lever in "close" position) to 3 are identical.Cycle 4 is started by throwing the lever to the "open" position and in cycle 5-end or cycle 1-start, this lever must again be moved to the "close " position.Pressure switch e.g type DG 1 acc. to D 5440.

Closure (rapid approach)

Pressurebuild-up

Pressuremainten.

Decompr.a. opening

Open,stop

LP

LP

Directional spool valve banks type SKP and SKH

for parallel and series connection

D 7230Directional spool

valve bank SKP(H)

January 2000-02© 1982 by HAWE Hydraulik


2.1

Pressure pmax = 400 bar; Flow Qmax = 100 lpm

Type SKP and SKH directional valve blocks are employed in hydraulic system. They serve to control the flow and thus the direc-tion of movement of the consumers (hydraulic cylinders and motors). Depending on the flow pattern, the individual valves are con-nected in parallel or in series to form banks. Mixed combinations are also possible for special circuits. The valve part is made en-tirely of steel. This means that the housing is insensitive to pressure surges. Leaks of the kind which can sometimes be observedon cast housings after an extended operating period and which are caused by hairline cracks migrating outwards, particularly whenthe permissible pressure ranges are fully utilized, are excluded here right from the start. The housing bores are diamond-honed.The hardened and ground valve spools are polished and deburred. This maintains roundness and exact geometrical shape

applying to standardversions where pumpand return are con-nected via pipes.For direct mountingon to hydraulic powerpacks, see sect. 5.2and 5.3.

1. Version

(all sizes)

Photo showssize 2

2. Version

(not size 4!)

Photo showssize 1

Add-on valve (end valve)

Add-on valves(intermed. valves)

Opt. intermed. platesInitialvalve

End plate

Add-on valves(interm. valves)

Opt. intermed. platesConnect.bank

Actuation

Manual

Encapsulatedand non-cap-sulated version

Solenoid

AC and DCvoltage

Mechanical

Roller andspherical heads

Pressure and

combined

actuation


2. General outlay

Initial valve with an integrated pressure oil inlet (pump connection) and return connection depending on design.With or without a pressure limiting valve.

Add-on valve (end valve), which shuts off the pressurized oil and return channels internally and which has the returnconnection in the case of series connection.

Very reasonable in price because the parts for the connec-tion block and end plate are superfluous compared to thesecond version.

Not all flow patterns can be used as initial and end valvesection. End section have a different coding when orderedindividually.

Feature

Advan-tage

Disad-vantage

Notesto SKH

Connecting bank with pressure oil inlet and returnconnection depending on design. With and withoutpressure limiting valve.

End plate which externally closes off the pressure oil and return channels at the final valve section or whichcomprises the return connection with series connection.

Simplifies own storage, when valve banks are assem-bled by the customer:Clarity for customer service

Higher price compared to the first version due to the additional parts connection block and end plate.

Add-on valves (intermediate valves) with parallel connection of SKP with continuous pressurized oil and returnchannels. Meandering flow in the case of series connect. SKH (see flow pattern symbols in table 5, sect. 3.1).

Optional intermediate plates for increasing the distance and /or reversing the direction of flow, if required.

Before defining the order coding, sketch the circuit diagrams with the proposed number of valves to determine themost favourable combination.

(the control edges are not worn down or widened) and even sealing gaps with a minimum leakage rate are produced. Castmaterials (diecast zinc and aluminium and also spheroidal casting) are only used for the actuation housing, end plates etc.

D 7230 page 2

3. Available versions, main dataFor series connection SKH: Pay attention to reversal of flow direction (direction of arrow for the 2nd, 4th, 6th etc. valve in

the flow diagrams opposite to that shown in table 5).

3.1. Valve bank

Order examples: 1. Version

2. Version

SKH - 3 - 7 L 1YLH - MD2 - 120

SKP - 4 - 5 G DEN - AD

SKP 32 B - 2 - GND - MD2/24 - 120

Table 1: Basic type

Table 2: Size

Table 3: Pressure limiting valve (permitted max. operating pressure depending on the actuation, see table 7 and 8)

(20)...400 145...400 (20)...315 80...315(10)...160 25...160

(0)...400 145...400 (0)...315 80...315(0)...160 25...160

Pressure setting(bar) for pressurelimiting valvesacc. to table 3

Actuation (table 7 and 8)

Pressurelimitingvalveacc. to table 3

End valve (at size 4)Add-on valve (table 4 and 5)

Intermediate plate (here: reversion plate), if requiredfor reasons cited in table 6

Initial valve (symbols see table 4 and 5)

2) See also notes in table 5 and sect. 5.1 3) Port M only apparent with size 2 and 34) 400 bar range not for type SKH

1) Bottom sided port P with type SKH,see flow pattern symbol (table 4)

Avail-able forsize

0 ... 4

0, 1, 2and 3

Design

without pressure limiting valve

Fixed

Adjustable

1. Version

with pressure limiting valve in the startingvalve sectionSerie Steel Pressure range (bar)

spring at sizedome 0 and 1 2 and 3

5 --- ---

6 3

7 4

2. Version

with pressure limiting valve in the connectionblockSerie Steel spring dome Pressure

at size range0.1 2, 3 only 0 and 1 (bar)

15 35 --- ---

11B 31B 13B (20) ... 400 4)

11C 31C 13C (20) ... 315

11E 31E 13E (10) ... 160

12B 32B 14B (0) ... 400 4)

12C 32C 14C (0) ... 315

12E 32E 14E (0) ... 160

ConnectionsDIN ISO 228/1(BSPP)

Coding Internal connection mode

SKP Parallel connection

SKH Series connection

SKC Mounting on to compact hydraulic power

packs or adapter plate (sect. 5.2 and 5.3)

Table 4: Internal connection mode (to be completed with the respective flow pattern and actuation symbols, table 5 or 7 and 8)

1. Version

Parallelconnec-tionSKP ..

Seriesconnec-tionSKH ..

Parallel connection SKP ..

Connection block Add-on valve End plate15 a. 35 11(2).., 31(2).. (intermed. valve) (no coding)

Series connection SKH ..

Connection block Add-on valve End plate15 a. 35 11(2).., 31(2).. (intermediate valve) (no coding)

Initial valvewithout pressure with pressurelimiting valve limiting valve

Add-on valve(as intermediatevalve)

Add-on valve (as end valve) with end plate 2)

(only size 2 and 3)

Inlet P also on bottom (alsosee note in footnote 8) page 3)

R dependingon direction of flow

Note:

Coding for indiv.valve sectionsee sect. 3.2!

3)

3)

Coding1

Coding2

2. Version

Coding 0 1 2 3 4

Flow Qmax (lpm) 12 20 30 50 100

A and B G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4

P G 1/4 (G 3/8 1) ) G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4

R and R1 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4

M G 1/4 --- --- --- ---

1) Must not be used as initial valve section (1. version, table 3 and 4)

2) To be used as end valve section together with an end plate (see table 4 and sect. 5.1)

3) Generally only as an end valve section. Otherwise, connection A or A and B will be subject to the pressure of the consumer connectedto a downstream valve when the latter is actuated.

4) Specified direction of flow as illustrated; Must be located at an uneven position within the valve bank or an reversion plate (coding 1,table 6) has to be used upstream

5) Only with manual actuation coding Y.. (detent), see D 6511/1

6) When used as circulation valve, generally only for solenoid, mechanical or pressure actuation in automatic cycle sequences with idlingintervals

7) Port R at the valve section serves to route leakage into return duct, hence return R to tank is nonpressurized

8) Use reversion plate (coding 1, table 6) to rectify the flow direction of the end section valve

D 7230 page 3

Table 5: Symbols Essential note: Footnotes 1) and 2) apply only to 1. version!

Parallel connection type SKP

Size

0 and 1 ' 1) ' ' ' ' 1) ' ' 1) ' ' '

2 and 3 ' 1)2) ' ' ' ' 1)2) ' 1)2) ' ' 1)2) ' ' 1)2) ' 1)2) ' ' ' 1)2)

4 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '

Coding G M D E C N A W J V Q R U B

and flow 7) 7) 6) 5)patternsymbol

Series connection type SKH

Size

0 and 1 ' 8) ' 8) ' 1)8) ' 1)8) ' 8)

2 and 3 ' ' ' 1)2) ' 1)2) ' ' 1)2) ' 1)2)

4 ' ' ' ' '

Coding L P F H S Y K

and flow 3) 3) 4) 4) 5)patternsymbol

Switching positions

Overlapping:none positive negative

Table 6: Intermediate plates(their codings should be added to the respective flow pattern symbol (table 5) upstream, see order example in sect. 3.1!)

Reversion plate for type SKH Spacer plate for type SKPCoding and flow pattern symbol Coding and flow pattern symbol

1 2

Part No. for intermediateplate when ordered indi-vidually for retrofitting(longer tension rodsmight be required):

Part No. for:Coding size 0, 1 size 2, 3 size 4

1 6702 116 5702 250 7194 013

2 --- 7230 151 7194 012

Combinations of valve sections being con-nected either in parallel or series within onevalve bank are possible for special circuitsthus enabling existing connections from the pump to the consumers and return to be utilized depending on the flow patternsymbol. Observe the perm. pressure at R(table 7 and 8) as this may cause the actua-tions to be pressurized.

Application:

a) Codings 1 and 2: Serve to widen the space be-tween the valve sections in case all solenoidactions are same sided M..3/.. (see table 7, 8and sect. 5.1).

b) Coding 1: Reversal of the flow direction at thesubsequent valve section (flow pattern sym-bol), e.g. S, Y footnote 4) when on even posi-tion within the valve bank or when identicalswitching direction of subsequent sections isrequired with manual or mechnical actuation.

D 7230 page 4

Table 7: Actuation modes (selection table, see corresponding pamphlets for more detailed information)

Actuation

Manual

(springreturn/detent),acc. to D 6511/1

Coding Remarks

Zinc die casting for normal,conventional use.Only for parallel connection!

Spheroidal cast iron for espe-cially rough use.Basically for series connec-tion

Available also with manualemergency actuation. Addcoding N e.g. MD 2/.. N etc.Attention:The perm. pressure at port Rmust not exceed 40 bar dur-ing operation! The flowQA,B→R must not exceed

160 lpm with size 5 to ensuresave switching function.Observe the note regardingthe operation of the manualemergency actuation in D 7055!

Note to ME(D, U) 3/.. :

The solenoids can be installedonly with alternating orienta-tion due to their size. An spac-er plate coding 2 (see table 6sect. 3.1) has to be used whenall solenoids should be orient-ed to the same side.See also example circuits insect. 5.1.

Only for parallel connection!The cam must also feature aposition for idle position withdouble stroke actuations!

Only for parallel connection!NE, ND and NU:

Available also with manualemergency actuation, addcoding H: NDH etc..The pressure at port P mustnot exceed 200 bar with de-pressurized versions (D 6250).

Only for parallel connection!

Pressure pmax (bar)

at the ports forType SKP Type SKH

A, B, P R 1) A, B, P, R R1

Solenoid

acc. to D 7055

Mechanical

acc. to D 5870

RE(D) BE(D)

Pressure

acc. to D 6250

Size

Coding

Nom. voltage UN

12 24 110 W 230 W

12V DC 24V DC 110V AC 230V AC50 and 60 Hz

400 2) 50(20)

400 2) 315(20)

--- ---

315 12

200 200(20)

200 12

200 100(20)

200 12

315 100(20)

200 100(20)

400 40(20)

400 30(20)

315 30

--- ---

--- ---

--- ---

with spring return0 and 1 2, 3 and 4

A AD

AK(S) AK(S)

with detent0 and 1 2, 3 and 4

C CD

CK(S) CK(S)

Size0 and 1

Size2 and 3

Size2, 3and 4

Size0 and 1

Size2, 3,and 4

Size0 ... 4

Size2, 3, and 4

ME 1 12V DC

ME 2 24V DC

ME 81 110V AC 50/60 Hz

ME 8 230V AC 50/60 Hz

MD 1 12V DC

MD 2 24V DC

MD 81 110V AC 50/60 Hz

MD 8 230V AC 50/60 Hz



MU 2/... Reversal strocke







Double stroke

Output45 W100% ED

RE Single stroke

RD Double stroke

BE Single stroke

BD Double stroke

NE Single stroke

ND Double stroke

air oroil

Controlmedium

Controlmedium

Com-binedactuation

manual/air

manual/oil

KD Double stroke

KM Double stroke

NE Single stroke

air ND Double stroke

NU Reversal strocke

oil NM Single stroke anddouble stroke

A.. C..

ME.. MD..

MU..

NE(D) NU

NM KD KM

Single stroke

Output45 W100% ED

Output60 W100% ED

Output150 WS3-35% ED5 min

Output65 W100% ED

See alsoD 5870

Rollerhead

Sphericalhead

Size 2, 3:

Size 4:

400 2) 12

400 100(20)

400 100(20)

315 12

--- ---

Size 0, 1:

Size 2, 3:

Size 4:

200 12

Only size2, 3:

The manual actuation is also avail. without hand lever(add coding 1, e.g. A 1, CK 1 etc.)

AKS, CKS = Sea worthy version

Size 2, 3:

Size 4:

1) ( )-values apply to versions with a pressure limiting valve, for “Return pressure” refer to sect. 3.32) max. 315 bar with size 4

D 7230 page 5

3.2. Order coding for individually ordered valve sections

Only for indiv. sections to expand existing valve banks, storage, replacement, etc. End section valves: Attention must be paid onthe internal connection depending on design and on the orientation with solenoid actuations ME(MD, MU) 3/.. (only size 2, 3, and 4), see also appendix (sect. 5.1.). State the intended total number of valve sections and intermediate plates within the valve bank for ordering tension rods with correct length.

Application

Initial valve

Intermediate valve

End valve(only size2, 3, and 4)

Initial valve

Intermediate valve

End valve(only size2, 3, and 4)

Suited for

Parallelconnection

Seriesconnection

Actuationmode

all

all

ME 3/..MD 3/..MU 3/..

all

all

all besideME 3/..MD 3/..MU 3/..

ME 3/..MD 3/..MU 3/..

Coding

..SCA

SC

SCE

SCA

..SHA

..SHU

SH

SHE

SHU

SHE

SHA

Remark(see also appendix in sect. 5.1)

with lateral port P

Uneven pos. No. without intermediate plates; Even or uneven pos. No.incl. intermediate plates

Even pos. No. excl. intermediate plates (alternating assembly)

With lateral port P

With bottom side port P(only size 0, 1 without pressure limiting valve !)

Size 0 and 1: SH spool valve sections may be used after removal ofthe bottom side tapped plug.

Uneven pos. No. without intermediate plates; Even or uneven pos. No.incl. reversion plates

Even pos. No. excl. reversion plates

Uneven pos. No. excl. reversion plates; Even or uneven pos. No. incl. reversion plates

Even pos. No. excl. reversion plates (alternating assembly)

Table 9: Indiv. valve sections (incl. spacers, seals and O-rings)

1. Version

Example: Initial valve for parallel connection

6 SCA 2 M - MD2/230W - 100

Pressure limiting valve version (sect. 3.1, table 3),

Size (sect. 3.1, table 2)

Flow pattern symbol (sect. 3.1, table 5)

For actuation (table 7)

Pressure specification (bar) for pressure limiting valve

2. Version

Example: Individual connection block for series connection

SKH 31E - 140

Connection block (like with basic type, see sect. 3.1)

Pressure limiting valve (like with versions in sect. 3.1, table 3)

Pressure specification (bar), for versions with pressure limiting valve

' Additional specifications for alternating assembly:Initial and end valve sections (actuations ME (MD, MU) 3/..) with connection plate No. 5703 011 (size 2)

No. 7230 011 (size 3)No. 7194 011 (size 4)

' Connection plate with port R is available for size 2 and 3(type SEH and ..SHA also with G 3/4 (BSPP)(Specify in uncoded text " including connection plateNo. 5703 025"). Not available with alternating actuationassembly ME(MD; MU) 3/.., i.e. without intermediate plate.

SKP - 3 - 6 D/MD 2/24 - M/MD 2/24 - J/ME 2/24 - 130

Table 8: Mixed modes of actuation

The coding for the actuation mode has to be added directly after the flow pattern coding when differing actuations are used with-in one valve bank (applies also to solenoid actuations with single, double or reverse stroke).It should be observed, that if the modes of actuation differ, the manually actuated valves should always be cited first (startingwith the initial valve), another arrangement is not possible.

Order examples:

4/3-way directional spoolvalve with double-strokesolenoid actuation

4/3-way directional spoolvalve with double-strokesolenoid actuation

Design Directional spool valve

Mounting Tapped hole, see unit dimensions in sect. 4 ++

Pipe connection DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP), the proper size for pipe fittings with tapped journals shape B DIN 3852 Bl. 2P = Pump connectionA, B = ConsumerR, R1 = Return pipe portsM = Port for pressure gauge


Max. number of valves

Unit surface Metallically bright (untreated)

Flow

Operating pressure pmax Parallel connection: 400 bar (size 0 to 3) For restrictions depending

315 bar (size 4) on the mode of actuation,Series connection: 315 bar see table 7 and 8

Return pressure The pressure in the return cavity of the individual valve section is also apparent in the actuation cav-ity. Since, in the case of SKH, system pressure prevails due to the series connection, the perm. op-erating pressure is limited by the actuation (see tables 7 and 8) in some cases. Otherwise, the perm.return pressures are tolerable values, e.g. pressures peaks. However, the return line should alwaysbe sufficiently dimensioned and, if possible, routed to the tank without pressure. Pressure limitingvalve versions of the initial valve sections (see sect. 3.1, table 3 "1. version"), are fitted with a diecastspring dome as standard. Suitable for most applications. Version with steel spring dome should beselected, only if pressure surges exceeding 20 bar are expected in the return line R or R1 (e.g. dueto decompression surges of consumers capable of acting as accumulators, long pump lines etc.).

Pressure adjustment atthe pressure limiting valve

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conforming DIN 51524 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conforming DIN 51519.Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 800 mm2/s;opt. operation approx. 10... 200 mm2/s.Also suitable are biologically degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES(Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70 °C.Versions for special fluids, see sect. 6.2

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80 °CFluid: -25 ... +80°C, Note the viscosity range !Permissible temperature during start: -40°C (observe start-viscosity!), as long as the service tem-perature is at least 20K higher for the following operation.Biologically degradable pressure fluids: Observe manufacturer's specifications. By consideration ofthe compatibility with seal material not over +70 °C.

Overlapping Zero, positive or negative depending on the flow pattern, (sect. 3.1, table 5)

Mass (weight) approx. kg Share of the tension rods is included!

Size 0 and 1 2 and 3 4

SKP 10 12 11

SKH 10 8 1) 8 1)

1) More than 8 valves cannot be recommended, sincethe back pressure will become excessive, (see also|-Q-curves)

Size 0 1 2 3 4

(lpm) 12 20 30 50 100

Pay attention to return flow (see |-Q-characteristics). It must not exceed twice of the valve’s Qmax rating

(with solenoid actuation: 1.8 times for SKP and 1.5times for SKH)

Size Connection Directional spool valve complete with actuationblock 2) (initial, add-on, and end valve sections)with endplate 3) Manual Solenoid Mechanic. Press. operation Intermed. (2. version) AD, AK, ME.. ME 2.. MD.. MD(U) 2.. ME 3.. MD 3.. BE, BD NE, NM KM platesSKP SKH AC CK ME 23/.. MD(U) 23/.. MU 3.. RE, RD ND, NU KD 1 2

0 and 1 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.4 --- 1.7 --- --- --- 1.1 0.8 --- 0.3 ---(1.1) (1.7) (1.2) (1.2) (1.6) (1.9) (1.3) (1.0)

2 and 3 1.9 2.4 3.2 3.7 --- 4.7 --- 5.9 5.1 6.5 3.0 2.8 3.3 1.0 1.0(2.4) (3.3) (3.5) (4.0) (5.0) (6.2) (5.4) (6.8) (3.3) (3.1) (3.6)

4 --- --- 3.6 4.1 --- 5.1 --- 6.3 5.5 6.9 3.4 3.2 3.7 1.3 1.3

Pressure |p / turn (bar/turn)range Size 0 and 1 Size 2, 3(bar) 1. Version 2. Version

... 400 100 65 80

... 315 55 51 35

... 160 19 17 17.5

D 7230 page 6

3.3. Further data

2) Figure in brackets = With pressure limiting valve

3) End plate coding 1 = 0.3 kgEnd plate coding 2 and 3 = 1.2 kg

D 7230 page 7

|p-Q-CurveThe curves below illustrates the typical back pressure for valve banks with 5 sections and are to beunderstood as a guideline only. The actual figures depend on the No. of utilized sections.The high back pressure apparent with valve banks type SKH with a high number of sections and solenoid actuation (also manual with contact switch) can be minimized by using type SKP together with idle circulation spool valve (flow pattern U) or a piloted pressure limiting valve type DV 5 G.. - WN 1 F acc. to D 4350. Circulation back pressure approx. 5 bar.

Initial valve

Valve No.

Viscosity during measurements approx. 60 mm2/s

Double acting consumers with unequal area ratio show a return flow thatis either higher or lower than the inflow (dep. on direction). The back pres-sure |ptotal of the spool valve section applies to the inflow side (port P) always.:

Flow Q (lpm)

Flow Q (lpm) Flow Q (lpm) Flow Q (lpm)


Inlet P→A, B

Inlet P→A, B

Inle

t P→

A, B

Inlet P→A, B

InletP→

A, B

Inlet P→A, B

Outlet A, B→R

Outlet A, B→R

Outlet A, B→R

Outlet A, B→R

Outlet A, B→ROutlet A, B→

R

Idle positionP→R

Idle positionP→R

Idle positionP→R

Type SKP

Type SKP

Type SKP

Type SKH

Type SKH

Type SKH

Val

veN

o.

Val

veN

o.

Val

veN

o.

Val

veN

o.

Val

veN

o.

Val

veN

o.

Val

veN

o.

Flow Q (lpm)F

low

resi

stan

ce|

p(b

ar)

Flo

wre

sist

ance|

p(b

ar)

Flo

wre

sist

ance|

p(b

ar)

Flo

wre

sist

ance

|p

(bar

)

Flo

wre

sist

ance

|p

(bar

)F

low

resi

stan

ce|

p(b

ar)

Size 0 and 1

Size 2 and 3

Size 4

inlet

outletoutletinlettotal

A

Appp ∆+∆=∆

inlet

outletinletreturn

A

AQQ =

return

inlet

inlet inlet

inletoutlet

outlet

return

4. Dimension of unitsAll dimensions in mm, subject to change without notice!

4.1. Size 0 and 1

4.1.1. Initial valve 1. version


Connection block withpress. limiting valveSKH 11(12)..

Connection block with-out press. limiting valveSKH 15..

Port P onrear side

M8, 10 deep

M8, 8 deep

M6, 8 deep

End plate

D 7230 page 8

Initial valve withpress. limitingvalve..-6 and ..-3

..-7 and ..-4

Initial valve withoutpress. limiting valve..-5

Add-onvalve section

End valvesection

Endplate

M8, 8 deep

M6, 8 deep

R1 with symbol U

Attention: Port B is not appar-ent with symbol N, A, R, and S;A and B are not apparent withsymbol U!

M8,10 deep

Reversionplatecoding 1

h1 Ports DIN ISO 228/1(BSPP)Size e e1 h SKP SKH P 1), A, B R, R1

0 9.5 30 17.5 20.5 12 G 1/4 G 3/8

1 11 28.5 18.5 21.5 G 3/8

1) P = G 3/8 (BSPP) with SKH-0-5 when at the bottom side2) Solenoid actuation: The piston side of double acting

cylinders should be always connected to A!3) Contact faces sealed via O-rings

Actuation, see sect. 4.4


Connection block withpress. limiting valveSKP 11(12)..

Connection block with-out press. limiting valve SKP 15..

For missingdimensions,see type SKP!

For missing dimensions,see 1. version!

M8, 10 deep

M8, 10 deep

Ports DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP)Size P, R, R1 A, B M

0 G 3/8 G 1/4 G 1/4

1 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/4

Port P onrear side


4.1.2. Connection block 2. version


Adjustable

Fixed setting

2)

3)

(For actuations, see sect. 4.4.1)

appox. 12appox. 12

max. appox. 80

max. appox. 91

appox. 8

appox. 8

D 7230 page 9

Initial valve withpress. limitingvalve..-6 and ..-3

..-7 and ..-4

Initial valve with-out press. limit-ing valve..-5

Spacerplatecoding 2

Add-onsection valve

Endvalvesection

M8,8 deep

Ports A, B, P, R and R1(DIN ISO 228/1) (BSPP):= G 3/8 1) Size 2= G 1/2 Size 3

Ports A, B, P, and R DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP):4) Size 2 = G 3/8

Size 3 = G 1/2

1) G 1/2 (BSPP) for R, when an end plate is used2) Solenoid actuation: The piston side of double

acting cylinders should be always connectedto A!

3) Contact faces sealed via an intermediate platewith vulcanized seals (SKP) or O-rings (SKH,see symbols table 5, sect. 3.1)

4) Port R with SKH = G 1/2 (BSPP)5) Reversion plate coding 1 is like coding 2 of 1. version.

Attention: Port B is not appar-ent with symbol N, A, R, and S;A and B are not apparent withsymbol U!

M8, 8 deep

If pump if con-nected on theside, the baseconnection isplugged off andvice-versa

If the return con-nection is on the bottom, theside connectionis plugged andvice -versa

Base plate with laterally offset return port only with solenoid actuation M.. 3/.. and alternating mounting pattern

Actuationssee sect. 4.4

Series connection type SKH 5)

Connection block withpress. limiting valveSKP 31(32)..

Connection block with-out press. limiting valve SKP 35..

Connecting bank withpress. limiting valveSKH 31(32)..

Connecting bank with-out press. limiting valveSKH 35..

For missing dimensions, see 1. version!

For missing dimensions, see type SKP!

M8, 10 deep M8, 8 deep

Port P on rear side

M8, 10 deep

End platecoding 2

End platecoding 1

Series connection type SKH 5)

4.2.2. Connecting bank 2. version


4.2.1. Initial valve 1. Version


Adjustable

Fixed setting

4.2. Size 2 and 3

2)

3)

5)

Manuallyadjustable

Tool adjustable

(For actuations, see sect. 4.4.2)

For missing dimensions,see type SKP!

max. appox. 91

max. appox. 102 appox. 15 appox. 15

appox. 15

appox. 15appox. 15

max. appox. 82

max. appox. 95

D 7230 page 10

Initialvalve

Add-onvalve section

Endvalvesection

Ports DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A, B, P and R = G 3/4

Separating joint sealed viaspacer with O-rings.

The R connection plate with laterallyoff-set bores is intended for alternatingsolenoid assembly direction M..3/..

The R connection plate with laterally off-set bores is intend-ed for alternating solenoid assembly direction M..3/.., if thesecond to the last solenoid is directed downwards.

For missing data, see above! Lateralport R

Bottom sidedport R

Reversion plate,coding 1

M10,12 deep

The dimensions of spacer platecoding 2 (required for identicalassembly direction of the sole-noids M..3/..) are like with rever-sion plate coding 1, see below.

The piston side of double acting cylinders shouldbe connected to A with solenoid actuation!

Actuations see sect. 4.4.2



4.3. Size 4

(Actuations see sec. 4.4.2)

appox. 20 appox. 20

D 7230 page 11

4.4 Modes of actuation

Only main data is listed here, for more detailed information, see the corresponding pamphlets!

4.4.1. Size 0 and 1

Manual actuation

coding A, AK, C, CK

Solenoid actuation

coding ME.. and MD..


coding RE and RD

Pressure actuation

coding NE and ND

Hand levercan also bemountedhere

Manual emer-gency actuation

Manual emergency actuation ME..N and MD..N:

Illustration showsidle position (not detented).

Attention:Observe the description in D 7055. Thispamphlet may be ordered separately toinclude the section "Manual emergencyactuation" in your operation manual.

Special note for series connection of type SKH:

The manual emergency actuation of valve sections on even position within the valve bank will be very heavy or impossibleto actuate for pressure above 40 bar due to the internal flowreversal (see table 4, sect. 3.1). This effect can be preventedby utilization of reversion plates coding 1 (table 6, sect. 3.1)!

MD.. ME..

app

ox.

40

D 7230 page 12

Solanoid actuation

Coding ME.., MD.. and MU..

For notes regarding manual emergency actuation (M...N) and specialtiesof type SKH, see sect. 4.4.1!

4.4.2. Size 2, 3, and 4 Illustration for size 2, 3, and 4 is identical!

Manual actuation

Coding AD, AK, CD, and CK

(in preferred mounting, assembly Lis shown in pamphlet D 6511/1)


Roller heads Spherical headscoding RE and RD coding BE and BD

Pressure actuation

Standard versionscoding NE, ND, NU, and NM

Hand levercan also bemounted here

MD(U).. ME..

Coding b b1

ME2/..MD 2/.. 51.5 60MU 2/..

ME 23/..MD 23/.. 51.5 60MU 23/..

ME3/..MD 3/.. #72 #72

MU 3/..

Combined actuationcoding KD and KM

app

ox.

235

app

ox.

342

D 7230 page 13

5. Appendix5.1. Circuit and assembly examples

Size 0 and 1

Example 1: 1. Version (series connection), initial spool valve sectionwith manually adjustable pressure limiting valve (120 bar),solenoid actuation and reversion plate to ensure correctflow direction of the bottom side port R at the end spoolvalve section (size 1) due to even number of valve sections.

SKH - 1 -7LLP1H - MD8 - 120

Example 2: 2. Version (parallel connection),connection block with tool ad-justable pressure limiting valve (300 bar), pressure actuation, size 0.

SKP 11C -0 -DDE - ND - 300

Example 3: 1. Version (parallel connection), initial spoolvalve section without pressure limiting valve,manual actuation (AD), size 3.

SKP - 5 -5MNC - AD

Example 4: 1. Version (parallel connection), initial spoolvalve section without pressure limiting valve andend plate after the last spool valve section (see footnote 2) regarding table 5, sect. 3.1).

SKP - 3 - 5MGN - 1 - MD 2/24

Example 5: 1. Version (parallel connection), initial spoolvalve section with manually adjustable pressure limiting valve (240 bar), solenoid actuation MD 3/24 alternatingly sided (with-out spacer plate coding 2), every valve section on an even position is rotated by 180°(upside down).

SKP - 3 - 7MMMM - MD 3/24 - 240

Size 2 and 3

Endplate

D 7230 page 14

Size 4

Example 6: Parallel connection, solenoid actuation MD 3/24 or MU 3/24 alternatingly sided (without spacer plate coding 2). This examplealso shown mixed actuation modes (table 8).

SKP - 45 N/MD 3/24 - G/MD 3/24 - G/MD 3/24 - W/MU 3/24

Example 7: Series connection, solenoid actuation MD3/24 with identical assembly orientationenabled via reversion plates coding 1

SKH - 4 - 5L1L1S - MD 3/24

Intended for direct mounting onto compact hydraulic power packs type HC acc. to D 7900; HK acc .to D 7600 ++MP acc. to D 7200 H

5.2. Connection block type SKC 1.. for directional spool valves type SKP and SKH

- SKC 11 M/MD 2

- SKC 14 S

Coding examples: HC 34/5,6 - D/MD2 - W/ME2 - 130 Motor voltage 3 + 400V 50Hz

MP 44A-Z9/B25 - LF- MD8 - 100 Motor voltage 3 + 230/400V 50Hz

Compact hydraulic power packsacc. to D 7900 or D 7200H

Basic typeandsize

SKC 1

Pressure limiting valveStand- Steel Pressure ard spring dome range (bar)

1 3

2 4

(20) ... 400 1)(20) ... 315(20) ... 160

(0) ... 400 1)(0) ... 315(0) ... 160

Tooladjustable

Manuallyadjustable 1) Not for series connection.

With solenoid actuation only up to200 bar (see table 7 and 8)

Pressure specification (bar)for the pressure limiting valve

Add-on spool valve (inter-spool valve)with solenoid actuation (best with actu-ations below).Manual actuation only with bent handlever (see Sk 7257).Mechanical and pressure actuation only for parallel connection; series con-nection only with type SKC 1.. withoutadd-on spool valves.

Integrated direction-al spool valve (initialspool valve section)

Applicable flow pat-tern symbols, acc.to table 5, sect. 3.1:

M, D, E, A, J, R,

U, L, P, S

Ports DIN ISO228/1(BSPP):A, B, R, R1 = G 3/8M = G 1/4

Mass (weight):approx. 2.6 kg (at ME..-act.)approx.. 3 kg(at MD(U)..-act.)

Example circuits according to above order examples

HC 34/5,6-SKC11M/MD2-D/MD2-W/ME2-130 MP44A-Z9/B25-SKC14S-LF-MD8-100

Motor voltage 3 + 400V 50Hz Motor voltage 3 + 230/400V 50Hz

Attention: The return connection between portR1 at the end plate and port R at theinitial valve section has to be customerfurnished, when the valve sections areconnected internally in series!

MP 44A-Z9HC 34/5,6

D 7230 page 15

Dimensions

All dimensions in mm, subject to change without notice!


Adjustable FixedFor missing dimensions,see sect. 4.1!

Pressure porte.g. for pres-sure gauge orpressure switchunit

Illustration, when directly mounted onto compact

hydraulic power pack type HC

(similar assembly onto type HK)

Illustration, when directly mounted onto compact

hydraulic power pack type MP

Pumps HC 1 HC 2 HC 3 HC 4 HK 2.. HK 3.. HK 4..HCG 11

a 70 85 102 124 100 108 124

b 24 39 52 65 35 45 50

End platewith SKP..

End platewith SKH.. 1)

Ports DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A, B, R, R1 = G 3/8M = G 1/4

1) Connections for external, customer furnished return lineR→R1, see circuit example in sect. 5.2.

Tanks B 3 B 5 B 10 B 25 B 55

Cover plates D 3 D 5 D 10 D 25 D 55

c 59 74 77 87 117

appox. 12appox. 12

Coding examp.: Z 12.3/B40-V2.2-A100 - GE - MD8

R 23.5/B75-V11- A230 - LH - AK

D 7230 page 16

5.3. Adapter plates for directional spool valve banks type SKP and SKHfor direct mounting onto hydraulic power packs type R acc. to D 6010 H and type Z acc .to D 6820

- SKP 16

- SKH 37

Hydraulic power packs acc. to D 6010 H and D 6820

Basic type (table 1, sect. 3.1)SKP = Parallel connectionSKH = Series connection

Table 10: Adapter plate

Motor voltage 3 + 230/400V 50Hz

Motor voltage 3 + 400V 50Hz

Suited forsize

0

1

2

3

2

3

Coding

06

16

27

37

28

38

Suitable for tank / coverplate (acc. to D 6010 H,D 6820)

B 6 to B 40D 6 to D 30

B 50 and B 75D 50

B 100 to B 400D 100 and D 250

Mass(weight)approx. kg

0.8

0.8

2.3

Add-on spool valve (for flow pattern symbols, see table 5,sect. 3.1)

Z 12.3/B40-V2.2-A100-SKP16-GE-MD8

R 23.5/B75-V11-A230-SKH37-LH-AK

Actuation (table 7 and 8)Best with solenoid or manual actuation. Other actuations areless common here:Mechanical and pressure actuation only for parallel connec-tion; only with an add-on spool valve section when seriesconnection is intended.

Attention:The return connectionbetween port R1 at theend plate and port R atthe initial valve sectionhas to be customer fur-nished, when the valvesections are connectedinternally in series!

Dimensions of units

All dimensions are in mm, subject to change without notice!

For missing dimensions,see sect. 4.1!

Adapter platecoding 06 and 16

For connection block withpressure limiting valve,see D 6010 H or D 6820

Adapter platecoding 27 and 37

28 and 38

For connection block withpressure limiting valve,see D 6010 H or D 6820

End plate forSKP SKH.. 1)

End plate forSKP SKH.. 1)

For missing dimensions,see sect. 4.1!

1) Ports for external, customer furnished return line R→R1, see example above.

l = 115 (D50); 135 (D100); 190 (D 250)

b = 134 (D50) 138 (D100)193 (D 250)

Directional seated valvesDirectly actuated, leakagefree for hydraulic systems

For the assembly on connection sub-plates

D 7300Directional seated valves

May 2007-06


2.2


Valve for sub-plate mounting Section 3 Pressure pmax = 350...500 (700) barValve with individual connection sub-plate Section 5 Flow Qmax = 6...120 lpmDirectional valve bank D 7302

1. General informationDirectional control valves are generally used for the direct, leakage free control of consumers and as pilot valves for hydraulically actuated valves (depending on the flow pattern). They are designed as spring returned ball seated valves. The valve elements are forced into their respective switching position against the spring force and fluid pressure by various actuation elements via an elbow lever acting on a pin. A strainer insert in the inlet port prevents the entry of coarse contamination.The fluid ducts end as holes with O-ring seals at the ground, bottom surface of the valve body. Pipes may be connected either via customer furnished connection blocks or sub-plates (for individual valves with sub-plates see sect. 5 or for valve banks see D 7302).These valves do not show any leakage in blocked switching position. Reliable shifting is ensured, as these valves are designed as ball seated valves where there is no seizing or sticking in working position under full pressure. The leverage between actuation and valve element ensures low actuation forces and smooth shifting. To avoid interaction, most of these directional control valves are available with check valve inserts and return pressure stops or orifice inserts to limit the inflow of oil.Individual valves with sub-plate, enabling direct pipe connection, may be equipped with a by-pass check valve, a pressure limiting valve, or a rectifier circuit by means of check valves.

2. Overview(For complete type overview, see sect. 8)

Individual valve for manifold mounting

Solenoid actuated 2/2-way directional seated valve, size 1, free flow when deenergized

Actuation modesFor detailed data. see section 4++.(Max. pressure rating depending on flow pattern and size. see sect. 3.1 table 2)

Solenoid actuated 3/2-way directional seated valve, size 2 with check valve insert in port P

Tapped ports in the connection sub-plate, G 3/8 (BSPP)

Individual valve with connection sub-plate for direct pipe connection

e.g. GS 2-1-G 24 e.g. GZ 3-2R-3/8-G 24

Code letter

Picture and symbol

Solenoid

G WG

Pressure hydraulic pneumatic

H P

Mechanical roller pin

K T

Manual feeler turn-knob

F D

D 7300 page 2

Order example:

Solenoid actuation (acc. to sect. 4.1)G = DCWG = AC

For actuation modes H, P, K, T, F, D, see sect. 2 and 4.2 ++

3. Individual valves, manifold mounting 3.1 Valve

(For individual valves with connection sub-plate for pipe connection, see sect. 5)

G R2 - 3 R - G 24

Table 1: Flow pattern

Coding

Detailed symbols (must be completed by actua-tion sym-bol)

Simplified flow pattern symbol

2/2-way valve

R2 3) S2 3)

3/2-way valve

3 3) Z3 3)

3/3-way valve

21 3)

4/3-way valve

22 1)

4/2-way valve

4 2) 3) Z4 2) 3)

1) Not available for size 4! Note the arrangement of solenoids a and b in relation to the ports A and B, see dim. drawings sect. 3.3.3

2) Only available for size 13) Size 1 also available as explosion-proof version, see sect. 4.1.3

Table 2: Size, main data

Coding

Max. flow approx. lpm

Directional valves (... -way)

Type G.. and WG..

Type H..

Type P..

Type K..

Type T..

Type F..

Type D..

0

6

2/2; 3/2 3/3 4/3

500 350

500 500

--- ---

--- ---

--- ---

--- ---

500 --- ---

1

12

2/2; 3/2; 3/3; 4/2 4/3

500 4) 350

700 500

700 400

700 400

700 400

700 400

700 400

2

25

2/2; 3/2; 3/3 4/3

500 4) 350

500 500

500 400

500 400

500 400

500 400

500 ---

3

65

2/2; 3/2; 3/3 4/3

400 350

400 400

400 350

400 350

--- ---

400 350

--- ---

4

120

2/2; 3/2; 3/3

350

---

---

---

---

---

---

Pres-surepmax(bar)

4) For max. pressure during shifting, see sect. 4.1

Table 3: Additional elements to influence shifting operations, inserted in port P or R (can be retrofitted).

Additional element

solenoid voltage (standard)G 24 = 24 V DC; WG 230 = 230 V ACsee sect. 4.1Additional element (see table 3)

Size and main data (see table 2)

Note

Not avail. for 3/3- and 4/3-way directional spool valves type ...21 and ...22The check valve prevents an uncontrolled impact or reflow RdP or AdP, e.g. if the inlet pressure at P drops below the consumer pressure at A (during idle position or actuation of another consumer with a lower pres-sure requirement) when several valves are connected in parallel. A pressure reduction is prevented during such switching operations.

Not available for 4/3-way valves type ...22 !The orifice serves to limit the flow (see |p-Q curves) and should be installed if flow rates higher than Qmax (table 2) can occur while switching from PdA(R): Hydraulic accumulators on the pump side P or in the case of hydr. servo operation of directional spool valves with control oil supply from the high flow main gallery.

Only available for 3/2-way valves types ..3-.. or ..Z3-.. .Check valves may be installed in the reflow ports R of 3/2-way valves size 0 and 1. With parallel shifting of several valves, they prevent pressure surg-es from migrating via the common reflow gallery into non-operated, easily moving and unloaded consumers if there is a connection AdR, thus preventing uncontrolled extension movements. Such pressure surges can be caused by shifting operations. These check valves are not intended for blocking off hydraulic oil, which depending on the combination of switching operations of other valves, can arise at port R.

Coding and symbol

R

B

S

for Type size

all

all

0 7332 000 a

1 7332 000 b

Insert check valves type ER acc. to D 7325 e.g. type ER 01 for valves size 0

Insert orifices type EBacc. toD 6465

Return pressure stop

A combination with check valve or orifice in port P is possible e.g. G 3-1 BS-G 24, GZ 3-1 RS-G 24

Installation illustration

Check valve or orifice installed in port P

Return pressure stop installed in port R


Pressure actuation

Solenoid actuation

Manual actuation

size 0 = EB 0-0,6 1 = EB 1-0,8 2 = EB 2-1,2 3 = EB 3-2,5 4 = EB 4-4,0

D 7300 page 3

3.2 Further characteristic data3.2.1 General and hydraulic parameters

Description 2/2-, 3/2-, 3/3, 4/3- and 4/2-way valve

Design Seated ball valve

Mounting type and Manifold mountingleeds connection

Installation position Any; Vertically with actuation up (best)

Direction of flow Only in arrow direction acc. to flow pattern in sect. 3.1 The location of ports P (pump), R (return flow), A and B (consumers) are dictated by the internal

design and can‘t be readily interchanged.

Overlap Negative, i.e. the transition from shifting pos. 0 into a and vice versa is gradual, with 3/2-way valves all ports may be interconnected during this state. See also sect. 3.1 (table 3) „Additional orifice“ !

Operation pressure See sect. 3.1. All ports may be subject to the full oper. pressure, but a pressure drop must be maintained in flow direction acc. to the flow pattern in sect. 3.1, i.e. P Ú A(B) Ú R. With 4/3-way valves connection R must be employed as return flow only.For permissible pressure during switching operations, see sect. 4.1.

Static overload capacity Approx. 2 x pmax, applies only to valves in idle position (pmax from table 2 sect. 3.1)

Flow rating See sect. 3.1. Pay attention to the area ratio of double acting consumers (differtial cylinders), i.e. the return might be higher than the inflow.

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conforming DIN 51524 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conforming DIN 51519 Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 800 mm2/s Optimal operation: Approx. 10 ... 200 mm2/s Also suitable for biological degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES

(Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70 °C. For other fluids see sect. 6.2.

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40...+80°C; Fluid: -25...+80°C, pay attention to the viscosity range! Start temperature down to -40°C are allowable (Pay attention to the viscosity range during start!),

as long as the operation temperature during subsequent running is at least 20K higher. Biological degradable pressure fluids: Pay attention to manufacturer‘s information. With regard to the compat-ibility with sealing materials do not exceed +70°C.

Restrictions for version with ex-proof solenoid!

2/2- and 3/2-way valvesAdditional elements

(the figures for |p PdA(R) below are to be added !)

Check valve

Orifice

3/3-, 4/3- and 4/2-way valves

Curve c: PdA(B) Curve d: A(B)dR

Curve a: PdA and AdR Curve b: PdR

Size 1

Size 0

Size 2 Size 3

Size 4

Size 1

Size 0

Size 2 Size 3

Size 4

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)B

ack

pre

ssur

e |

p (b

ar)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)B

ack

pre

ssur

e |

p (b

ar)

Flow rate Q (lpm) Flow rate Q (lpm) Flow rate Q (lpm)

Flow rate Q (lpm)Flow rate Q (lpm)Flow rate Q (lpm)

Size 0 1 2 3 4

corresp. to nom. size 4 6 10 15 20

|p-Q curves (guideline)Oil viscosity during tests approx. 60 mm2/s

D 7300 page 4

3.3.2 4/2-way valve

Coding .4-.. or .Z4-.. Holes in the manifold and sealing of the ports by O-rings 2)

3.3 Dimensions,All dimensions are in mm and are subject to change without notice!

3.3.1 2/2- and 3/2-way valves

Coding .R2-.., .S2-.., .3-.., .Z3-..Port A is internally blocked at 2/2-way valves, but an O-ring must be installed if the valve is mounted on a sub-plate.

Size 0 and 1 Size 2 and 3 Size 4

valve only. For the dimensions of the actuations see sect. 4.1 ++

1) Port B (G1/4 (BSPP)) is unplugged, at versions with sub-plate acc. to section 5 or when installed in a valve bank type VB11... acc. to D 7302

2) Available as a complete seal kit (see sect. 4.5).

Size 1:Countersinking of the mounting thread

2/2- and3/2-way valve

4/2- way valve

Size

0

1

2

3

4

1

Ports

P and R

A

P and R

A

P

A and R

P

A and R

A, P and R

P

A, B and R

#d

3.5

3

4.5

4.5

9

9

12

12

20

4.5

4.5

O-ringNBR 90 Sh

6x1.5

3.5x1.2

8x1.5

5x1.5

14x2

10x2.2

17.12x2.62

13.95x2.62

8x1.5

5x1.5

Size

0

1

2

3

L

32

40

50

70

L1

41.5

50

62.5

91.5

B

36

45

56

70

H

27

35

55

70

a

10

13

16.6

24

a1

12

14.5

18

20

b

16

20

26.6

40

b1

18

22.5

31

45

c

22

27

38.8

55

c1

24

30.5

32

45

e

24

30

39

54

e1

28

35

43

54

f

4

5

5.1

8

f1

4

5

6.5

8

g

M5

M6

M8

M10

k

7

8

11

17

m

4

9

10

10

O-ring

For dimensions of the valve, see sect. 3.3.1 (size 1)!

M6

KANTSEAL seal ring 6096 5217-00

Size 0: 6.5 NmSize 1: 9.5 Nm

Size 2: 23 NmSize 3: 46 Nm Size 4: 80 Nm

D 7300 page 5

Ports Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3

#d P, R, A a. B 3.5 4.5 9 12

P 6x1.5 8x1.5 14x2 17.12x2.62

R, A and B 6x1.5 5x1.5 10x2.2 13.95x2.62

Holes in the manifold and sealing of the ports by O-rings 1)

Size

0 1 2 3

L 75 92 116 144

B 32 40 50 70

H 31 40 59 70

a 4 5 5.5 8

b 24 30 39 54

c 23 28 39 55

e 11 13 17 22

f 27 35 45 55

g M5 M6 M8 M10

h 4.5 9 10 10

i 19 24 30 38

l 66 82 103 128

m 7 8 11 17

n 11 13 17 23

o 38 45 53 64

Size 0 1 2 3 4

L 75 92 116 144 162

B 32 40 50 70 100

H 27 35 55 70 101

a 4 5 5.5 8 9

b 24 30 39 54 82

c 23 28 39 55 74

e 11 13 20 24 27

f 16 27 26 26 41

g M5 M6 M8 M10 M12

h 3.5 9 10 10 16

i 19 20 26 20 25

k 13 15 22 20 25

l 66 82 103 128 144

m 7 8 11 17 18

n 10 10 13 22 26

o 38 45 53 72 82

3.3.3 3/3- and 4/3-way valves

3/3-way valve

Coding .21-..

4/3-way valve

Coding .22-..

O-ring

1) Available as a complete seal kit (see sect. 4.5).

P, R, A and B

Attention: Both return ports R have to be connected, as there is no internal connection.

D 7300 page 6

With load cycles Ò 10% ED Ambient temp. Ò 40°C (not 4/3-way valves type ...22)

4. Actuation modes4.1 Solenoid actuation (standard)

The solenoids are built and checked conforming to VDE 0580.

Valve type acc. to sect. 3.1 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4

G... WG... 1) G... WG... 1) G... WG... G... WG... G... WG...

Nom. voltage UN 12V DC, 24V DC, 110V DC, 230V AC see also sect. 4.1.2

Nom. current IN 2) (A) 0.67 0.08 0.83 0.1 1.1 0.13 2.1 0.26 3.6 0.44

Nom. power PN 2) (W) 16 16 20 20 26 26 50 50 86 86

on (ms) 40 80 100 100 140 140 175 175 150 150

off (ms) 40 100 50 125 55 150 65 200 100 4) 350 4)

Switchings per hour / h Approx. 2000 (G.. and WG.. all sizes); approx. evenly distributed

Protection mode IP 54 acc. to IEC 60529 (readily assembled), IP 67 acc. to IEC 60529 for explosion-proof version

Isolationsklasse F H

Cut-off energy (Ws) 0.16 0.16 0.24 0.24 0.38 0.38 1.59 1.59 3.4 3.4

Guideline for max. value + approx. 10% according to tests with nom. voltage and 20°C

; ? < > 1) = > = > = >

; Plug MSD 2 3)

< Plug MSD 1 3)

= Plug conf. EN 175 301-803, e.g. MSD 3-309 3)

> Adapter + Socket A MSD 1-MSD 3 + MSD 4-209 P10 3)

? Adapter + Socket A MSD 2-MSD 3 WG + MSD 3-309 3)

These connectors 3) are part of the order coding as standard. For other connectors e.g. with clamp diode, economy circuit or LED‘s see D 7163.

The solenoid valves are suitable for normal outdoor use, if the solenoids are installed vertcall (indicated by previous experience).

100% ED (stamped on the solenoid), however observe operating duty cycle !Rel. duty cycle

Permissible operation conditions for outdoor use

Connection scheme of the plugs

Plug conf. EN 175 301-803

Adapters for size 0 and 1, see sect. 4.1.1

The curves do apply to stand-alone, individual valves only! If the valves are installed in a cabinet, it should be al-ways equipped with louvers! In case of bank arrangement and ambient temperatures above 40°C the layout should be designed in such a way that adjoining solenoids are not energized over prolonged periods.

Increased switchable pressure (other than listed in sect. 3.1) for size 1, 2 and 4

1) Only with adapter, see sect. 4.1.12) The electrical data for solenoids G and WG are only a guideline (max) and may vary depending on manufacturer.3) Co. K + B GmbH, D-84056 Rottenburg a.d.L.; This type of plug must be specified, when placing a separate orders.4) Possibly increased tolerance, above 250 bar.5) Attention: The storage capability of high pressure consumers has to be taken into consideration. Pressure surges during decharging, which

might harm internal functional parts of the valve or fatigue fracture of other hydraulic components of the application can be prevented by installing orifices (see sect. 3.1) upstream.

Switching time (guideline)

Type WG...

Type G...

Rel. duty cycle during operation

Am

bie

nt

tem

per

ature

U (°

C)

Rel. duty cycle

Rel. duty cycle (%ED) Continuous operation

Type

G... a. WG..

pmax(bar)

700

Qmax 5)(lpm)

8

Valves size 1

pmax(bar)

700

Qmax 5)(lpm)

12

Valves size 2

pmax(bar)

400

Qmax 5)(lpm)

60

Valves size 4type GR 2-4-G..

Version for size 0 to 3

Version for size 4

(Cycle time)

Time

tr = · 100 (%ED)tein

T

D 7300 page 7

4.1.1 Plugs for valves size 0 and size 1

The standard version comes with a plug (see dimensional drawing and connection scheme)

Order example: GR 2-1 Solenoid voltage 24V DC

Plug type

4.1.2 Solenoid voltage Attention: It is important to specify the voltage !

1) Notes for proper selection: DC: The order specification (solenoid)

should be identical with the one of the power supply (DC). If the supply voltage is lower it will reduce the force of the solenoid, if it is high-er the solenoid will be heated up unpermissibly (tolerance ± 5-10%).

AC: The order specification should be identical with the one of the power supply (50/60 Hz AC). The voltage of the solenoid is approx. 0.9 UAC-2 V due to the corresponding bridge rectifier. The table identifies the so-lenoids utilized in such cases (e.g. for 110V AC 50 Hz; solenoid with UN = 98V DC)

The indicated nominal power ratings are ap-proximate reference values, which may dif-fer insignificantly depending on the voltage and the manufacturer of the solenoid. The current rating in cold state is I20 = PN / UN (see examples)

Order specification Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4

DC 1) AC 1) (& UN [V]) 50/60 Hz (16 W) (20 W) (26 W) (50 W) (86 W)

G 12 x x x x x

G 24 WG...-WG 24 x x x x x

G 24 EX x (23 W)

G 36 WG...-WG 42 x x

G 42 WG...-WG 48 x x x

G 48 x x x x

G 80 x x x x

G 98 WG...-WG 110 x x x x x

G 110 x x x x

G 125 x x x

G 185 WG...-WG 200 x x x (180V DC) x

G 205 WG...-WG 230 x x x x x

G 220 x x x

-A 24

Coding

Note

Socket Size 0

Size 1

MSD 2

MSD 1

MSD 2-MSD 3WG+ MSD 3-309MSD 1-MSD 3+ MSD 4-209 P10

MSD 2-MSD 3 MSD 1-MSD 3

MSD 2-MSD 3+ MSD 3-309MSD 1-MSD 3+ MSD 3-309

Central plugs (serie)

Valve with adapter and bridge rectifier (socket)The bridge rectifier is incorpo-rated in the adapter for size 0

Valve with adapter for plugs shape A EN 175301-803 is customer furnished

Valve with adapter and, plug shape A EN 175301-803

G WG A N

(Nominal power PN)

GR 2-2 - G 24 (I20 = 0.54 A)G 3-0R - A 110 (I20 = 0.15 A)WGZ 4-1 - W 200 (I20 = 0.11 A)

Examples:

Directional seated valve acc. to section 3.1

Electrical data for explosion-proof solenoids

ATEX-Certificate of conformity TÜV-A-03 ATEX 0017 XCoding O II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 T4 O II 2 D Ex mbD 21 T135°C Oper. duration 100% EDDuty cycle IP 67 (IEC 60529)Nom. voltage UN 24 V DCPower PN 23 WRestrictions for use:

Ambient temperature -35 ... +40°Cmax. fluid temperature +70°Cel. protection against overload (conf. IEC 60127) IF < 1.6-A-TSurface coating Housing galvanically zinc coated

Coil and connection cavity are mouldedElectrical connection 3x0.5 mm2


Attention: Protect the complete valve against direct sun light.

Observe the operation manuals B 03/2004 and B ATEX!Electrical lay-out and testing conforming EN 60079, VDE 0170-1, VDE 0170-5

Note:

Only 40 % ED are permissible if the valves are neighboring, it is additionally recom-mended that neighboring valves are not actuated simultaneously.

PE 1 2 Housing

Attention:

- Flow pattern 21 and 22 not available with explosion-proof solenoids

Explosion-proof solenoids

Connection scheme of the plugs

D 7300 page 8

4.1.3 Unit dimensions

All dimensions are in mm and are subject to change without notice!

1) It is not possible to install the plug in any position if the valve is part of a valve bank (see D 7302)

2) Either in upward or downward valve bank (see

D 7302)

3) This dimension is depending on the manufacturer and

may be up to 40 mm more DIN 43650

4) The bridge rectifier is incorporated in the adapter with type WG.. size 0 and with size 1 it is part of the plug

May be installed rotated by 90° 2)

May be installed rotated by 90° 2)

May be installed rotated by 22.5° 1)

Suited for leeds #6

Plug may be installed rotated by 180°

Adapter for plugs DIN (ISO 4400) 4)

Adapter plug acc. to sect. 4.1.1, for dimension see size 4

Adapter may be in-stalled rotated by 180°

Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 and 3 Size 4

For di-mensions see size 4

Size D Hmax hmax a

2 50 71.5 26 30 3 62 92 27 46

Size 0 and 1

Push the emergency actua-tion pin inward by means of a screw driver or similar, if required

Press the actuation pin hid-den under the rubber cap.

Size

Max. actuation force (N)

Cross sectional drawing

0 1 4 2 3

35 80 450 150 250

Manual emergency operation

The manual emergency actuation may be put out of function by blocking the tapped hole by means of a screw M3x5 DIN 921

Note

Size 1 with explosion-proof solenoids

Twist stop

Manual emergency

app

rox.

24

app

rox.

34

D 7300 page 9

4.2 Hydraulic and pneumatic actuation

The actuation element is a single acting piston with spring return.The valve will remain in its working position a as long as the control pressure prevails. It will return automatically in its idle position 0 if the control pressure is relieved.The piston is sealed and operates without any leakage.

Hydraulically

(Size 0 ... 3)

Oil

H...

Pneumatically

(Size 1, 2, 3)

Compressed air, filtered and oiled

P...

Actuation

Control medium

Coding

Size 0 1 2 3 1 2 3

Control pressure (bar) max 500 700 500 400 15

min 16 12 9 9 4 2.5 2.5

Control volume (cm3) 0.2 0.4 0.7 6.1 1 2.5 7

D 32 39 49 60 39 49 60

H 44 36 52 77 36 39 52

a/f 27 27 32 41 --- --- ---

Temperature (ambient and control medium) -40 to + 80°C -20 to + 70°C

a/f

Size 1 2 3 1 2

Switching force range s (N) 25 to 28 42 to 47 55 to 80 51 to 57 95 to 120

Start of function (H + h) 38.5 46.5 76 --- ---

Function path h 10.5 15.5 30 4 5

Switching position range s 3 4 6 --- ---

D 39 49 60 39 49

d 25 25 35 18 22

H 28 31 46 20.5 25.5

H1 --- --- --- 16.5 20.5

a 42 41 62.5 --- ---

b 21 21 26 --- ---

c 12 12 15 --- ---

Actuation mode

Code letter

Dimensional drawing

Roller lever (Size 1, 2, 3) Feeler pin (Size 1 and 2)

K... T...

Do not use as a stop!

Do not use as a stop!

Roller lever switching curve operation direction

dea

d m

otio

n

4.3 Mechanical actuation

The actuation element is a pin (tracer) with spring return, which may be used either directly for vertical directions of operation or via a roller lever for lateral directions. The valve is in working position a if the actuation element is forced into the hatched area of the lever path.


±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

Switch-ing path (mm)

1) conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP)


D 7300 page 10

4.4 Manual actuation

Feeler lever coding F: The actuation element is a feeler lever which acts on a spring loaded pin. Switching position a is retained as long as the feeler lever is pressed down within the hatched area.v

Turn knob coding D: This actuation element is with detent. Switching position a or 0 alternate as the knob is turned by 90°. The direction of rotation is arbitrary.

Actuation mode

Code letter

Dimensional drawing

Feeler lever (size 1, 2, 3) Turn knob (size 0, 1, 2)

F... D...

Size 1 2 3 0 1 2

Actuation force in the range s (N) 25 to 28 42 to 47 55 to 80 --- --- ---

Switching torque (Ncm) --- --- --- 45 63 98

Actuation travel (mm) hmax 20.5 23.5 45 --- --- ---

s 3.5 4 10 3.5 3.5 5

D 39 49 60 --- --- ---

H 37 43 70 38 40 47

B 34.5 32 56.5 43 43 52

Not to usedas a stop !

Switch-ingposition

4.5 Seal kitsFlow pattern

..R2

..S2

..3

..Z3

..4

..Z4

..21

..22

Size

0

1

2

3

4

0

1

2

3

4

0

1

2

3

G, WG, K, T, F and D

1 x DS 7300-01

1 x DS 7300-11

1 x DS 7300-2N

1 x DS 7300-31

1 x DS 7300-41

1 x DS 7300-02

1 x DS 7300-12

1 x DS 7300-21N

1 x DS 7300-32

1 x DS 7300-42

1 x DS 7300-02

1 x DS 7300-12

1 x DS 7300-22

1 x DS 7300-33

H and P

1 x DS 7300-011 x DS 7300-03

1 x DS 7300-111 x DS 7300-13

1 x DS 7300-2N1 x DS 7300-23

1 x DS 7300-311 x DS 7300-34

1 x DS 7300-022 x DS 7300-03

1 x DS 7300-122 x DS 7300-13

1 x DS 7300-21N2 x DS 7300-23

1 x DS 7300-322 x DS 7300-34

1 x DS 7300-022 x DS 7300-03

1 x DS 7300-122 x DS 7300-13

1 x DS 7300-222 x DS 7300-23

1 x DS 7300-332 x DS 7300-34

Seal kit for actuation

These seal kits contain the O-rings listed in sect. 3.3 and additional parts and seals.For more detailed information, see spare parts lists E 7300-0, E 7300-1, E 7300-2, E 7300-3 and E 7300-4.


D 7300 page 11

5. Individual valve with connection sub-plateAll ports of the 2/2-, 3/2-, 3/3- and 4/3-way directional seated valves acc. to section 3 are designed as holes with O-ring sealing at the ground bottom of the valve body. These valves have to be completed with sub-plates or customer furnished manifolds to enable pipe connection.

5.1 Available versions, main data

Order example: GR 2-2 - 1/2S 220- G 12 -

Valve coding acc. to sect. 3

Desired pressure setting in bar

(Pressure range depending on spring, see <)

Suited for connection in series and in parallel, if the perm. pressure stated in section 3.2. „Operation pressure“ for P, A, B and R are not exceeded.

The rectifier circuit by means of check valves enables both flow directions for the 2/2-way valves. Therefore the port codings P and R are not stamped on the sub-plate.

1) For male pipe fittings with journals shape B DIN 3852 page 2. 2) Not available for flow pattern 4 and Z4 (table 1)

Port R may be used only for unpressurized return flow to ensure proper function of the pressure reducing valve. Paral-

lel connection of additional valves is only permissible with sub-plates acc. to ; but not with sub-plates acc. to <

A by-pass check valve (RK 3 acc. to D 7445) is required to enable flow RdP. Pressure surges (decompression) in flow direction RdP should be avoided ! For pressure rating of R, see sect. 3.2.

Version with G 1 is not available

The pressure specification in the order coding determines the pressure range of the spring (size 0) and additionally the valve seat dimension for size 1 and 2.

Connection block without additional features

Connection with pressure limiting valve

../..Stool adjust-able

../..SRmanually adjustable

Connection block with by-pass check valve

Not available for other sizes !

Connection block with recti-fier circuit by means of check valves

Coding

-1/4

-3/8

-1/2

-3/4

-1

Ports con-forming ISO 228/1 1) (BSPP)

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 3/4

G 1

Avail-able for size

0 and 1

1 and 2

2 and 3

3 and 4

4

-1/4 S(R)

-3/8 S(R)

-1/2 S(R)

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 1/2

0 and 1

1 and 2

2

-1/4 C

-3/8 C

-1/2 C

-3/4 C

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 3/4

0 and 1

1 and 2

2

3

-1/4 G

-3/8 G

-1/2 G

-3/4 G

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 3/4

0 and 1

2

3

4

Flow pattern overviewThese symbols have to be completed with the actuation symbols.

2/2-way valve

3/2-way valve

3/3-way valve

4/2-way valve

4/3-way valve

Not available for other sizes !

The connection block with pressure limiting valve is not available for 3/3- and 4/3-way directional valves!

Pressure range Coding

-1/4 S(R)

-3/8 S(R)

-1/2 S(R)

Valve size

0

1

1 and 2

2

Press. (bar

(0) ... 350(0) ... 500

(0) ... 100(0) ... 200(0) ... 400(0) ... 700

This connection block is only available for 2/2-way direc-tional valves!pmax (bar) and Qmax (lpm) are determined by the installed valve.

This connection block is only available for 2/2-way direc-tional valves!pmax (bar) and Qmax (lpm) are determined by the installed valve.

;

<

>

=

2)

D 7300 page 12

5.2 |p - Q - curves

Guideline for valve including sub-plate and a fluid viscosity of approx. 60 mm2/s

Flow direction P d R

sub-plates ; , < and =

Flow direction R d P

sub-plates =

Flow direction P d R (R d P)

sub-plates >

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)

3/2- and4/2-way valve

PdAAdR

2/2--way valve

PdR


Flow Q (lpm)

ValvesSize 0

Size 1

Size 2

Size 3

Size 4

ValvesSize 0

Size 1

Size 2

Example:

A flow of 20 l/min is applied to valve type GR 2-2-1/2C (sub-plate =)

SpP d R , 12 ... 14 bar acc. to table ;SpR d P , 2 bar acc. to table

D 7300 page 13

5.3 Unit dimensions

5.3.1 Connection sub-plates acc. to ; and =

2/2- and 3/2-way valves

Attention: Port A is alsolete with 2/2-way valves, for all other dimensions see 3/2-way valve.

Size 0 and 1Type: ..-1/4(C) or ..-3/8(C) e.g. GZ 3-1-1/4C-G 24

Size 2 and 3Type: ..-3/8(C); ..-1/2(C); ..-3/4(C) e.g. WG 3-3-1/2-G 24

Size 4Type: ..-3/4 or ..-1 e.g. GS 2-4-1-G 24


Size L L1 B H H1 a a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 b c c1 e e1 f g h

0 75 75 40 25 25 50 20 30 56.5 15 25 18.5 24 8.5 9 66 66 4.5 M5, 6 deep 12.5

1 92 92 50 30 30 62 22 22 71 21 30 21 30 7 7 82 82 5 M6, 10 deep 15

2 116 116 60 30 30 81 31 31 88 24 38 28 39 12.5 12.5 103 103 6.5 M8, 10 deep 15

3 144 144 80 40 40 92 46 52 110 29 43 34 54 18 18 128 128 8 M10, 12 deep 20

4 162 182 100 63 63 106 40 56 141 31 60 41 82 9 9 144 164 9 M12, 12 deep 38

h1 i i1

14 12.5 7.5

15 8 8

15 3 3

20 10 10

38 0 0

Type: ..21-0-1/4 to ..21-4 - 1 e.g. WG 21-2-3/8-WG 230

Type: ..22-0-1/4 to ..22-4 - 1 e.g. G 22-1-1/4-G 24

Type: ..4-1-1/4 ..Z4-1-1/4 e.g. G 4-1-1/4-G 24

Size Port P, R a. A L B H a a1 a2 b c e f g h

0 G 1/4 * 40 36 25 16 16 18 28 4 24 4 M5, 6 deep 12.5

1 G 1/4 * 50 45 30 29 21 20 35 5 30 10 M6, 15

G 3/8 * 50 45 30 27 23 18 35 5 30 10 10 deep 15

2 G 3/8 * 56 60 30 33 -- 33 39 5.5 43 6.5 M8, 15

G 1/2 * 56 60 30 33 -- 27 39 7.5 43 6.5 10 deep 15

3 G 1/2 * 70 80 40 43 -- 40 54 18 54 8 M10, 20

G 3/4 * 70 80 40 41 -- 40 54 18 54 8 10 deep 20

M12, 15 deep

3/3-way valve 4/2-way valve 4/3-way valve

* (BSPP)

D 7300 page 14

5.3.2 Connection sub-plates acc. to <

Size 0 Type: ..-1/4 S(SR) Size 1 Type: ..-1/4 S(SR); ..-3/8 S(SR)

Size 2 Type: ..-3/8 S(SR); ..-1/2 S(SR)

5.3.3 Connection sub-plates acc. to >

Type: ..-1/4 G ..-3/8 G ..-1/2 G ..-3/4 G

Size Port P, R and A a a1 a2 b

0 G 1/4 * -- -- -- --

1 G 1/4 * 21 20 29 --

G 3/8 * 23 18 27 --

2 G 3/8 * 30 -- -- 15.5

G 1/2 * 37 -- -- 13.5

Size L B H a b c e f g h

0 44 50 30 24 30 10 10 9 M5, 14 5 deep

1 54 50 35 34 25 7 10 9 M6, 12 10 deep

2 60 60 40 35 30 8 12.5 9 M8, 14 10 deep

3 80 80 50 46 40 10 17 10,5 M10, 18 10 deep

4 100 112 63 55 50 15 22.5 4 M12, 21 15 deep


M8, 10 deep

a/f 17

Manually ad-justable (..SR) Manually ad-

justable (..SR)

Manually adjustable (..SR)

Tool adjust-able (..S)



* (BSPP)

D 7300 page 15

6. Appendix6.1 Protection of directional seated valves against coarse contamination

Directional seated valves are rather unsensitive to ultra fine contamination always evident in hydraulic fluids. Nevertheless directional seated valves are fitted with screen filter elements with 0.25 mm mesh width to prevent sudden disturbance caused by coarse contaminations that may occasionally be carried along in the oil (such as torn off particles of tubing, packing, scale swarf,) and which otherwise might get trapped at the valve seat gap.The sub-plates for individual valves (sect. 5) are fitted with fine screen filter discs HFC 1/4F 1 or HFC 3/8 (acc. to D 7235) as standard at A and B with size 0, additionally in P with size 1. Valves size 2, 3 and 4 with port size G 3/8 *, G 1/2 * and G 3/4 * may be retrofitted-. These screen filters are not available for G 1 *. ( * BSPP )These screen filter elements must not be understood as a replacement for usual hydraulic filters. In practice, however, they provide sufficient protection against malfunctions in small hydraulic systems. If such malfunctions should occur, the filter elements should be checked first.For the sake of simplicity, these filter elements are not explicitly shown in the diagrams.

Symbols

Individual valves acc. to section 3: Connection sub-plates acc. to section 5:

6.2 Versions for special fluids

o HFA (water / glycol solution, conforming VDMA 24317) The functionally essential parts are of stainless steel or tuffrided to prevent corrosion (valve balls, valve seat, actuation pin etc.).

The valve body (size 3), external parts e.g. tapped plugs etc. are zinc galvanized. There are only 2/2-, 3/2- and 4/2-way directional seated valves available with flow pattern R2, S2, 3, a. Z3, 4, Z4 (see table 1 in

sect. 3.1)

Type coding: G 3-1-G 24 HFA

Flow Qperm. (lpm) approx. with reflow back pressure

1 bar 2 bar

3 4

5 6

14 18

36 45

Pres-surepmax (bar)

400

Size

0

1

2

3

Throttles (cascade type or a coiled, small diameter pipe) should be installed at the pressure inlet to limit the flow down to permissible values for the applied pressure. This is to prevent cavitation and applies to all valves with return connection (3/2- und 4/2-way valves and 2/2-way valve as by-pass to the tank) or valves in circuits connected to an accumulator.

o Brake fluid based on glycol Versions equipped with EPDM (Ethylenpropylendien-rubber) seals suited for glycol based brake fluid or other special fluids.

Type coding: GR 2-2-G 24 AT

o Versions equipped with FKM (flour rubber, Viton) seals suited for some HFD type fluids (fire inhibiting, conforming VDMA 24317)

Type coding: WGS 2-0-WG 230 PYD

Screen filter elements type HFC acc. to D 7235

Note:

A slight compensating force in the return pipe may be created by installing the tank at the highest possible location within the system.

2/2-way valve

3/2-way valve

2/2-way valve

3/2-way valve

3/3-way valve

4/2- and 4/3-way valve

D 7300 page 16

7. Mass (weight) approx. in kg

Basic valve complete with actuation acc. to section 3 and 4

3/3-way valvesize

4/3-way valvesize

4/2-way valvesize

2/2- and 3/2-way valvesize

Actuation mode

0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 1

Electrical G.. 0.4 0.65 1.2 3.1 7.2 0.8 1.4 2.9 5.9 16.3 0.9 1.6 3.0 6.0 1.9

WG.. 0.4 0.7 1.2 3.1 7.2 0.8 1.5 2.9 5.9 16.3 0.9 1.7 3.1 6.0 2.0

Hydraulic H.. 0.4 0.5 1.1 2.8 -- 0.8 1.1 2.7 5.2 -- 0.8 1.3 2.8 5.3 1,8

Pneumatic P.. 0.4 0.4 0.9 2.2 -- -- 0.9 2.3 4.1 -- -- 1.1 5.4 4.2 1.7

Act. roll K.. -- 0.4 0.8 2.0 -- -- 0.9 2.1 3.7 -- -- 1.1 5.2 3.8 1.7

Act. pin T.. -- 0.4 0.8 -- -- -- 0.8 2.1 -- -- -- 1.0 5.2 -- 1.6

Lever F.. -- 0.4 0.8 2.0 -- -- 0.9 2.1 3.7 -- -- 1.1 5.2 3.8 1.7

Turn knob D.. 0.4 0.4 0.9 -- -- 0.8 0.9 2.2 -- -- 0.8 1.1 5.3 -- 1.7

Connection sub-plates acc. to section 5

Connection block only, for weight of the directional seated valves see above!

Size

0 1 2 3 4

Simple connection block ; 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.2 3.8

Connection block < with pressure limiting valve 0.4 1.2 1.6 -- --

Connection block = with by-pass check valve 0.2 0.5 1.0 -- --

Connection block > with rectifying circuit by means of check valves 0.5 0.7 1.0 2.4 4.7

Flow patternR2, S2 2/2-way valves3, Z3 3/2-way valves21 3/3-way valves22 4/3-way valves (not for size 4)4, Z4 4/2-way valves (size 1 only )

ActuationG Solenoid, DC versionWG Solenoid, AC version (50/60 Hz)H Hydraulic (not avail. size 4)P Pneumatic (not avail. for size 0 and 4)K Roll (not avail. for size 0 and 4)T Pin (not avail. for size 0, 3 and 4)F Key levers (not avail. for size 0 and 4)D Turn knob (not avail. for size 3 and 4)

Size0, 1, 2, 3, 4

Additional elements (option), see sect. 3.1R Check valve in port PB Orifice in port P S Return pressure stop in port R (size 0 and 1 only)RS, BS Combination of check valve or orifice with return pressure stop (size 0 and 1 only)

Connection sub-plates (option), see sect. 5-1/4, -3/8, -1/2, -3/4, -1 Simple connection block-1/4S, -3/8S, -1/2S Connection block with pressure limiting valve-1/4SR, -3/8SR, -1/2SR Connection block manually adjustable pressure

limiting valve-1/4C, -3/8C, -1/2C, -3/4C Connection block with by-pass check valve

(2/2-directional valves only)-1/4G, -3/8G, -1/2G, -3/4G Connection block with rectifying circuit by means of check

valves (2/2-directional valves only)

Additional information (option)e.g. special voltage, special fluids, pressure setting (sect. 4.1; 5.1; 6.2)

G R2 - 2 R - G 24

WG 3 - 1 -1/2S - WG 110 - 230

H 22 - 3

Mec

ha-

nic

alM

anual

8. Type overview

Type

Solenoid voltage (standard)

Directional seated valves with various actuationsconnection hole pattern NG 6 (DIN 24 340-A 6) or CETOP 3

D 7300 NIndustrial standard connection

hole pattern

January 2004-00

HAWE HYDRAULIK SE


2.2



Flow Qmax = 12 lpm

Further valves with the same function: type NBVP acc. to D 7765N



The solenoid actuated directional seated valves (only size 1), illustrated in pamphlet D 7300, are available with a connection hole pattern conforming NG 6 acc. to DIN 24 340-A 6 (or CETOP 3).For a detailed description regarding the basic functions as well as the actuations, see D 7300.

Order example: NG 3 -1 RS - N 24

Coding. for industrial standard connection holepattern (NG 6, CETOP 3)

For plugs incl. voltage specification, seetable 1 "Solenoid actuation"

Table 1: Actuation mode

Solenoid

actuation

Pressure

actuation

Mechanic

actuation

Manual

actuation

Roller

Turn knob

Pin

Lever

Codings, flow pattern symbols and main data 1)

Switchingtime (guide line)

Basic type DC AC

NG, exNG 6) NWG

UN 12V DC 24V DC 110V AC 230V AC

50/60 Hz 3)

Current IN 0,83 A 0,1 A

Power tating PN 20 W (Type exNG.. = 23 W)

On 100 ms 100 ms

Off 50 ms 125 ms

Control pcontr min = 12 bar

pressure: pst max = 700 bar

Control pst min = 2.5 bar

pressure: pst max = 15 bar

Actuation 25 ... 28 Nforce:



Actuation 63 Ncmmoment:

NH

NP

NK

NT

NF

ND

1) For detailed data see D 73002) Standard; For special voltages, see D 7300 sect. 4.13) DC-solenoid (98V DC or 205V DC) with bridge rectifier in

the plug4) Orifice #0.8 as standard;

Also available (#0.4 - 0.6 - 1.0) specify when required, e.g. NG... -1 B 0,4 - ...; NWG... -1 B 0,6 S - ... etc.

5) Shape A DIN 43 650 (ISO 4400)6) Type ex NG.. - version with explosion-proof solenoid.

The notes stated in D 7300, B ATEX and B02/2003 are

binding!

Hydraulic

Pneumatic

Coding anddetailed flowpattern symbols(complete by actuationsymbol)

2/2-directional valve

R 2 3

S 2 Z 3

3/2-directional valve

Simplified flow patternsymbols


Check valve insert type ER 11 acc. to D 7325

Orifice insert4) type EB 1-0,8 acc.to D 6465

Return pres-sure stopHAWE-No. 7332 000 b

Note: Combinations are possible, e.g. checkvalve with orifice (NG 3-1 BS) or orificewith return pressure stop (NWGZ 3-1 RS)

Table 3: Additional elements

R B S

Plug versions:Coding G G (24) Standard

A (24) Adapter; Plug 5) is customer furnished

N (24) Adapter with plug 5)L (24) Adapter with plug 5)

with integrated LEDCoding WG WG (230) Adapter with plug 5)

with integrated bridge rectifier

Nom. size 6 corresponds valve size 1(Only this size is available !)

Nom.voltage 2)

D 7300 N page 2

3. Unit dimensions

Sealing of ports A, P and Rvia O-rings 8x1.5 NBR 90 Sh

All dimensions in mm, subject to change without notice !

Standard plug incl.cable gland Pg 9

Special version plugs:

Coding -A .. (without DIN-plug)

Solenoid actuation

Hydraulic actuation

Pneumatic actuation


With roller With pin

Manual actuation

With lever With turn knob

Must not beused as a stop!

Must not beused as astop!

Must notbe usedas a stop!

Switchingposition

2) DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

M 5, 10 deep

a/f 27

Hole pattern of the manifold exNG..

1) This dimension is depending on themanufacturer and can be up to 40 mmacc. to DIN 43650.

Coding-

N ..

-W..

approx. 41

app

rox.

37

app

rox.

80

app

rox.

84

3 m cable

Directional seated valve banks type VB 01... to VB 41...with directional valves acc. to D 7300

(This also lists individual valves with connection sub-plates for direct pipe connection)

D 7302Directional valve banks type VB...



2.2

End platewith spacer

Pressure switch

Con-nectionblock

P = Inlet (from the pump)R = Outlet (reflow to the tank)A, B = Consumer ports

Example 2: HK 34/1M - H1,25 - A1/420 - VB01 FMH - FR/N/32 - 1 - WG230

2. Available versions, type codingFor total type coding overview, see sect. 7

2.1. Order examples

Example 1: VB11AM - 2/350 - F G45 S/11 - 2 - G24

Directionalvalves sect. 2.4

1. General These valve banks consist of a connection block, laterally added directional valves (acc. to pamphlet D 7300) installed on individual sub-plates and an end plate. All is held together by a tension rod. The connection block incorporating a pressurized oilinlet and return outlet may also feature a pressure limiting valve. Two basic designs are available, either for pipe connection or direct mounting onto hydraulic power packs. The galleries for pressurized oil and return run through all sub-plates and thereby connect the valves in parallel. An end plate terminates the valve bank (not with size 4).The valves are counted starting from the connection block. For data and notes concerning the individual valves (not being coveredby this pamphlet), see D 7300.

Pressure pmax = 350 ... 500(700) bar; Flow Qmax = 6 ... 120 lpm

Directional valve bank for pipe connection(Actuation mode is similar for all directional valves)

For assignment of the coding and main data, see sect. 2.2

Valve bank for direct mounting onto a com-pact hydraulic power pack type HK acc. toD 7600-3, e.g. HK 34/1M - H1,25 - A1/420

Directional valve bankFor the correlation between identificationand main data, see sect. 2.2

Order coding of the pump

R = Return portM, M4 = Pick-up port e.g. for

a pressure gauge ora sensor

A = Consumer port

D 7302 page 2

2.2. Type coding and general parameter

VB11AM - 2/350 - FG45S /11- 2 - G24

VB01FMH - FR/N /32- 1 - WG230

(example 1 acc. to sect. 2.1)

(example 2 acc. to sect. 2.1)

The slash indicates which valves (coding) feature which actuation mode (sequence). Inthis example, valves F and R are equipped withactuation M whereas valve N with actuation H.

Coding 1 2 3 4 5

Ports conf. DIN ISO 228/1 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 G 1(BSPP) 1)

For valve banks VB01.. VB11.. VB21.. VB31.. VB41..VB11.. VB21.. VB31.. VB41..

Table 3: Actuations for the directional valves

Flow pattern (For identificationof codings and additional features,see sect. 2.4

see end platein sect. 2.3

Table 2: Connection block or adapter plate

Note:When selecting the valve size, it is determined not only bythe indiv. consumer flow but also by the resulting total flowdep. on the control sequence. As this can be higher thanthe pump delivery flow, e.g. with double acting cylinders (unequal areas) in a differential circuit.Therefore the valve size should be selected according tothe resulting total flow.

Table 4: Ports

Coding

Actuation modeand symbol

Available for

M

solenoid

Nom. voltage:G12 = 12V DCG24 = 24V DCWG230 = 230V AC

50 Hz

For further data, see D 7300

VB01toVB41

Other available actuationsH

hydraul.

VB01toVB31

P

pneum.

VB11VB21VB31

K

roller

VB11VB21VB31

T

pin

VB11VB21

F

level

VB11VB21VB31

D

turn-knob

VB11VB21

standard

CodingandDesign 16)

A .-1/...

A .-2/...

A .-3/...

A .-4/...

A .-5

C 8)

D 8)

E

F

F1

G 9)

Availablefor valvebank

VB01toVB41

VB01toVB31

VB01toVB41

VB01VB11VB21

VB11VB21VB31

VB31

VB01VB11VB21

VB01

VB11VB21

Directconnection to

pipes

TanksD6 to D30B6 to B40

TanksD50B50 and B75

TanksD100 and D250B100 to B400

Tanks10)

Tanks

Suited for pump type

Acc. to pamphlet Symbol

Arbitrary, all pumps of the HAWE productrange. (see also note below !)

R.. D 6010H etc. 3)Z.. D 6820RZ.. D 6910H

R.. D 6010HZ.. D 6820 5)

R.. D 6010H 4)Z.. D 6820 5)

HK.. D 7600-... F F1MP.. D 7200H

HC.. D 7900HCG.. D 7900GFP.. D 7310

MP.. D 7200H 7) VB11 VB21:RZ.. D 6910H 7) Direct

connection

pre

ssur

esp

ecifi

catio

nin

bar

,e.

gA

M-2

/230

Pressurelimitingvalve

tool adjustable

tool adjustable

without

Spring-housingmaterial

VB01 toVB31: diecastVB41: steel

steel 2)

Coding

Pressure pmax

Flow(lpm)

(bar) 11)

Qmax approx.

perm. deliveryflow 12)

VB01

500

6

$ 6

VB11

700

12

5 ......12

VB21

500

25

11 ...... 25

VB22

700

25

11 ... ... 25

VB31

400

65

20 ...... 60

VB41

350

120

> 60

Table 1: Valve bank (basic type, size, sub-plate)

without

The connectionblock of the hydraulic powerpack features apressure limitingvalve

D 7302 page 3

1) For pipe fittings with tapped journal, shape B DIN 3852 page 22) Required only, if pressure surges > 20 bar could occur during return flow. Such pressure surges may occur during decompression of

chargable consumers.3) Type VB...A... should be selected instead, as only a limited number of valves can be connected at P1 (interference with P2) at hydraulic

power packs with two pressure outlets e.g. acc. to D 6010 DB, D 6010 S. 4) Valves are over dimensioned for flows < 17 lpm. Controls should employ type VB21A.. or VB11A.. (remotely installed)5) Controls by means of directional spool valves are better suited in most cases for the low pressure range of gear pumps.

7) VB11G.. for delivery flows < 10 lpm; VB21G.. for delivery flows > 10 lpm (max. 25 lpm)8) Not available with additional pressure switch mounted at the directional valve (see sect. 2.4.2)9) May be directly mounted at type A51/.. to A61/.. (acc. to D 6905A) or two stage valve type NE21 (acc. to D 7161)10) May be combined with connection block type A... (acc. to D 6905A and D 6905AF/1). The max. permissible pressure depends on the

selected flow pattern and actuation mode, see also D 7300, sect. 2 and 3.1.11) The max. permissible pressure depends on the selected flow pattern and actuation mode, see also D 7300, sect. 2 and 3.1.12) The back pressure figures listed in D 7300 should be observed if the pump delivery flow is in the area of Qmax of the selected valve.13) Type VB 41 feature no end plate. Ports P and R are plugged at the last valve section.14) Coding /56 must be used if two pressure switches (1. DG 35; 2. DG 36) are desired to prevent confusion with the coding for one

pressure switch DG 365 (/65). Coding /65 (1. DG 36, 2. DG 35) must not be used!

16) Additional adapter plates (coding S and L) for direct mounting of valve banks type VB 11 onto air driven hydraulic power packs type LPsee D 7280 H

2.3. End plate (For dimensional drawings. see sect. 3.1 and 3.2)

Coding together with valve bankVB01 VB11 VB21

VB31

(no coding

/2

/02

/002

/3

/4

/5

/6

/65

/0

/00

(/.0, /0.)

/33, /34..

“

“

/56, /665, /6565 14)

/32 ... /652

/332

“

“

/65652

/11

/12

/... 11

/... 12

Symbol

/2 /02 /002

/0 /00 (/.0, /.0)

/33 ... 6565 /32 ... 652 /332 ... 65652

1.DG

2.DG

Note

Standarde.g. VB11FM-FHH-1-G24

End plate with drain valve, e.g. for discharging a connected accumulator (see sect. 6.3) e.g. VB01FM-FHH/2-1-G24

End plate with drain valve, prepared for retrofittingfor one or two pressure switchese.g. VB11FM-FHH/02-1-G24

End plate with one pressure switch (D 5440)1. DG 2. DG Adjust. range

/3 3 DG 33 200 ... 700 bar/4 4 DG 34 100 ... 400 bar/5 5 14) DG 35 20 ... 250 bar/6 6 DG 36 4 ... 12 bar/65 65 DG 365 12 ... 170 bar

e.g. VB01FM-FHH/4-1-G24

End plate prepared for retrofitting of one or twopressure switchese.g. VB11FM-FHH/0-1-G24

VB11FM-FHH/04-1-G24

End plate with two pressure switches (for identifica-tion of the pressure switches, see coding /3 etc.)e.g. VB01FM-FHH/63-1-G24

VB11FM-FHH/365-1-G24

End plate with drain valve and one pressure switch(for coding of the DG, see above)e.g. VB01FM-FHH/52-1-G24

End plate with drain valve and two pressure swit-ches (for coding of the DG's, see above)e.g. VB01FM-FHH/432-1-G24

Spacers:

These spacers enable retrofitting of one (11) or two(12) valves including their sub-plate (see sect. 3.2and 3.5). The corresponding coding should be added afterthe coding of the end plate.e.g. VB01FM-FHH/11

VB01FM-FHH/365 12

VB01FM-FHH/62 11

13)

D 7302 page 4

2.4. Directional valves2.4.1. Basic functions

Flow pattern codings (directional valve with corresponding sub-plate)The symbols of the directional valves have to be completed by the symbols for the actuation mode.A maximum of 12 valves (VB01 and VB11) or 10 valves (VB21, VB31 and VB41) may be combined in one valve bank, G and J are counted as2 valves. Flow pattern A, D or F should be used only once and as 1st valve within the valve bank (1st in the sequence of the ordercoding). As an exception, flow pattern A should be the last within valve banks type VB 41 (last in the sequence of the order coding).Attention: The sequence of the laterally added valves should be selected in such a way that valves which are actuated simultane-ously are not neighboring (see sect. 6.1)A, B = Consumer portsP, R = Internal pump and reflow connections

The simpli-fied symbolsfor codingsY, I, S and Tare illustrat-ed below.

Directional seated valves with return pressure stop, availablefor VB 01 and VB 11 (see notes in sect. 4.3)

1) not available for VB 01 (only ports G 1/4 with VB 11)

A 1) D F B C E Q P O

Simplified symbols

Simplified symbols

Simplified symbols

not available for VB 41 only available for VB 11, only ports G 1/4

K M U V

H L N R Y I S T

J G HX LX NX RX

Y I S T

D 7302 page 5

2.4.2. Additional elements (pressure switches for VB01 and VB11)

For dimensions, see sect. 3.1.2

Pressure switch type DG33, DG34, DG35, DG36 or DG365 acc. to D 5440

Pressure switch

Order examples:

3/2-way directional valve coding H with oneDG33 at port A:VB01FM - H3 - 1 - G24

4/3-way directional valve coding G with two pressure switches (DG33 a. 34) at ports A and B:VB01FM - G34 - 1 - G24

DG33 at port ADG34 at port B

Flow pattern, available versions (codings) and symbols (examples)

Coding

2

3

4

5

36

65

62

6

7

8

66

665

Type

--

DG 33

DG 34

DG 35

DG 36

DG 365

--

DG 33

DG 34

DG 35

DG 36

DG 365

Adjustment range

prepared for retrofitting

200 ... 700 bar

100 ... 400 bar

20 ... 250 bar

4 ... 12 bar

12 ... 170 bar

prepared forretrofitting

200 ... 700 bar

100 ... 400 bar

20 ... 250 bar

4 ... 12 bar

12 ... 170 bar

Connect-ed to

portA or B

port P

Note

Can't be combinedwith flow pattern D, A,F, P, O, I and Y as well as valve bankswith connection blockC or D !

Can only be combinedwith flow pattern H, L,N and R, making anend plate with DG su-perfluoues. Can't be combinedwith valve banks utiliz-ing connection block Cor D!

3/2-way

H.. 2 62L.. 3 6N.. 4 7R.. 5 8K.., M.. 36 66U.., V.. 65 665

2/2-way

B.. 2 C.. 3E.. 4Q.. 5

3665

4/2-way

S.. 2T.. 3HX.. 4LX.. 5NX.. 36RX.. 65

3/3-way

J.. 2 3453665

4/3-way

G.. .. 2 3453665

po

rtA

po

rtB

DG atport A

DG atport P

with DG andreturn pres-sure stop

Example: J 36 Example: G 34

D 7302 page 6

2.5. 2-way pressure reducing valve for valve banks

VB 01 and VB 11

Max. permissible inlet pressure 450 bar (P side).They can be placed arbitrarily within the valve bank. The pressure reducing valvedetermines the pressure for all directional valves mounted downstream (sec-ondary side) and the consumers connected to them, independent from simul-taneous withdrawal of pressurized oil with a higher pressure level via direction-al valves located upstream (primary side). Example: Clamping cylinders with low pressure setting or piloting valves forelectro-hydraulic low-pressure remote control purposes.The pressure reducing valves type CDK 3 (acc. to D 7745) are used here. Thesevalves do not show any leakage in blocked state (pressure upstream is higherthan the set secondary pressure) as they are designed as 2/2-way valves, act-ing like a seated valve in idle position. This prevents any return flow from thesecondary side to the primary side (pump side) or any pressure drop.It is necessary to install a pressure limiting valve in the consumer pipe if externally induced loads could cause unpermissible peak pressure.For version with 3-way pressure reducing valve, see sect. 4.8.

Order example: VB01 FM - HR - HH - 1 - G 24

1) There is only a tool adjustable version available. The adjustment can be altered after slackening the lock nut with an a/f 17 spanner (monitored by a pressure gauge).

2) The secondary pressure setting is valid for flow Q = 0 lpm if the consumer is in its end position. It will drop slightly if there is a flow to the consumer.

3) With tapped plug, prepared for retrofitting of a CDK 3-..

4) Version with low pressure dependence at variable pump (inlet) pressure as well as use at low pressure settings (Attention: Max. flow 6 lpm).

5) Version with low back pressure, however with a higher pressure dependence at variable pump (inlet) pressure.

- CZ2/180/5R/4

VB 11 - CZ5/130 /5R /7

Example1: - CZ1/280/5R-...

Example 3: - CZX 5R-...

Example 2: - CZ5/130/5R/7-...

For individual order(example) e.g. as sparepart, extension, ownstorage etc.

Pressure switch type DG 3.. acc. to D 5440

(no coding)

/2

/3

/4

/5

/6

/7

without pressure switch

DG may be retrofitted

DG 33 200 ... 500 bar

DG 34 100 ... 400 bar

DG 35 20 ... 250 bar

DG 36 4 ... 12 bar

DG 365 12 ... 170 bar

Check valve in P gallery

5R with check valve

Coding

X

081/...

08/...

- CZ 1/...

2/...

5/...

25/...

55/...

2-way pressure reducing valve 1)

Utilized pres-sure reducingvalve

without 3)

CDK 3-081

CDK 3-08

CDK 3-1

CDK 3-2

CDK 3-5

CDK 32-5 4)

CDK 35-5 5)

Pressurerange(bar) 2)

---

50 ... 500

50 ... 450

30 ... 300

20 ... 200

15 ... 130

8 ... 130

15 ... 130

D 7302 page 7

3. Unit dimensions3.1. Directional valve bank for installation in a pipe system3.1.1. Valves without pressure switch

Type VB 01

Coding Coding Coding J Coding GD,F,H, B,C,Q,L,N,R E,P,O

Coding S,T,Y,I

End plate

(standard) 1)

End

plate

(stan-dard)1)

1) For other end plates,see sect. 3.2

M6, 6 deepM6, 6 deep

M6, 6 deepM6, 6 deep

Only with coding I and Y

Only with coding D and F Only with coding I and Y

Only with coding D and FTorque25 Nm

Torque40 Nm

Connection block Directional valves

Connection block Directional valves

A.-2(4)/..

A.-1(3)/..

Coding Coding Coding J Coding GA,D,F,H, B,C,Q,L,N,R E,P,O

Coding S,T,Y,IHX,LX,NX,RX

A.-2(4)/..

A.-1(3)/..

A.-5

A.-5

Coding a

P and O 15

B,C,Q,E 23

Type VB 11

Type

VB 11

Ports A, B, Pand R (BSPP)

G 1/4

G 3/8

a

12

14

a1

27

25

Coding Aa2 a3

20 30

-- --

Other valvesa2 a3

15 25

14 25

Valvecoding

b

h

h1

A

20

D,F,H,L,N,R

23

B,C,Q,E

18

P a. O

28

HX,LX,NX,RX

--

50.5

60

42

55

All dimensions are in mm, subject to change without notice!

hyd

r.ac

tuat

ion

71

foroth

erac

tuat

ion

D73

00

approx.20

approx.21

D 7302 page 8

Type VB 21 and VB 31

G = M8, 8 deep

Torque85 Nm (VB 21)190 Nm (VB 31)

Torque120 Nm

Coding Coding Coding J Coding GA,B,C, O and PD,E,F,H,L,N,Q,R

Coding S,T,Y,IConnection block

Directional valves

A.-2(4)/..

A.-1(3)/..

A.-5

Coding Coding Coding JB,C,D,E,F, O and PH,L,N,Q,R

Coding S,T,Y,IType VB 41

Connection block

Directional valves

A.-2(4)/..

A.-1(3)/..

A.-5

End

plate

Only withVB 21!

Type

VB 21

VB 31

PortsA, B, Pand R 1)

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 1/2

G 3/4

b1

20

18

25

22

b2

56

58

66

68

a7

22

24

28

b

18

20

22

B

63

80

H

42

50

H1

60

55

H2

32

40

H3

72

90

H4

148

162

L

32

40

L1

58

72

L2

117

145

a

18

23

a1

20

23

a2

22

28

a3

33

44

a4

32

52.5

a6

60

76

c

48

63

e

15

32

h

80

90

h1

91

104

i

20

23

j

16

20

m

10

15

n

25

32.5

o

43

56.5

p

65

81

a5

28.5

34.5

a8

33

46

Only with coding D and F

Only with coding D and F



M10, 12 deep

Ports (BSPP)G 3/4 G 1

a 100 110

b 32 35

c 19 21

d 51 46

e 78 88

f 29 35

foroth

erac

tuat

ion

D73

00

foroth

erac

tuat

ion

D73

00

approx. e

approx.25

1) (BSPP)

D 7302 page 9

3.1.2. Version with pressure switch

For valve dimensions not illustrated, see sect. 3.1.1.

Type VB 01...

Type VB 11...

Plug A DIN 43650 (ISO 4400)with cable gland Pg 9

Plug A DIN 43650 (ISO 4400)with cable gland Pg 9

1) Illustration also valid for codings J, G, S and T

Coding Coding Coding CodingB..., C..., E..., J... G... S...,Q..., H..., L..., T...N..., R..., K...,M..., U..., V...

Coding Coding Coding CodingB..., C..., E..., J... G... S..., T...Q..., H..., L..., HX.., LX.., NX.., RX..N..., R..., K...,M..., U..., V...

Coding2 1)and 62

Coding 62

DG 3..Coding 3...65 1)or 6...665

DG 3..Coding 3...65 1)or 6...665

Not valid forversion withonly one DG

Not valid forversion withonly one DG

app

rox.

71

app

rox.

56

app

rox.

56

D 7302 page 10

app

rox.

71

3.2. End plate

The standard version of the end plate (no coding) is illustrated at the corresponding valve bank drawings, see sect. 3.1 !

3.2.1. Additional versions for VB 01

Dimensionsvalid for allend plates!

Type L L1 ØD

VB 01 59 97 14

VB 11 66 110.5 18

Coding /11 Coding /12/...11 /...12

3.2.3. Spacers for retrofitting of one or two valves (see also note in sect. 3.5)

3.2.2. Additional versions for VB 11

Version without DG..,but with drain valve,coding /2

Version with one DG..,coding /3...65

Version with twoDG.., coding/33...6565

Version with one DG..,coding /0

/3...65

Version with one DG.., coding /00

/.0, /0. /33...6565

Version with one (two) DG.. and drain valve, coding /02 /002

/32...652 /332...65652

Version with one (two) DG..and drain valve, coding /02 /002

/32...652 /332...65652

M6,6 deep

M6, 6 deep

M6, 6 deep

Drain screw a/f 5

Drain screw a/f 5

Port M4 = G 1/4

Drain valvescrew a/f 5

1. DG

1. DG

2. DG

2. DG

Coding/32...652

Coding/3...65

Coding/32...652

Coding/02

Coding/0

Coding/02

Port M4 = G 1/4

For missing dimensions, see below!

app

rox.

71

app

rox.

71

app

rox.

71

app

rox.

71

D 7302 page 11

Type VB 01F and VB 11F

VB 21F

Type VB 01F1

Connection blockinstalled on the hy-draulic power pack

PortsG 1/4 (BSPP)

R-Ports G 1/4 (BSPP)on the rear side

PortsType H a b c d e M and R (BSPP)

VB 01F 50 14 25 20 10 -- G 1/4

VB 11F 60 30 -- 25 15 20 G 1/4

VB 21F 75 11 26.5 25 12.5 -- G 1/4

Adapter plates

3.3. Direct mounting onto hydraulic power packs

Type VB...C

VB...D

VB...E

Connection block installed on the hydraulic power pack(design depends onthe size of the coverplate, see D 6010H)

Adapter plates

For valve bank dimensions,see sect. 3.1

Type a b c

VB 01C 20 5 9

VB 11C 20 2 9

VB 21C 20 2 9

VB 11D 30 12 5

VB 21D 30 14 5

VB 31D 35 14 5

VB 31E 30 19 5

Reflow portVB 11F

VB 01FVB 21F

Port e.g. for pressuregauge or pressureswitch

For valve bankdimensions,see sect. 3.1

D 7302 page 12

Type VB 11 G

Mounting onto hydraulic power packtype MP... acc. to D 7200 via connectionblock type A51/.. or A61/..

Type VB 21 G

Mounting onto hydraulic powerpack type MP... acc. to D 7200 via connection block type A51/..or A61/..

Type VB 11 G

Mounting onto hydraulic power packtype MP... acc. to D 7200 via dualstage valve type NE 21..

Type VB 21 G

Mounting onto hydraulic powerpack type MP... acc. to D 7200 viadual stage valve type NE 21..

Connection blockon the hydraulicpower pack

Adapter plate

Adapter plate

For valve bankdimensions, see sect. 3.1

Dual stage valvetype NE 21.. acc. to D 7161

D 7302 page 13

3.4. Directional valve bank with pressure reducing valve3.4.1. Type -CZ .., to be installed within valve banks type VB 01 and 11 (acc. to sect. 2.5)

Provision fora lead seal

Type-CZ 08/..

1/..

2/..

5/..

25/..

55/..

Type -CZ X

withoutDG..

with DG..

Cable glandPg 9

a

a1

b

b1

e

e1

f

f1

h

h1

VB 01

40

20

40

24

13

11

3

11

81

62

VB 11

47

23.5

50

19

13.5

9.5

--

30

75

53

Port M = G 1/4 (BSPP)

Type

VB 01

VB 11

a

40

47

a1

26

23.5

b

40

50

c

10.5

10

#d

32

42

e

12

13.5

e1

34

35

e2

13

21

f

3

--

f1

11

31

h

55

50

h1

81

75

h2

90

115

h3

62

56

Port M = G 1/4 (BSPP)

Type Z1 to Z8

Type Z11 to Z28 Type Z114 to Z2865

3.4.2. Type Z1 to Z2865, to be installation within valve banks type VB 01 and VB 11 (old version acc. to sect. 4.8)

Suited forleeds # 6(VB 01) or# 9 (VB 11)

Orientation rotated by180° with VB 11, seealso sect. 3.1++

Cable glandPg 9

app

rox.

h

app

rox.

h2

app

rox.

h3

app

rox.

h1

app

rox.

h

91 (manually adjustable)

(tool adjustable)

a/f 24Torque 70Nm

a/f 30Torque 60Nm

D 7302 page 14

3.5. Individual valve sectionsThey are intended for retrofitting in valve banks, replacing the spacers after the end plate (/.11; /.12 with VB 01 a. 11, see sect. 2.3and 3.2 ++. Tension rods, corresponding to the total number of valve sections, have to be ordered additionally, if no spacers were installed or more sections should be added than spacers were installed. The order coding must contain the terms “valve section ...“and ”for valve bank VB..“ in uncoded text.

Order example: Valve section For valve bank VB 01

Size Torque for the acron nut

VB 01 25 NmVB 11 40 NmVB 21 85 NmVB 31 190 NmVB 41 120 Nm

Retrofitting of a valve section

Assembly procedure:1. Remove nut(s) and all parts

after the last valve sectionfrom the tension rod(s)

2. Install the additional valvesection

3. Reinstall seals, end plate andnut(s). For the correct torque,see table below. The USITseal ring as well as the spac-er are not required with cod-ing /.11 or /.12 (only VB 01 orVB 11)

1) Two spacers with USIT-rings for end plate coding /.12 (version with spacers are only available with type VB 01 and 11).

Example

End plate coding /11(12)consisting of:

Acorn nutHAWE No. 7250 015 (VB 01)

7251 026 (VB 11)USIT-ring U 8.7x16x1 (VB 01)

U 10.7x18x1.5 (VB 11)Spacer 1)HAWE-No. 7250 041 (VB 01)

7251 041 (VB 11)End plate withUSIT-ring U 8.7x16x1 (VB 01)

U 10.7x18x1.5 (VB 11)

Take care that the O-rings (at the con-nection area) are not lost, when addingthe valve section!

H - 1 - G24

Flow pattern coding, acc. to sect. 2.4

Port size, acc. to sect. 2.2

Nom. voltage, acc. to sect. 2.2

D 7302 page 15

4. Additional elements4.1. Fitted screen filters as standard

Directional seated valves are rather insensitive to very fine contamination. But coarse contaminationthat may occasionally be carried along with the fluid i.e. torn off particles of tubing, packing, scale,swarf can cause sudden operation disturbances, if they get stuck within the valve seat area, preventingthe blocking of the passage. Therefore these valves are fitted with screen filter ex-works (see D 7300, sect. 4.2).For further protection, the ports A, B, and P are fitted with fine screen filter discs as standard (only type VB 01 and 11). These screen filter elements should not be regarded as a replacement forthe usual fluid filters. In practice, however, they provide sufficient protection against malfunctions insmall hydraulic systems. These screen filter elements should be checked first, if such malfunctions should occur. For the sakeof simplicity, the filter elements are not explicitly shown in the symbols.

It must be stated in uncoded text, which valve (coding andposition number starting from the connection block) shouldbe fitted with which orifice, if one is required for functionalreasons at the entries of valves B, C, O, P, H, L, Y, I, S, T and J. The orifices utilized are type EB.. acc. to D 6465.

Order example:VB 11AM - 5 - FHHN - 2 - G 24Valves H at pos. 2 and 3 with orifice insert type EB 1-0.8

Size Orifice acc. to D 6465

VB 01 EB0 - 0.6

VB 11 EB1 - 0.8

VB 21 EB2 - 1.2

VB 31 EB3 - 2.5

4.2. Orifice inserts

For detailed flowpattern symbols,see sect. 2.4.1

Viscosity 60 mm2/s during tests

Directional Screen filter D 7235 in portsvalve bank A and B P

VB 01 A a. ...F HFC 1/4 F 1) HFC 1/4 F

VB 11 A... HFC 1/4 or HFC 3/8

VB 11 F... HFC 1/4 or HFC 1/4 F to 2.1 lpm,HFC 3/8 above none

VB 01 C HFC 1/4 F 1)

VB 11 C HFC 3/8

1) The depth of ports A(B) is reduced, therefore filter 6406 017 with reduced depth, see also D 7235. This should be also kept in mind, when ordering spare parts.

Screen 5017 010in the adapter plate

When several valves are operated in parallel, return pressure stops may be occasionallyrequired. The return ports R of the 3/2-way directional valves, size 0 and 1 may beequipped with return pressure stops (coding K, M, U, V). They prevent pressure surgesout of the common return pipe from entering unoperated, unloaded or easily moving con-sumers, where there is a connection A → R. Thus preventing uncontrolled movements.Such pressure surges can arise as a result of switching operations.These check valves are unsuitable to block pressurized fluid, which might be apparent atR, depending on the operation sequence with other valves. A circuit with an externalcheck valve would have to be created in this case.

This return pressure stop can be retrofitted, order as follows:For valve banks VB 01: Return pressure stop 7332 000 a

VB 11: Return pressure stop 7332 000 b

Flow Q (lpm)

Bac

kp

ress

ure|

p(b

ar)

(additional element S,acc. to D 7300, sect. 3.1,table 3)

Filter elements

4.3. Return pressure stop for 3/2-way directional valves

(valve banks VB 01 and 11)

D 7302 page 16

4.4. Sub-plate only featuring a pressure switch (valve banks VB 01 and 11)They should be used if it is not possible to install a pressure switch at the end plate, due to spatial requirements. This sub-plate with pressure switch may be installed at any location within the valve bank.

Order example: VB 11AM - 1/200 - HM - H/02 - 1 - G 24

Basic type codingacc. to sect. 2.1++

4.5. Versions with pressure limiting valve and throttle (valve banks VB 21 and 31)

This special 3/2-way directional valve features a pressure limiting valve and a throttle in its sub-plate. It is intended for press controls and may be located at any position within valve banks type VB 21.. or VB 31...

Order example: VB 21AM - 5 - F HQ - 3 - G 24

Flow pattern codingH, L, N, R

Throttle coding

Pressure limiting valve codingtool adjustable 1/..

manually adjustable 2/..

Pressure setting of the pressure limiting valve

Type B B1 H a b c e f

VB 21.. 60 66 148 17.5 31 17.5 35 35

VB 31.. 72 100 162 22 36 28 26 30

Type h i k l l1 m n o

VB 21.. 60 35 25 72 82 37.5 69 16

VB 31.. 63 42 35 85 97 56.5 85 18


Cable glandPg 9

Port A, conforming DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP):VB 21..-..91(2) /... -2 = G 3/8

-3 = G 1/2VB 31..-..91(2) /... -3 = G 1/2

Throttle(QR 4 orQR 5 acc. toD 7050)

- 33

Symbol acc. to the orderexample

Symbol acc. to theorder coding

R91/250

(tool adjustable)

(manually adjustable)

Pressure switch Coding of the sub- Adjustment acc. to D 5440 plate with DG.. range (bar)

prep. for retrofitting

DG 33 - 33 200 ... 700

DG 34 - 34 100 ... 400

DG 35 - 35 20 ... 250

DG 36 - 36 4 ... 12

DG 365 - 365 12 ... 170

- 32 -

Coding -32-

D 7302 page 17

4.6. 2-way flow control valves VB 31

The proportional 2-way flow control valves enable arbitraryvelocity control for the connected consumers by opening aby-pass to the tank for the excess delivery.This valve section should be located first within the valvebank (after the connection block).

Order example:

VB 31AM - 5 - HQ - 3 - G 24

Flow control valve

Flow

Coding Metering orifice max. lpm

6 6

15 15

30 30

36 36

50 50

Cable glandPg 9

Symbol acc. to the order coding

4.7. Blanking plate

An already assembled sub-plate with blanking plate can be used instead of a spacer (see sect. 2.3 end plates) enabling valves to beretrofitted. They can be fitted anywhere within the valve bank.It has to be specified in uncoded text, which flow pattern coding should be retrofittable (determining the sub-plate type) and on whichlocation (start numberizing after the connection block) within the valve bank.

Order example: VB 11 AM - 1/380 - FHH - 1 - G 12

Valve H with blanking plate at position 3 5000 099 (or 6540 039 (see below))

Blanking plate(height 10 mm)

- SE2 15/1

For more detailed data con-cerning the proportional flowcontrol valve (type SE 2-2..),see D 7557/1!

Individual parts (e.g. as spare parts):

Size VB 01 VB 11 VB 21 VB 31 VB 41

Blanking plate 6540 039 5000 099 4900 099 5005 099 7070 0993 O-rings NBR 90 Sh 3.7x1.78 5x1.5 10x2.2 13.95x2.62 DKAR 00119N90064 screws ISO 4762- M5x12- M6x20- M8x20 M10x40 M12x50

-12.9-galvanized

approx.60

app

rox.

34

D 7302 page 18

4.8. Pressure reducing valve as option for size VB 01 and VB 11

Pressure reducing valve, max. permissible inlet pressure 300 bar. For version up to 400 bar and functional description, see sect. 2.5.

The primary side can only be kept leakage-free (if necessary) with versions Z11 ... Z28 (Z114 ... Z2865) which features a prelocated 2/2-way seated valve. This is due to the functionally determined, permanent internal leakage even if there is no flow of pressurized oilto the secondary side. The 2/2-way seated valve must be actuated whenever pressurized oil is withdrawn. The secondary side isprotected against leakage by a check valve downstream of the pressure reducing valve, so there is no loss of pressure if the secondary consumer is free of leaks and the pump is switched off.However, this means that the pressure reducing valve cannot be used for secondary pressure limitation here, if the secondary pres-sure is exceeded due to external, rising forces acting on the consumer. The check valve prevents any return flow via the pressurereducing valve and therefore stops the consumer giving way i.e. the pressure in the consumer would rise. If necessary the consumerline would have to be safeguarded by its own pressure limiting valve and made flexible. For dimensional drawings, see sect. 3.4.2.

Pressure range Coding within the directional valve bank 1)(bar) Standard version with upstream located 2/2-way directional seated valveadjustable GR 2-0(1), WGR 2-0(1) GS 2-0(1), WGS 2-0(1) Vers. Z11 to Z28from ... to 2) with add. pressure

tool manually tool manually tool manually switch adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable acc. to D 5440 3)

1) As single unit for own storage, replacement, etc. order coding is:Size VB01 = ADV1 - Z13 - ...

VB11 = ADV11 - Z17 - ...

Nom. voltage (G12, G24, WG230)

2) Set value for secondary pressure (pressure gauge reading) at flow Q = 0 lpm (consumer in end position). The pressure drops a little if pressurized oil flows to the consumer.

3) For adjustment ranges see section 2.5, table 4. Monitoring of the pump sided (primary) P duct.Note: Version Z1 ... Z8 can’t be used with pressure switch, as the leakage oil consumption would lead to permanent on/off switching of the pump being controlled by the DG. .

Z114 ... Z284

with DG34

Z115 ... Z285

with DG35

Z 116 ... Z286

with DG36

Z1165 ... Z2865

with DG365

160 .. 250

60 ... 160

30 ... 120

10 ... 30

Z1

Z2

Z3

Z4

Z5

Z6

Z7

Z8

Z11

Z12

Z13

Z14

Z15

Z16

Z17

Z18

Z21

Z22

Z23

Z24

Z25

Z26

Z27

Z28

Symbols

tooladjustable

manuallyadjustable

D 7302 page 19

1) Directional seated valve with solenoid actuation.For the weights with other actuation modes, see D 7300 sect. 3

2) + 0.3 kg per pressure switch

6. Appendix6.1. Solenoid heat built-up

Directional valve banks show slightly reduced heat dissipation to the surroundings due to the small distance between neighboringvalve solenoids. It is therefore recommended to locate at least one unactuated valve between valves actuated simultaneously or forprolonged periods. Otherwise neighboring valves would hinder heat dissipation and heat each other up. This rule should be obeyed,if the duty cycle of the valves are very high.If this is not possible it is recommended to use economy circuits acc. to D 7813, D 7832, D 7833. For size VB 01 and VB 11 anadapter ...-A.. is required, see D 7300, sect. 2.2.3.

Accumulatorpermissible pressure p4

Safety valve for accumulators with TÜV approval 1) D 7000 TÜV,e.g. set to p4 or p3 max

Main pressure limiting valve1) set to p3

e.g. connection blockA3/... acc. to D 6905A

1) The unit approved accumulatorsafety valve safeguardes the hydraulic accumulator against unpermissible excess pressure. Itis supplied with fixed pressure setting and lead seal e.g. at thehighest permissible pressure. Thismay depend either on the accumu-lator (p4) or on the hydraulic system

(p3 max). Any adjustment to the

max. operation pressure p2 or

p2 max , intended for the hydraulic

system, usually takes place via themain pressure limiting valve, shut-off valve (e.g. D 7529, D 6170-ALZ)or other devices (e.g. pump cut-offor pump idle circulation activatedby a pressure switch).

Pressure switch, e.g. set on p2, to switch-off

the pump

Throttle check valve, e.g. RDF... D 7540

The orifice Ø should be selected acc. to the |p-Q-curve such that the permissible flow rateQmax for the valve bank is not exceeded at the

highest possible operating pressure p2.

Compact hydraulic power packe.g. MP acc. to D 7200 H

Example: Valve bank VB 11FM - HM/2 - 1 - G 24

Pressure definitions conforming CETOP RP62Hp2 ... Upper operating pressure of the hydraulic

circuit, e.g. also switch-off pressure for thepump drive

p3 ... Pressure setting of the operating pressure

valve (e.g. p2 max)

p4 ... permissible operating pressure of the

hydraulic accumulator

6.2. Application example for end plates with release valve acc. to section 2.3

End platewith discharge valve

5. Mass (weight) approx. in kg, individual parts

Connection block Adapter plate (for mountingonto hydr. power packs)

Complete directional seated valve 1) incl.sub-plate and its share of the tension rod

Codingacc. to sect. 2.2

suitable VB 01for VB 11

VB 21VB 31VB 41

A.-1/..A.-3/..

0.50.71.21.43.0

A.-2/..A.-4/..

0.40.71.21.43.0

A.-5

0.20.40.51.11.9

C

0.50.30.4----

D

--0.60.81.0--

E

------

1.0--

FF1

0.40.50.5----

G

--0.6------

A,B,C,D,E,F,H,L,N,O,P,Q,R

0.6 2)1.1 2)

2.04.58.9

J

1.3 2)2.3 2)

4.69.118

G

1.4 2)2.5 2)

4.79.2--

I, Y,S, T

1.3 2)2.3 2)

4.69.118

HX, LX,NX, RX

--2.4 2)

------

End plates acc. to sect. 2.3

Additional elements

Pressure reducing valve acc. to sect. 2.5 or 4.8

suitablefor

VB 01VB 11VB 21VB 31

Standard(no coding)

0.10.20.30.8

/2

0.1------

/0/00

--0.4----

/02/002

0.30.4----

/3to/65

0.50.7----

/33to

/6565

0.81.0----

/32to

/652

0.61.0----

/332to

/65652

0.91.3----

/11

0.10.1----

/12

0.10.2----

Spacer - CZ X

0.5 2)0.8 2)

----

- CZ 08/..to

CZ 55/..

1.2 2)1.5 2)

----

Z1toZ8

1.11.1----

Z11to

Z28

1.31.8----

Z114to

Z2865

1.62.1----

Blankingplate, seesect. 4.7

0.1

Flow control valve,see sect. 4.6

VB 31

2.8

Sub-plate with DG,see sect. 4.4

VB 01 VB 11

0.4 0.5

Press control valve,see sect. 4.5

VB 21 VB 31

3.2 8.3

D 7302 page 20

6.3.1. General information

This valve bank is especially designed to enable use of those directional seated valves described in supplement No. 76 (D 7300) atan raised operation pressure range between 500 and 700 bar. Main difference to type VB 21 is, that valve banks type VB 22 are heldtogether via two instead of one tension rod. Additionally they enable utilization of sub-plates featuring idle circulation and shuttlevalves. There are also pressure switches available monitoring the pressure at the consumer ports.

VB 22 AM-5 - G49/U43

- G49/W22

- G39/W22 - 8E - 2- G24

Example 1:

Example 2:

Connection block Valve sections End plateincl. sub-plates

Connection Valve sections Directional valve with end plateblock incl. sub-plates (acc. to sect. 2.3 and 2.4)

VB 21 AM -1/500 - G49/0

- G49/0 - H R - 2 - G24

Valve bank with two tension rodsand integrated idle circulation valve for operation pressure pmax = 700 bar.

Connection block without pres-sure limiting valve, valve sectionswith 4/3- or 3/3-way function andoptional provision for pressureswitches type DG3. at port Aand/or B.Sub-plates /W, /U and end platesare prepared to operate the inte-grated idle circulation valve.

Valve bank with one tension rod foroperation pressure pmax = 500 bar.

Connection block with pressurelimiting valve, two valve sectionswith 4/3-way function and sub-plates /0 to enable combinationwith standard valve sections andend plates acc. to sect. 2.2 to 2.4.

6.3. Valve bank Type VB 22

with 3/3- and 4/3-directional seated valve type G 39 resp. G 49 acc. to D 7300 (Supplement No. 76)

D 7302 page 21

1) The idle circulation valve is automatically activated via a sequence of shuttle valves and the control galleries X and Y.

2) Omitted with symbol coding G 39

6.3.2. Available versions, main data

Order example: VB 22 AM-5 - G49/U43

- G49/W22

- G39/W22 - 8E - 2 - G24

2 G 3/8 conf. DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

3/8-18 NPT 3/8-18 NPT conf. ANSI B1.20.1(3)

DG 3.. atport Bport A

G 39

G 49

Simplified illustration

Simplified illustration


Table 8: End plates

Table 9: Port thread

Table 6: Sub-plate (identical for flow pattern symbols G 39 and G 49)

Sub-plate with shuttle valve sub-sequent to a valve section with thesub-plate coding /U.

Solenoid voltage G12, G24

WG110, WG230

(For data see table 3 and D 7300)

Termination of a valve bank 8E with sub-plate coding /U

and /W

1E Termination of a valve bankwith sub-plate coding /0

8E 1E

Sub-plate without additional elements.Can't be combined with sub-platescoding /U and /W!

Sub-plate with idle circulationvalve and shuttle valvesCirculation pressure|p = 7 bar at Q = 25 lpm|p = 4.5 bar at Q = 12 lpm (Should be always installed as firstsub-plate within a valve bank!)

2)

2)

Connection block(Basic type and size, for description see sect. 6.3.1)

Flow and operation pressureQB ≤ 25 lpm; pmax = 500 bar

QB ≤ 12 lpm; pmax = 700 bar

/0

/U1)

/W1)

Table 7: Pressure switches type DG 3..acc. to D 5440at consumer ports A or B

2 Prepared for retrofitting of a DG 3..Intermediate plates (see sect. 6.3.3) are requiredwhen sub-plates type U or W are used

3 DG 33 200 ... 700 bar

4 DG 34 100 ... 400 bar

5 DG 35 20 ... 250 bar

6 DG 36 4 ... 12 bar

7 DG 365 12 ... 170 bar

D 7302 page 22

6.3.3. Unit dimensions


Connection blockType VB 22 AM - 5

Illustration with valve section coding G 49 1)and sub-plate coding /U and /W

This tension rod isomitted when mount-ed onto connectionblocks type VB 21.

Sub-platecoding /0

End platecoding 8 E

End platecoding 1 E

1) Identical dimensions for G 39

2) Port B is blocked with a tapped plug, when a valve section type G 39 is mounted.

3) Mounting of the intermediate plate part No. 7250 036 with O-ring 3.5x1.2; AU,90 Sh and 2 socket head screws DIN 6912-M5x6-8.8-A2K

Mass (weight):

Connection block VB 22 M = approx. 0.7 kg

Valve sections G 39, G 49 = approx. 3.7 kg

Sub-plates /0, /U, /W = approx. 2.3 kg+ 0.3 kg per pressure switch DG 3..

End plates 8 E, 1 E = approx. 0.5 kg

Ports: DIN ISO 228/1 ANSI B1.20.1(3)(BSPP)

P and R G 3/8 G 3/8-18 NPTA and B G 3/8 G 3/8-18 NPTM G 1/4 G 1/4-18 NPT

Pressure switches:

Coding 2

Coding 3 ... 7 3)


Cable gland Pg 9

M8, 9 deep

2)

2)

appro

x.53

approx. 60

Intermediateplate 3)

M8, 10 deep

D 7302 page 23

1) DG = Pressure switch type DG 3.. acc. to D 54402) With tapped plug, prepared for retrofitting of a CDK 3(32, 35)-..

01 11 21 31 41

' '

' '

' ' ' '

' ' ' ' '

' '

' '

' '

' '

'

' ' ' '

'

' '

' '

'

' '

'

' '

'

' '

'

' '

' '

' '

' '

' ' ' ' '

' ' ' ' '

' '

'

' ' ' ' '

' ' ' '

' '

' '

'

' '

' ' ' ' '

' ' ' '

' ' '

' '

' ' '

' ' ' ' '

' ' ' '

' ' ' ' '

' ' '

' ' '

'

' ' '

' '

' ' ' ' '

2-way pressure reducing valve with pressure specification, reducing the

pressure for the subsequent system. For options, see sect. 2.5

Size

Suffixes in uncoded text:

Adapter version for solenoid plug (see also D 7300)

Blanking plate (sub-plate without valve), sect. 4.7

Orifice in the pump gallery (type EB. acc. to D 6465, sect. 4.2)

Nom. voltage (sect. 2.2)

G12, G24, WG230 12 and 24V DC or 230V AC (for other

voltage see D 7300, sect. 4.1.2 )

Port size (sect. 2.2)

1 Tapped ports G 1/4




5 Tapped ports G 1

End plate (sect. 2.3) 1)

(without) Standard

/2 End plate with drain valve

/3, /4, /5, /6, /65 With one pressure switch DG 3..

/33, /34, /35, /36, /265 With two pressure switches DG 3..

/44, /45, /46, /465

/55, /56, /565, /66, /665, /6565

/0, /00, /.0, /0 Prepared for retrofitting of one (two) pressure switches

/32, /42, /52, /62, /652 With drain valve and one pressure switch DG 3..

/332 ... /65652 With drain valve and two pressure switches DG 3..

/02 Prepared for retrofitting of one DG 3..

/002 Prepared for retrofitting of two DG 3..

/.11, /12 Spacer for retrofitting of one or two valves

Valve sections - additional elements (sect. 2.4.2) 1)

2 Prepared for retrofitting of one pressure switch DG 3.. (connected to the consumer port)

62 Prepared for retrofitting of one pressure switch DG 3..) (connected to the pump gallery),

only coding H, L, N, R

3, 4, 5, 36, 65 Pressure switch DG 3.. (connected to the consumer port), two pressure switches with coding G

6, 7, 8, 66, 665 Pressure switch DG 3.. (connected to the pump gallery), only coding H, L, N, R

91/.., 92/.. Suffix for press control valves (only with coding R), sect. 4.5

Valve sections (sect. 2.4, 2.5, 4)

D,F,B,E,Q,A,C,P,O,I,Y 2/2-way function (seated valve), coding A not available for size 41

H,N,M,R,S,T 3/2-way function (seated valve)

K,M,U,V 3/2-way function (seated valve with return pressure stop)

HX,LX,NX,RX 4/2-way function (seated valve)

J 3/3-way function (seated valve combination)

G 4/3-way function (seated valve combination)

-CZX 2) and

-CZ08 to CZ55/..

Z1.. to Z2865 3-way pressure reducing valve (previous design) sect. 4.8

SE2../1- 2-way flow control valve (sect. 4.6)

-33, -34, -35, -36, -365 Pressure switch installed on individual sub-plate (sect. 4.4) 1)

Actuations (sect. 2.2), available combinations

M Solenoid

H Hydraulic

P, K, F Pneumatic, roller resp. level

T Pin

D Turn knob

Connection blocks for pipe mounting (sect. 2.2)

A.-1/.., A.-2/.. With pressure limiting valve with pressure specification (manually or tool adjustable

A.-3/.., A.-4/.. With pressure limiting valve with pressure specification (manually or tool adjustable (all steel design)

A.-5 No pressure limiting valve

Adapter plates for mounting onto hydraulic power packs

C For type R (D 6010H ++) and Z (D 6820)

D For type R (D 6010H ++) and Z (D 6820)

E For type R (D 6010H ++) and Z (D 6820)

F, F1 For type HC (D 7900), HCG (D 7900 G), MP (D 7200 H), FP (D 7310) and HK (D 7600-...)

type F1 for size VB 01 only

G For type MP acc. to D 7200 H or RZ acc. to D 6910 H together with connection block

A51/.., A61/.. or two stage valve NE21 acc. to D 7161

Basic type and size (sect. 2.2)

VB 01, VB 11, VB 21, VB 31, VB 41 Type and size

7. Type overviewOrder examples:VB01 F1M - H6 H36 Z16 H /4 65 - 1 - WG230

VB11 AM -1/350 - F H R 3 G35 H /3 2 11 - 2 - G24

VB21 GMF - R H H H /H - 3 - G24

2/2- and 3/2-way directional seated valves type BVG and BVPfor any flow direction, zero leakage

all ports pressure resistant

D 7400Seated valves BVG and BVP

September 2012-01


2.2


Perm. pressure pmax = 320 barPerm. flow Qmax = 50 lpm

Additional valves with same function:o Type BVG 11(12 and 2), BVP 11(2) see appendix, sect. 5.1,

Run-out design do not use for new layouts!o Type BVG, BVP 1 D 7765 (Qmax = 20 lpm, pmax = 400 bar)o Type NBVP 16 D 7765 N (Qmax = 20 lpm, pmax = 400 bar)o Type BVE D 7921 (Qmax = 70 lpm, pmax = 400 bar)o Type VP D 7915 (Qmax = 15 lpm, pmax = 400 bar)

Design for pipe

connection

Example: Type BVG 3 S-G 24

Design for manifold mounting

Example: Type BVP 3 R-G 12

1. GeneralThese 2/2- and 3/2-way directional cone seated valves are available with electrical, hydraulic or pneumatic actuation. All ports are equally pressure resistant due to the internal pressure balance.The zero or idle position is achieved automatically if the valve is not actuated due to spring return. They are of all steel design and all functionally essential internal parts are hardened and run maintenance free in oil; Cones and seats are ground.

D 7400 page 2

BVP 3 Z - H 1/4 BVP 3 R(S) - H 1/4

BVP 3 Z - P BVP 3 R(S) - P


Order examples: BVG 3 R/B 2,5 - WG 230

BVP 3 Z - P

Complete symbols

(The actuation symbols apply to all flow symbols)

Pipe connection

BVG 3 R - H BVG 3 S - P

BVG 3 Z - G...BVG 3 Z - WG...

Manifold mounting

Table 1: Basic type and size 1)

Coding

BVG 3

BVP 3

Design and connection

Pipe connection G 1/2 ISO 228/1(BSPP)

Manifold mounting

FlowQmax (lpm)

50

50

Pressure pmax(bar)

320

320

BVP 3 Z - H BVP 3 R(S) - H

BVP 3 Z - G...BVP 3 Z - WG...

Table 2: Symbols

R S Z

Table 3: Orifices(in ports A, B, and C, see also sect. 3.1)

Coding No. for subsequent orders System or # accumulator (mm) BVG 3.. BVP 3.. pressure range

B 2,5 2.5 7405 014 b 7405 013-2,5 about 300 barB 3 3 7405 014 c 7405 013-3,0 about 200 barB 3,5 3.5 7405 014 d 7405 013-3,5 about 150 barB 4 4 7405 014 e 7405 013-4,0 about 100 bar

2) 0 2) 7405 014 a 7405 013 --

1) Type BVG 11(12, 2) and BVP 11(2) see appendix, sect. 5.1, Run-out design do not use for new layouts!

2) Undrilled for customized diameter acc. to |p-Q-curve of the orifices, sect. 3.13) DC-solenoid (98 V DC, 205 V DC) with plug featuring a bridge rectifier circuit

Table 4: Actuations

Main data, see also sect. 3.2

UN = 12 V DC

UN = 24 V DC

UN = 110 V AC, 50/60 Hz (98 V DC) 3)

UN = 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz (205 V DC) 3)

Ext. control port G 1/4 (BSPP). Only with type BVP 3 !

Ext. control port G 1/4 (BSPP)

with plug

G 12

G 24

WG 110

WG 230

H

H 1/4

P

Coding

Plug withLED

L 12

L 24

---

---

without plug

X 12

X 24

X 98

X 205

Solenoid

Hydraulic

Pneumatic

Actuation

Control pcontr min = 24 barpressure: pcontr max = 320 bar

Control pcontr min = 4 barpressure: pcontr max = 15 bar

Actuation Solenoid Hydraulic Pneumatic symbols Coding H 1/4 Coding H

D 7400 page 3

3. Further parameters3.1 General and hydraulic

Installation position Any

Negative (transverse of one into the other flow direction is only completed when the switch-ing position is achieved). All passages are interconnected during the switching operation.

Operating pressure pmax = 320 bar

Static overload capacity Ports A, B, and C approx. 2 x pmax (640 bar)

Body material and Steel, zinc galvanizedsurface coating

Mass (weight) approx. kg

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conforming DIN 51514 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conforming to DIN 51519.Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 1500 mm2/s; opt. operation approx. 10... 500 mm2/s.

Also suitable are biological degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES (Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70°C.

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80°CFluid: -25 ... +80°C, Note the viscosity range !

Permissible temperature during start: -40°C (Observe start-viscosity!), as long as the service temperature is at least 20K higher for the following operation.

Biological degradable pressure fluids: Note manufacturer’s specifications. By consideration of the compatibility with seal material not over +70°C.

Attention: Observe the restriction regarding the operation duration in sect. 3.2. !

Perm. flow Qperm acc. to sect. 2 applies to pmax = 320 bar with solenoid actuation in usual pump circuits. With pressure < 150 bar (solenoid actuated) or with all other actuation modes Qperm may be exceeded up to 50% as long as the back pressure is permissible.

Flow limitation The max. flow has to be limited (depending on the pressure) by means of orifices in the case of accumulator circuits or if connected to high pressure circuits (circulation lines or central supplies) down to the specified Qmax (see sect. 2).

These orifices must be located always on the accumulator side. With valves type ..Z..- they are installed in port C. If mounting in port A or B is requested, this has to stated in uncoded text. For detailed description see table 3, sect. 2.

Overlapping with 3/2-way directional valves

Complete with actuation

Solenoid

Hydraulic

Pneumatic

BVG 3 RBVG 3 S

2.3

1.9

1.9

BVP 3 Z

2.4

2.0

1.7

BVP 3 RBVP 3 S

2.3

1.9

1.9

BVG 3 Z

3.3

2.9

2.6

3/2-way-valve

2/2-way-valve

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)


Viscosity of the oil during tests approx. 60 mm2/s

Additional orificesBasic valve|p-Q-curve

D 7400 page 4

3.2 Actuations

Solenoid

The solenoids are manufactured and tested conforming VDE 0580

DC-voltage AC-voltage

Coding G 12 G 24 WG 110 WG 230 L 12 L 24 --- --- X 12 X 24 --- ---

Nom voltage UN (V) 12 24 110 230

Nom. power PN (W) 33.2 30.0 32.8 33.0

(DC-voltage) (AC-voltage, 50/60 Hz)

Switching time (guideline) ON or OFF: approx. 50 ... 60 ms; with WG.. approx. 2-3 times prolonged

Switchings / hour approx. 2000/h to be regarded as approx. evenly distributed

Protection class IP 65 (IEC 60529) (plug properly mounted)

Insulation material class F

Contact temperature approx. 98°C, at 20°C ambient temperature

Cut-off energy WA Ò 0.5 Ws

Surface coating DIN 50961-Fe/Zn 12 bk cC (solenoid)

Relative duty cycle during service (100% ED stamped on the solenoid)

Rel. duty cycle %ED-5 min

Am

bie

nt

tem

p.

U (°

C)

Pneumatic

(Coding P)Hydraulic

(Coding H, H 1/4)

Type G... Type L.. Type WG..

24 bar 4 bar

320 bar 15 bar

< 2 bar ---

approx. 1.5 pcontr max bar approx. 1.5 pcontr max bar

0.6 cm3 3 cm3

Steel (body) Light alloy (body)galv. zinc plated black anodized

Control pressure Pcontr min

pcontr max

Perm. residual pressure in the control line for save return to idle position

Static over load capacity of Z

Control oil volume (geom.)

Housing material and surface coating

Solenoid terminalsPlug DIN EN 175 301-803

(circuitry and symbol)

All plugs

For additional plugs, see D 7163

D 7400 page 5

4. Unit dimensionsAll dimensions are in mm and subject to change without notice!

4.1 Version for pipe connectionIllustrations are with solenoid actuation (coding G.. or WG..), for other actuations see below

Type BVG 3 R(S) Type BVG 3 Z

For missing dimensions see below!

Ports conf. ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A, B, and C = G 1/2

Ports conf. ISO 228/1 (BSPP): A and B = G 1/2

Hydraulic actuation

Coding H 1/4

Pneumatic actuation

Coding P

#8.5 thru-hole

Manual emer-gency actuation

Cable gland

#8.5 thru-hole

Actuation aid (do not use any sharp-edged parts)

1) Note: This dimension is depending on the manufacturer and can be up to max. 40 mm acc. to DIN EN 175 301-803!

2) When required the solenoid may be rotat ed to the valve body by another 4x90° in addition to the standard assembly position illustrated here.


The valve may be actuated by pressing down the brass bolt visible from above by means of a steel pin or a screw driver etc.Note: All pressure apparent at port B

loads on the cross section of the brass bolt #5.5 i.e. 100 bar or 240 N !

#5.5

approx. 35 1)

2)

D 7400 page 6

M 6, 9 deep

4.2 Version for manifold mountingIllustrations are with solenoid actuation (coding G.. or WG..), for other actuations see below 4.1

Type BVP 3 R(S)

M 6, 7 deep

Hole pattern of the manifold (top view)

Sealing of ports A, B, and C via O-rings 13.95x2.62 NBR 90 Sh

Port Z: via O-ring 2.54x1.78 NBR 90 Sh

Available as spare part, seal-kit DS 7400-3 incl. O-rings for actuation coding H, H 1/4.

For missing data see sect. 4.1 !

For missing data see sect. 4.1 !

Type BVP 3 Z

Hydraulic actuation

Coding H

Coding H 1/4

Pneumatic actuation

Coding P

1) Control port Z is only apparent at versions with hydraulic actuation coding H!


1)

1)

Control port Z is at the upper (valve section)

D 7400 page 7

5. Appendix5.1 Type BVG 11(12 and 2) or BVP 11(2)

Run-out design do not use for new layouts! (Alternative, type BVG 1 and BVP 1 acc. to D 7765)

Order examples:

BVG 11 R - G 24

BVP 2 S/B 1,5 - WG 230


Coding

BVG 11

BVG 12

BVG 2

BVP 11

BVP 2

Design and connection

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 3/8

Manifold mounting

FlowQmax (lpm)

12

20 1)

20

12

20

Pressurepmax(bar)

320

320

1) With solenoid actuation:20 lpm up to 200 bar12 lpm up to 320 bar and Ò 80% EDsee also sect. 3.1 “Flow”

2) Undrilled for customized diameter acc. to |p-Q-curve of the orifices, sect. 3.1

3) Only with type BVP 11(2), not available for type BVG.. (housing dimensions to small - radiation insufficient)

Pipe connection ISO 228/1(BSPP)

Table 7: Actuation modes

Actuation Coding, note

Solenoid G 12, L 12, X 12 see table 4, G 24, L 24, X 24 sect. 2 WG 100, X 98

WG 230, X 205

G 24 EX 3)

Ex-proof design UN = 24 V DC; pmax = 220 bar !

Manual A for type BVG 11(12) !

Body material and surface treatment = Steel (lever housing gas nitrated) Actuation torque = approx. 70 Nm at 320 bar

Table 6: Additional orifice (at ports A, B, and C, see also sect. 3.1)

Coding

B 0,6

B 0,8

B 1,1

B 1,3

B 1,5

2)

B 0,4

B 0,5

B 0,6

B 0,7

B 0,8

B 0,9

B 1,0

B 1,1

B 1,3

B 1,5

B 2,0

B 2,5

B 4,0

2)

B 0,6

B 0,8

B 1,1

B 1,3

B 1,5

B 2,0

B 2,5

2)

#(mm)

0.60.81.11.31.5

0

0.40.50.60.70.80.91.01.11.31.52.02.54.0

0

0.60.81.11.31.52.02.5

0

for subsequent orders

7406 012 b7406 012 c7406 012 d 7406 012 f7406 012 h

7406 012 a

7400 003 k7400 003 l7400 003 d7400 003 m7400 003 e7400 003 n7400 003 o7400 003 g7400 003 h7400 003 c7400 003 f7400 003 i7400 003 b

7400 003 a

7921 012-0,67921 012-0,87921 012-1,17921 012-1,37921 012-1,57921 012-2,07921 012-2,5

7921 012

Basic type

BVG 11

BVG 2

BVP 11BVP 2

Symbols (see table 2 sect. 2)Attention: Symbol Z not available for type BVG 12 !

D 7400 page 8

Further parameters

For general and electrical data see sect. 3.1 or 3.2

Mass (weight) approx. kg Complete with actuation

Solenoid

Manual

BVG 11 R(S)BVG 12 R(S)

1.0

0.6

BVP 11 Z

1.0

---

BVP 11 R(S)

0.9

---

BVG 11 Z

1.6

---

Complete with actuation

Solenoid

BVG 2 R(S)

1.3

BVP 2 Z

1.4

BVP 2 R(S)

1.1

BVG 2 Z

1.7

|p-Q-curveB

ack

pre

ssure

|p

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)


Viscosity of the oil during tests approx. 60 mm2/s

Additional orificesBasic valve

D 7400 page 9

Unit dimensions

All dimensions are in mm and subject to change without notice!


Illustration with solenoid actuation (coding G.. or WG..); For manual actuations, see below

Type BVG 11 R(S) Type BVG 12 R(S)

Ports conf. ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A, B, and C = G 1/4 (BVG 11 R, S and Z) = G 3/8 (BVG 12 R and S)

#6.5 thru-hole


Cable gland

Ports conf. ISO 228/1 (BSPP): A, B, and C = G 3/8

#6.5 thru-hole


Cable gland


1) Note: This dimension is depending on the manufacturer and can be up to max. 40 mm acc. to DIN EN 175 301-803 !

2) When required the solenoid may be rotated to the valve body by another 4x90° in addition to the standard assembly position illustrated here.


(applies to type BVG ..11(12 and 2))

The valve may be actuated by pressing down the brass bolt visible from above by means of a steel pin or a screw driver etc.Note: All pressure apparent at port B

loads on the cross section of the brass bolt #5 i.e. 100 bar or 195 N !

#5

Type BVG 11 Z

Type BVG 2 Z

Type BVG 2 R(S)


Coding A (applies to type BVG ..11(12))

#6.5 thru-hole

1)

2)

2)

approx. 35 1)

app

rox.

35

app

rox.

35

approx. 35

D 7400 page 10


Illustration with solenoid actuation (coding G.. or WG..), For manual actuations, see type BVG..

Type BVP 11 R(S) Type BVP 11 Z

Type BVP 2 R(S)

Type BVP 2 Z

For missing data see type BVG.. !





Sealing of ports A, B, and C via O-rings 7.65x1.78 NBR 90 Sh.

Available as spare part, seal-kit DS 7400-1.






M5, 6 deep


M 5, 6.5 deep

M 5, 6.5 deep

M6, 6 deep

D 7400 page 11

5.3 Schematic cross sectional views (standard versions acc. to sect. 2)

The schematic cross sectional views are represented here to show the functional principle, illustrated are valves in actuated state.They do apply to all actuations acc. to table 4.

Type BVG 3 R.. Type BVG 3 S.. Type BVG 3 Z..

5.2 2/2-way directional valve with by-pass check valve

There is a modified version of valve type BVG-2R available, which may be equipped with a check valve to by-pass the blocked passage BdA.

Order example: BVG R 2 R - ... Symbol

Coding like in sect. 5.1

R = By-pass check valve

Flow Q (lpm)

|p-Q-curve

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

Opening pressure of the check valve approx. 0.8 bar

Posi

tion

0

Position

a

Note: Dimensional drawing and mass (weight) like type BVG 2 R acc. to sect. 5.1

Directional seated valves Type WN and WHZero leakage

(Type WN also as directional spool valve)

D 7470 A/1Directional seated valves

WN and WH

August 2008-00


2.2


Individual valves for manifold mounting Section 2Valves with individual connection sub-plates Section 3Directional valve banks D 7470 B/1

Pressure pmax = 350 ... 450 barFlow Qmax = 5 ... 60 lpm


Individual valve for

manifold mounting

(see section 2)

Valve with indiv. connection

sub-plate for pipe connection

(see section 3)Example as size 3

Size 1

Size 2

Size 3

Size 4

o The directional seated valves type WN and WH are of compact design and feature 2/2-, 3/2-way functions. 2/2-, 3/2-way functions are possible by combining two individual valves on one joint sub-plate (see sect 3).

o All functionally important components, from the solenoid armature to the valve elements, are lubricated by the hydraulic fluid, therefore no maintenance is required.

o Type WN is only available as size 1. The armature cavity is pressure resistant up to 300 bar and directly connected to port R. This means that between the solenoid armature and the valve elements only a simple pin (with no seal) is required. This results in a very long service life (no seal wear).

The solenoid force is largely dependent on the respective pressures to be switched. This often enables operation with reduced supply voltage (see sect. 2.2.1) thereby reducing the solenoid temperature and increasing its service life.

o Additionally to the directional seated valve versions of type WN, there is also a 4/2-way directional spool valve available (pmax = 300 bar).

o Type WH features an actuation pin between solenoid armature and valve elements which is sealed and shaped in such a way, that the solenoid force is supported by an additional hydraulic force. This enables pressure up to 450 bar (WH 1) or 350 bar (WH 2, 3 and 4) to be achieved.

For lubrication purposes and to equalize the volume, the armature cavity is either connected internally to the return port, or in case of 2/2-way valves connected externally to the return pipe (depending on application).

Type WH 1 features larger valve elements and more stroke resulting in a reduced flow resistance than with WN 1.

D 7470 A/1 page 2

2. Individual valve for manifold mountingFor valves with individual sub-plate suited for pipe connection, see section 3.

2.1 Type coding, main data

For complete type overview see section 6.1, page 19

Coding example: WH 1 M - G 24

Table 1: Basic type and size Table 2: Actuation solenoid 5)

Table 3: Flow pattern symbols (also see section 3 for combinations of individual valves)

Type Pressure pmax (bar) Flow (lpm)

1) See sect. 2.22) The additional check valve on the P-side in types Q, E, N, R, and WX

prevents an equalization of pressure when the passage is open, or a change in direction of flow when due to other switching operations the pressure at P becomes lower than at A (B, R).

See also section 3, table 4 a footnote 3). The check valve insert can be retrofitted and is therefore separately

available. Order coding EK 01.3) See also installation instruction in sect. 5.44) Not available for WH 4 5) For further special voltage see section 2.2.2 “Special voltages“

Suitedfor

WN 1

2/2-way

WN 1

3/2-way

WH 1 to WH 4

2/2-way

WH 1 toWH 4

3/2-way

Directional seated valves Directional spool valves

D Q 2) 3) F E 2) W

H N 2) 3) M R 2) WX

H N 2) M R 2)

D Q 2) F E 2)

Only for WN 1, WH 1 and WH 2:

3/2-way valves H1

with additional N1

return pressure M1

stop R1

When several valves are operating in parallel, the return pressure stop prevents pressure surges out of the common return pipe from entering unoperated, unloaded or easily moving consumers, where there is a connection AdR. Thus preventing uncontrolled movements. Such pressure surges can arise as a result of switching operations. Occasionally the return pressure stop may be required for WN 1 or WN 2 valves, as the resetting spring has a lower force than in WH 1. These check valves are not suit-able for stopping pressurized oil, which may be apparent at R, depending on the combination of valves. A circuit with an external check valve would have to be installed in this case.

Directional seated valve

... 350 1)

450

350

350

350

Directional seated valve

5

8

15

30

60

Directional spool valve

300

Directional spool valve

6

WN 1

WH 1

WH 2

WH 3

WH 4

Standard Without With plug Nom.with plug featuring voltageplug LED‘s

G 12 4) X 12 4) L 12 4) 12 V DC

G 24 X 24 L 24 24 V DC

G 98 4) X 98 4) --- 98 V DC

G 205 X 205 --- 205 V DC

WG 110 4) --- --- 110 V AC

WG 230 --- --- 230 V AC

The following parts are required for retrofitting:

WN(H) 1 Valve shim 7470 021

WH 2 Ball 3/16” DIN 5401 and housing 7545 019

Only for WN 1, WH 1:

2/2- and 3/2-way direction-al seated valves feature an additional orifice in port P, flow pattern symbols D, F, H and M (see also sect. 5.2).

50 /60 Hz

2/2-way directional seated valves featur-ing a pressure limiting valve in the intermedi-ate plate, flow pattern symbols D and F (see also sect. 5.1).

D 7470 A/1 page 3

2.2 Further characteristic data2.2.1 General and hydraulic

Nomenclature, design Seated ball valve or spool valve in 2/2-, 3/2- or 4/2-way versions, depending on type

Pipe connection Basic valve (sect. 2.1): Via manifold Sub-plates (sect. 3): Via tapped ports

Ports P = Inlet (pump side); A, B = Consumers; R = Return L = Relief port, connect pressureless to the tank (return) always For pressure rating, see below


Flow resistance Seated valves: Only in arrow direction in accordance with symbolSpool valves: Preferably in arrow direction (see symbol W/WX in sect. 2.1). Contrary to the

arrow direction is permissible; Note pressure rating of R (see below )

Overlapping 3/2-way Negative. Transition from one to the other flow direction is only completed when seated valves end position is achieved i.e. all passages are interconnected during the switching operation. The switching operation is unhampered by this, due to their quick response. Spool valves: None

Flow (lpm)

Operation pressure

Ports P, A and B

Perm. pressure in port R WN 1: pR Ò 350 bar, but observe that pR Ò pA Ò pP! Note: Use code letter F and E as straight-way valve up to 320 bar only! WH 1(2, 3 a. 4): Flow pattern symbols H, N, M and R pR Ò 20 bar Flow pattern symbols D, Q, F and E pR Ò 350 bar, pL Ò 20 bar Sub-plates acc. to sect. 3: Version ..S(SR) or ..V(VR) pR Ò 20 bar

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conforming DIN 51524 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conforming DIN 51519. Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 800 mm2/s; opt. operation approx. 10... 200 mm2/s. Flow resistance will increase more sharply at viscosities over approx. 300 mm2/s! Also suitable for biological degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES

(Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70°C. Versions for glycol-based brake fluids (conforming DOT 4) are available for WN 1, WH 1, and

WH 2. Add suffix -AT to the order coding acc. to sect. 2.1.

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80 °C (Observe restrictions in sect. 2.2.2 “Duty cycle” Fluid: -25 ... +80°C, Note the viscosity range! Permissible temperature during start: -40°C (Note start-viscosity!), as long as the service tempera-

ture is at least 20K higher for the following operation. Biological degradable pressure fluids: Note manufacturer’s specifications. By consideration of the

compatibility with seal material not over +70°C.

Static overload capacity approx. 2 x pmax

See table 1 in section 2.1

Basic type

WN 1 Directional seated valves

WH 1

WH 2 (3 and 4)

Flowpattern

D, Q, R, H, N, M,J

F, E

W, WX

all

Appliedvoltage

UN

0.75 UN

0.5 UN

UN ... 0.5 UN

UN

UN

Relative duty cycle % ED100 50 <10

230 250 350

110 160 200

100 100 120

350

300

450

350

Ambient temperature

Guideline for 20°Cat 40°C reduced by approx. 10 to 15%

Guideline for 40°C(For restrictions see also section 2.2.2)

Switchable pressure (bar)

WN(H) 1WH 2WH 3WH 4

Individual valve acc. to sect. 2.1

D H (1) W,to to WXF R (1)

0.6 0.6 0.60.7 1.2 --0.7 1.3 --2.7 3.0 --

Individual valve with connection sub-plate acc. to section 3without pressure limiting valve with pressure limiting valveWN 1 - 1/4 (C) WN 1../.. - 1/4 .. - 1/4 S .. - 1/4 VWH..- 1/4 (C, L) WH 1../.. - 1/4 .. - 1/4 SR .. - 1/4 VRD, Q, H (1), N (1), W, U, J, H (1), N (1), Q to W,E, F M (1), R (1) WX L M (1), R (1) R (1) WX F, D

0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.7 1.0 1.2 1.71.0 1.0 -- 1.9 -- 1.2 -- --1.8 1.8 -- 3.5 -- 2.1 -- --3.6 4.0 -- 7.4 -- -- -- --


o An under voltage < 90% of UN is not permissible with type WH.

o Valves type WN 1: The required solenoid force is usually directly proportional to the operating pressure to be switched. The supply voltage can be reduced (undervoltage see table above with 0.75 UN a. 0.5 UN), if the operation pressure in a hydraulic circuit is limited to a value lower than the maximum permissible value, by a pressure limiting valve. This means that the heat build-up of the solenoid is reduced, resulting in increased service life of the winding and reduced heat dissipation to neighboring parts (valve body with seals) and other valves (valve banks).

o The use of an economy circuit is recommended for prolonged operation durations. See also the respective notes in sect. 2.2.2 “Plugs“.

Directional spool valves

D 7470 A/1 page 4

|p - Q-curves

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)F

low

res

ista

nce

|p

(bar

)

Flow Q (lpm)Guideline for a fluid viscosity of approx. 60 mm2/s

1) Add to the characteristic flow resistance of the valve in flow direction when apparent2) Add to the characteristic flow resistance of the valve (Q, E, N, and R) in flow direction when a check valve is installed at P

2.2.2 Electrical data (standard)

Solenoid

Basic type

Coding acc. to section 2.1

Nom. voltage UN for other voltage,see page 5

Nom. current I20 3) (A)

Power PN 3) (W)

Wet armature solenoid, manufactured and tested conforming VDE 0580

WN 1, WH 1 and WH 2 WH 3 6) WH 4

G 12 G 24 WG 110 4) WG 230 4) G 12 G 24 WG 110 4) WG 230 4) G 24 WG 230 4)X 12 X 24 (G 98) (G 205) X 12 X 24 (G 98) (G 205) X 24 (G 205)L 12 L 24 (X 98) (X 205) L 12 L 24 (X 98) (X 205) (X 205)

12V DC 24V DC 110V AC 230V AC 12V DC 24V DC 110V AC 230V AC 24V DC 230V AC (98V DC) (205 V DC) (98 V DC) (205V DC) (205V DC)

2 1 0.25 0.14 2.72 1.36 0.30 0.16 3.4 0.4

24.4 24.4 24.4 24.4 30 30 30 30 82.2 82.2

60 ... 70 (WN(H) 1; 50 (WH 2) 50 100

30 ... 60 (WN(H) 1; 65 (WH 2) 40 40 ... 200 5)

approx. 2 ... 3 times prolonged with WG versions

WN 1 = 3600; WH 1 and WH 2 = 2000 2000 2000

to be regarded as approx. evenly distributed

On: (ms)

Off: (ms)

Switching frequency / h approx.

3) The electrical data of the solenoids are reference values (max.) and can differ insignificantly depending on manufacturer

4) DC-solenoid 98 V DC or 205 V DC with plug featuring a bridge rectifier, see also „Plugs“, suited for mains 50 and 60 Hz.

5) D, Q 130 ms F, E 40 ms H, N, M, R pressure-dependent (50 bar = 40 ms; 200 bar = 100 ms; 350 bar = 200 ms)

6) For version with switching performance of 8 Watt, see section 5.3

Switching time (guideline)

Type WN 1 Type WH 1

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)

Flow Q (lpm)WH 2

WH 3

Flo

w r

esis

tance

|p

(bar

)


Type WH 2 and WH 3 Type WH 4

check valve at P

(E, Q, N, R) 1 )check valve at P

(E, Q, N, R) 1 )

return pressure stop

(D1,H1 etc.) 1)

return pressure stop

(D1, H1 etc.)1)

Switching time „off“ with WH 4 and flow pattern symbol

D 7470 A/1 page 5

Continuation: Electrical data

Protec. mode IEC 70 (Co) 13

Isolation class

Switch-off energy (Ws)

Plug (circuitry and symbol)

Al plugs

Relative duty cycle

Mounting

Depending on the ambient temperature during operation

At ambient temperature (°C) < 40 60 < 80

Duty cycle (%ED) 100 approx. 60 approx. 40

IP 65 (IEC 60529), with properly assembled plug

F with WN 1, WH 1, WH 2 and WH 3; H with WH 4

W Ò 0.5 Ws (guideline + approx. 10% acc. to measurements with nom. voltage UN)

DC-voltage DC-voltage AC-voltage View of the terminalCoding G.. with LED‘s Coding WG.. pattern (solenoid) Coding L

The plugs are automatically contained in the valve order coding.For other plugs and their resp. data , see D 7163.e.g. Type SVS 3129020 (yellow LED and protective circuitry)

Type MSD 3-209 C1 (clamp diode, suppressing cut-off peaks)

Valve versions G 24 and WG 110, WG 230 can be used together with plugs incorporating economy circuits, see D 7163, D 7813, D 7832, D 7833. Economy circuits enable a reduction of the final sole-noid force, as soon as it has achieved its working position, by reducing the applied voltage. This will significantly reduce coil over-temperature in case of prolonged duty cycles or neighboring valves. An additional advantage is the increased service life of the connected solenoid.

100% EDstamping on the solenoid

The solenoid can be simply removed after slackening the 4 fixing bolts, easing replacement in case of an electrical defect (see also sect. 5.6).

Special voltage

Other solenoid voltages are available, beside the standard versions listed on page 4.

Examples: WH 1 H - G 180 (I20 = 0.33 A)WH 3 E - G 48 (I20 = 0.69 A)

The nominal power ratings are approx-imate reference values only, which can differ insignificantly depending on voltage and solenoid manufacturer. The nom. current can be calculated: I20 = PN/UN (see examples).

Notes for lay-out

DC-voltage:

The voltage specification (solenoid lay-out) shall correspond to the actual supply voltage (perm. tolerance * 5...10%). A reduced

voltage leads to reduced solenoid force, an exceeded voltage causes an unpermissible solenoid heat built-up. Only exception is

type WN 1, see section 2.2.1 “Operation pressure“.

AC-voltage:

The voltage specification shall correspond to the actual supply voltage (50/60 Hz).

The solenoid DC-voltage is approx. 0.9 UAC-2 V because of the utilized rectifier plug. The table above lists the corresponding

DC-solenoids for various AC supply voltage (e.g. for 110 V AC 50 Hz, solenoid with UN = 98 V DC & stamping on the magnet!).

Basic type

Nominal power PN

G 12 (X 12, L 12) 1)

G 24 (X 24, L 24) 1) WG 24

G 36 (X 36)

G 42 (X 42)

G 48 (X 48)

G 80 (X 80) WG 100

G 98 (X 98) 1) WG 110 1)

G 110 (X 110)

G 180 (X 180) WG 200

G 205 (X 205) 1) WG 230 1)

WN 1WH 1WH 2

+ 24 W

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

WH 3

+ 30 W

o

o

o

o

o

o

WH 4

+ 82 W

o

o

o

Vo

ltag

e sp

ecifi

catio

n D

C (&

UN (V

))

Vo

ltag

e sp

ecifi

catio

n A

C (5

0/6

0 H

z)

1) Standard version

D 7470 A/1 page 6

3. Individual valve with connection sub-plate For complete type overview see section 6.2, page 19.

3.1 Type WN 1

Order example: WN 1H - 1/4 S - G 24 - 150

WN 1 D - 1/4 V - G 24 - 50

Connection sub-plate with tool adjustable pressure limiting valve

Connection sub-plate with pressure limiting valve connected in series 1)

Valve coding acc. to section 2.1

Desired pressure setting Pressure ranges: (0) ... 80 bar (0) ... 160 bar (0) ... 315(350) bar

Table 4 a: Connection sub-plates for individual valves

S, V = Tool adjustable

SR, VR = Manually adjustable

Pressure limiting valve:

WN 1.../... - 1/4 - ..

Double directional seated valve for pipe connection.Serve for the compact realization of two separate 3/2-way functions.

Port P, R, A, B 4) : Thread G 1/4 ISO 228/1 (BSPP), suited for pipe fittings shape B DIN 3852 page 2

2/2-way directional seated valve combination WN 1 D, Q or FFixation of the consumer at any intermediate position

3/3-way function

Table 4 b: Directional valve combinations

WN 1 J - 1/4 - .. WN 1 U - 1/4 - ..

Flow pattern symbol H(1), N(1), M(1), R(1)at port Bat port A

Order coding for connec-tion sub-plate only (enabling retrofitting of a double valve): Sub-plate 7470 061 com-plete with readily installed screen filter discs HFC 1/4 F in P, A, and B.

For valves with flow pattern acc. to section 2.1

2/2-way directional valves 3/2-way directional valves

Valve D, F D, F D, F H, N, M, R W, WXcoding Q, E 2) Q, E 2)

Pressure lim. valve without without with 1) 3) with 3) without with 3) without with 3)

WN 1 - 1/4 - 1/4 C - 1/4 V - 1/4 S - 1/4 - 1/4 S - 1/4 - 1/4 S

- 1/4 VR - 1/4 SR - 1/4 SR - 1/4 SR

Suited for basic type

Flow pattern symbols

4/2-way directional spool valve

Port P, R, A and B 4) :Thread G 1/4 ISO 228/1 (BSPP), suited for pipe fittings shape B DIN 3852 page 2.

1) Utilized to activate a second pressure stage, e.g. for prop. directional spool valves type PSL, PSV acc. to D 7700 ++ or for pressure stage circuits of piloted pressure valves e.g. type DV acc. to D 4350 or AS, ALZ acc. to D 6170.

2) Valves coding E and Q should be preferred for by-passing to the tank; A return pressure stop may be installed at R, when pressure peaks could occur at R (see sect. 2.1).

3) Attention: Permissible pressure 20 bar in the return! A steel spring housing is available, required when pressure surges (> 20 bar) might occur in the return, e.g. as result of decompression

surges induced by accumulating consumers. Indicate in uncoded text „with steel spring housing“ added to the order coding.

4) For permissible operation pressure, see section 2.2.1

Example: WN 1 J - 1/4 - G 24 WN 1 U - 1/4 - WG 230

Example: WN 1 M/M - 1/4 - G 12

D 7470 A/1 page 7

WH 1.../... - 1/4 - ..

Double directional seated valve for pipe connection.Serve for the compact realization of two separate 3/2 way functions.

2/2-way directional seated valve combination WH..D, Q or FFixation of the consumer at any intermediate position

3/3-way funtion

Table 5 b: Directional valve combinations

WH 1 J - 1/4 - .. WH 1 U - 1/4 - ..

WH 2 J - 1/4 - .. WH 2 U - 1/4 - ..

WH 3 J - 3/8 - .. WH 3 U - 3/8 - ..

at port Bat port A

Example: WH 1 M/M-1/4-G 12

Order coding for connection sub-plate only (enabling retrofitting of a double valve): Sub-plate 7470 061 complete with readily installed screen filter discs HFC 1/4 F in P, A, and B.

3.2 Type WH 1, WH 2, WH 3 and WH 4

Order example: WH 2 H - 1/4 - WG 230

WH 3 D - 3/8 SR - G 24 - 200

Valve coding acc. to section 2.1


S, V = Tool adjustable

SR, VR = Manually adjustable

Desired pressure setting Pressure ranges: (0) ... 80 bar (0) ... 160 bar (0) ... 315(350) bar (0) ... 450 bar with WH 1

Table 5 a: Connection sub-plates for individual valves

For valves with flow pattern acc. to section 2.1 2/2-way directional valves 3/2-way directional valves

Port R is not pressure resistant, Port R is not suited for by-pass circuits pressure resistant 2)

Valve coding D, F D, Q, F, E H, N, M, R

Pressure lim. valve without 1) without with 1) with 1) without without with 1)

WH 1 - 1/4 - 1/4 C - 1/4 V(VR) - 1/4 S(SR) - 1/4 L - 1/4 - 1/4 S(SR) G 1/4

WH 2 - 1/4 --- --- - 1/4 S(SR) - 1/4 L - 1/4 - 1/4 S(SR) G 1/4

WH 3 - 3/8 --- --- - 3/8 S(SR) - 3/8 L - 3/8 - 3/8 S(SR) G 3/8

WH 4 - 1/2 --- --- --- - 1/2 L - 1/2 --- G 1/2

Suited for basic type


For perm. operation pressure, see sect. 2.2.1

For perm. operation pressure, see sect. 2.2.1

PortP, R, A a. B ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

1) The connection sub-plate features an internal connection LdR only for idle circulation circuits. Attention: Permissible pressure 20 bar in the return! A steel spring housing is available, required when pressure surges (> 20 bar) might occur in the return, e.g. as result of decompression surges induced by accumulating consumers. Indicate in uncoded text „with steel spring housing“ added to the order coding.

2) The relieve port L should be routed pressurless to the tank, mainly used when A and P may be pressurized during operation.

Port P, R, A and L ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

Example: WH 2 J - 1/4 - G 24

WH 1 U - 1/4 - WG 230

G 1/4

G 1/4

G 3/8

Flow pattern symbol H(1), N(1), M(1), R(1)

D 7470 A/1 page 8

4. Unit dimensions All dimensions are in mm and subject to change without notice !

4.1 Single valve (basic version)

4.1.1 Type WN 1 and WH 1

Manual emer-gency stop see below

Plug may be fitted rotated by 3x90°, cable gland

View from below A

Mounting centre pin (see also note in section 5.7)

Connection holes for A, B, P, R, L and accommodation for mounting centre pin

O-ring seal 6x1.5 for connections A, B, P, R, LAlso part of seal kit DS 7470 A-10.

Views from below A: Manual emergency operation:

Type WN 1 D, Q, F and E

Type WN 1 W(X)

Type WH 1 D, Q, F and E

Type WN 1 H, N, M and R WH 1 H, N, M and R

Tool used (max # 4.5 mm) for manual actuation (must not have sharp edges)

For WN 1 type valves (not WH 1) a higher actuation force is necessary if the valve outlet is connected to a pressurized consumer.Symbol D, Q, F, E and J, U, L (always solenoid a).

1) This dimension depends on the manufacturer and can be max. 40 mm acc. to EN 175 301-803 A

2) Blind counterbore with O ring 6x1.5. Serves only to close the compensation hole in the sub-plate (see sect. 3), which is also used for WH 1 type valves. In the case of WH 1 it serves for the volume compensation of the armature cavity (sect. 1).

When sub-plates for 2/2-way WN 1 valves are customer furnished this counterbore is unimportant, as there is no such hole.

3) Inserted screen filter (mesh width 0.25 mm)

Torque 4 Nm

RR

R

28 1)(Type G..)

35 1)(Type WG..)

D 7470 A/1 page 9

Manual emergency stop see section 4.1.1


Assembly centering pin (Also see assembly note in section 5.6)

Type WH 2 D to E Type WH 2 H(1) to R(1)

1) This dimension depends on the manufacturer and may be max. 40 mm acc. to DIN EN 175 301-803 A

4.1.2 Type WH 2

Torque 4 Nm

Manual emergency operation:

Manual emergency stop see below!



Type WH 3 D to E Type WH 3 H(1) to R(1)

4.1.3 Type WH 3

Torque 7.8 Nm

Note:

For routing of gal-leries (ports) within the sub-plate see section 4.1.5 !

Inserted screen filter (#0.9 mm)

Note:

For routing of galler-ies (ports) within the sub-plate see section 4.1.5 !

Actuation force approx. 40 N for pressure 20 bar in R(L)

Inserted screen filter (#0.9 mm)

Sealing of ports via O-rings NBR 90 Sh:

O-ring

A, P and L 6.07x1.78 R 7.65x1.78

Also part of seal kit DS 7470 A-20.

Connection holes for A, P, R, L and accommodation for mounting centre pin

Sealing of ports via O-rings NBR 90 Sh:

O-ringe

A, R and L 7.65x1.78 P 11.1x1.78

Also part of seal kit DS 7470 A-30.

app

rox.

35

app

rox.

35

Tool used (max # 4.5 mm) for manual actua-tion (must not have sharp edges)

28 1)(Type G..)

35 1)(Type WG..)

28 1)(Type G..)

35 1)(Type WG..)

Connection holes for A, P, R, L and accommodation for mounting centre pin

D 7470 A/1 page 10

1) This dimension depends on the manufacturer and may be max. 40 mm acc. to EN 175 301-803 A.

Manual emergency operation:

For manual emergency actuation see below!


Sealing of ports A, R and L = O-ring 11.89x1.78 NBR 90 ShoreP = O-ring 17.12x2.62 NBR 90 ShoreAlso part of seal kit DS 7470 A-40.

Type WH 4 D to E Type WH 4 H to R

4.1.4 Type WH 4

Torque 22 Nm

Holes for A, P, R, L and centering pin

Note:

For routing of galleries (ports) within the sub-plate see section 4.1.5 !

Screen filter(#1.25 filter cap)

Tool used (max #4.5 mm) for manual actuation (must not have sharp edges)

Actuation force approx. 10 N at pressure 20 bar in R(L)


app

rox.

35

D 7470 A/1 page 11

4.1.5 Routing of galleries (ports) within the sub-plate (for type WH 2, WH 3 and WH 4)

Type WH .. D to E Type WH .. H(1) to R(1)

2/2 directional valves may be connected either directly to a pressur-ized pipe (both P and A are pressure resistant) or to a bypass pipe leading directly back to the tank (e.g. depressurizing a consumer, idle pump circulation etc.). Therefore the routing of the galleries in the manifold depends on the intended function.

Valve directly in the pressure pipe (thru-valve)

Both sides A and B are pressure resistant, L pressureless to the tank.

Ongoing pressure gallery

Pressure gallery

Ongoing pressure gallery

By-pass circuitry, A connected to the return gallery.

Rea

min

g d

epth

Both L and outlet A may be joint and led to outlet R(T) within the manifold, which again is routed to the tank. For permissible pressure at L and R, see sect. 2.2.1.

The valve inlet P is protected against coarse contaminations that may occasionally be carried along in the fluid via a screen filter (filter cap), see dimensional drawings in sect. 4.1.2 to 4.1.3. They serve to prevent sudden disturbance caused by coarse contamina-tions that otherwise could get struck at the valve seat. It may be also advantageous to protect port A from coarse contaminations returning from the consumer via screen filters (e.g. type HFC in D 7235) mounted in the customer furnished manifold.The sub-plates for type WN 1, WH 2, and WH 3 are equipped with screen filters as standard (see sect. 5.5).

Lateral P connection (example)

For missing dimensions, see illustration below!

Type D d d1 d2 d3 t t1 t2 t3

WH 2 10H7 7 5 6 3 10 1 13 11

WH 3 15H7 8 6 8 3 8 1.5 20 18

WH 4 22H8 12 10 12 4 16 1.5 34 29

t2 and t3 = min. dimension

D 7470 A/1 page 12

4.2 Individual valves with connection sub-plates

Valves acc. to section 3. Only the connection sub-plate dimensions are illustrated. For missing dimensions of the directly mounted valves, see section 4.1.

Type WN(H) 1 D (Q, F, E) -1/4

Type WN(H) 1 H (N, M, R) -1/4

Type WN(H) 1 H (N, M, R) -1/4 S(SR)Type WH 1 D (Q, F, E) -1/4 L

Type WN(H) 1 D (Q, F, E) -1/4 S

Type WN(H) 1 D (Q, F, E) -1/4 SR

Port A, P and R = G 1/4 (BSPP)

Port A, P, R and L = G 1/4 (BSPP)

Type WN 1 W(X)-1/4Type WN 1 W(X)-1/4 SR

Type WN 1 W(X)-1/4 S

M 5, 6 deep

M 5, 6 deep

M 5, 6 deep

M 5, 6 deep

Port P, R, A and B = G 1/4 (BSPP)

For missing dimen-sions see sect. 4.1.1!

For missing dimensions see sect. 4.1.1!

For missing dimensions see sect. 4.1.1!

For missing dimen-sions see sect. 4.1.1!

4.2.1 Type WN 1 and WH 1

D 7470 A/1 page 13

Type WN(H) 1 J-1/4

WN(H) 1 U-1/4M 5, 6 deep

M 5, 6 deep M 5, 6 deep

Can be fitted rotated by 90°

Port P, A and R = G 1/4 (BSPP)For missing dimensions, see sect. 4.1.1!

Type WN 1 D(F)-1/4C Type WH 1 D(F)-1/4C

Port P and A = G 1/4 (BSPP)For missing dimensions, see sect. 4.1.1!

Port A, P and L = G 1/4 (BSPP)For missing dimensions, see sect. 4.1.1!

D 7470 A/1 page 14

Port ISO 228/1: A, B, P, R = G 1/4 (BSPP)

Port ISO 228/1: P and R = G 1/4 (BSPP)

M 5, 6 deep

M 5, 6 deep

For missing dimensions, see sect. 4.1.1!


Type WN(H) 1 D -1/4 V

Type WN(H) 1 D -1/4 VR

Type WN(H) 1 .../...-1/4

Type d1 d2 e e1 f g h h1

WH 2.. 17.5 38 18 25 22 M5, 30 14 8 deep

WH 3.. 23.5 50 27.5 27.5 25 M6, 32 12 8 deep

D 7470 A/1 page 15

4.2.2 Type WH 2 ..-1/4 ... and WH 3..-3/8...

llustration shows type WH 2!

Type WH 2 D(F) -1/4

WH 3 D(F) -3/8

Type WH.. D(Q, F, E) -1/4 L (3/8 L)

WH.. H(N, M, R) -1/4 (3/8)

Type WH.. H(N, M, R) -1/4 (3/8) S

WH.. H(N, M, R) -1/4 (3/8) SR

Type WH.. D(F) -1/4 (3/8) SR

Type WH.. D(F) -1/4 (3/8) S

Type WH 2 J -1/4

WH 3 J -3/8

For missing dimensions, see sect. 4.1.2 and 4.1.3!

Type Ports ISO 228/1 (BSPP) A, P and R B B1 B2 B3 H H1

WH 2.. G 1/4 40 50 45 73 30 32

WH 3.. G 3/8 50 63 50 97 35 35

Type a a1 a2 b b1 b2 b3 b4 c

WH 2.. 28 14 28 12 12 34 55 20 20

WH 3.. 36 15 39 11 19 41 73.5 25 29

Type c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 c7 c8 d

WH 2.. 34 68 31 4.5 40 23.5 6 44 18

WH 3.. 29 92 40 5 45 30 7 56 25

For missing dimensions, see sect. 4.1.2 and 4.1.3!

D 7470 A/1 page 16

4.2.3 Type WH 4 ..-1/2

Type WH 4 D(F) -1/2

Type WH 4 D(Q, F, E) -1/2 L

WH 4 H(N, M, R) -1/2


M8, 9 deep

Port ISO 228/1 (BSPP) :A, P and R = G 1/2

D 7470 A/1 page 17

5. Appendix

5.1 2/2-way directional seated valve with pressure limiting valve in the intermediate plate

(only type WN 1 D(F), WH 1 D(F))

5.2 Orifice insert (only type WN 1 and WH 1)

These orifices serve as flow limitation (see |p-Q curves). They should be used, whenever flows higher than Qmax (sect. 2.1) could appear during switching operation PdA(R): Hydraulic accumulators on the pump side (gallery P) or at hydraulic pre-controls of directional spool valves with control oil supply from a main line with large flow.Available for type WN 1 and WH 1, symbols D, F, H, M and W (acc. to table 3).

Avail. versions

Coding #-orifice

B 0,4 0.4 mm 7470 075 AB 0,6 0.6 mm 7470 075 DB 0,7 0.7 mm 7470 075 BB 0,8 0.8 mm 7470 075 EB 1,2 1.2 mm 7470 075 C

Order example: WN 1 H / B 0,7 - G 24 WH 1 H / B 0,4 - 1/4 - WG 230

Flow Q (lpm)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

This intermediate plates, features a pressure limiting valve (tool adjustable), allow compact and easy realization of pressure stage ciruitries at piloting circuits. They are used e.g. with prop. directional spool valves type PSL/PSV (see D 7700 ++) for activating a second pressure stage at the gallery LS. They can be also combined with connection sub-plates (acc. to sect. 3) coding . ..-1/4 or ..-1/4 L as alternative to version ..-1/4 V.

Parameters:

Pressure pmax = 400 barFlow Qmax = 2 lpm

For all other parameters and dimensions, see section 2 and 4!

Order coding for individual valve (example):

WN 1 F/250 - G 24WH 1 D/400 - 1/4 - WG 230

Pressure specification (bar) of the pressure limiting valve

Order coding for intermediate plate as individual element (complete with pressure limiting valve and 4 socket head screws ISO 4762-M4x85-12.9 galvanized):

Intermediate plate 7470 104

Symbol

(shown as type WN 1..)

Coding D Coding F

5.3 Wegesitzventile mit verminderter Schaltleistung

Valves with reduced switching performance may be required, when several valves are connected in parallel or individual valves are connected to a SPS or field bus system. Type WH 1 and WH 2 come with plug M12x1, conforming DESINA.

Order example: WH 1 H - M 24 / 8 W WH 3 N - G 24 / 8 W

Coding M.. / 8 W

Parameters

Basic and size WH 1 WH 2 WH 3

Flow pattern symbols all all H, N

Switching power 8 W 8 W 8 W

Electr. connection M12x1 M12x1 EN 175 301-803 A

Nom. voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC

max. flow 6 l/min 15 l/min 30 l/min

max. operating pressure 400 bar 200 bar 250 bar

For all other parameters and dimensions, see sect. 2 and 4. A combination with connection sub-plates acc. to section 3 is possible.

Dwg-No.

for indiv. orders

D 7470 A/1 page 18

5.7 Rotating the solenoid

When required the solenoid can be rotated on the valve body by another 3x90° in addition to the standard assembly position: The best way is to carefully clamp the valve body in a vice and partly or completely remove the screws from above. Turn the solenoid in the desired position and retighten the screws. In order to pre-vent mounting the valve incorrectly onto the sub-plate (e.g. during replacement, if only the position of the solenoid is considered), a center pin is provided on the underside of the valve, which fits into a hole in the sub-plate.

Solenoid

Visible part of the valve

To prevent sudden disturbance caused by coarse con-taminations that may occasionally be carried along in the oil (such as torn off particles of tubing, packing, scale swarf,) directional seated valves are fitted with screen filter elements with 0.25 mm mesh width in the ports P and A (see sect. 4.1). The directional spool valves (only WN 1) cannot be fitted in the housing with these filter elements for reasons of the ducts’ design but they are less sensitive to the contaminations mentioned above.For further protection, the sub-plates for individual valves (sect. 3) are fitted with fine screen filter discs HFC 1/4F and 3/8 (acc. to D 7235) as standard at A and B. Con-nection blocks without pressure limiting valve also in P. These screen filter elements must not be understood as a replacement for usual hydraulic filters. In practice, however, they provide sufficient protection against mal-functions in small hydraulic systems. The filter elements should be checked first, whenever such malfunctions occur. These filter elements are not explicitly shown in the diagrams, for the sake of simplicity,.

2/2-way valve 3/2-way valve

Individual valves acc. to sect. 2.1

Connec-tion sub-plates acc. to sect. 3

Without pressure limiting valve

With pressure limiting valve

5.6 Screen filter elements installed as standard (only type WN(H) 1, WH 2 and WH 3!)

5.4 Installation instruction

Check valve insert EK 01Only for WN 1 type valves code letter Q and N acc. to sect. 2.1

O-ring 6x1.5 NBR90 Shore

Installation side

Screen filter (section 5.6)

Due to the O-ring’s elasticity it may occur that the check valve may move and protrude a few tenths of a millimetre before being bolted to the sub-plate. If the valve WN 1 is filled with oil (e.g. due to functional test on a test rig previously), tightening of the bolts may cause a compression of the trapped oil due to the check valve being forced in. The resulting pres-sure would exceed the one at which the solenoid is still able to actuate. While tightening, it is therefore advisable to press either the manual emergency actuation (see sect. 4.1.1) or energise the solenoid via the plug. This cannot occur with WH 1 type valves due to the hydraulic relief.

D 7470 A/1 page 19

6. Type overview6.1 Single valve acc. to sect. 2.1:

WN 1 H/200 1 - G 24

Nom. voltage (see sect. 2.2.2)G 12, G 24, WG 110, WG 230 and others.

Additional element (see sect. 2.1 or 5.2)1 Return pressure stop (optional, for 2/2 and 3/2-way functions/B 0,7 Orifice insert #0.7 mm (only with flow pattern D, F, H, M and W)/.. Pressure limiting valve in the intermediate plate, acc. to sect. 5.1 (only flow pattern D and F)

Flow pattern (see sect. 2.1)D, Q, F, E 2/2-way function (seated valve)

H, N, M, R 3/2-way function (seated valve)

W, WX Only type WN 1: 4/2-way function (directional spool valve)

Basic valve type and size (differences see sect. 1)WN 1 WH 1

WH 2 WH 3 WH 4

6.2 Individual valve with connection sub-plate section 3:

WN 1 H 1 - 1/4 SR - G 24 - 200

WH 1 R 1/M - 1/4 - G 24

Nom. voltage (see sect. 2.2.2)G 12, G 24, WG 230 and others

o o

o

o

o o o o

o o o o

o

o o o o o

1 2 3 4Size

o o o o

o o o o

o o o oo o o o o o o

o

o

o o o o

o ooo

o o o oo o o oo o o o o

oo o o o

1 2 3 4Size

Connection sub-plate (additional element)(without) no additional elements in the connection sub-plateL Only with type WH: external leakage connection 2/2-way valves S, SR Pressure limiting valve (tool or manually adjustable) with

pressure specification, connected in parallel to the 3/2- or 4/2-way directional valve (PdR, sect. 3.1 table 4 a)

V, VR Pressure limiting valve (adjustable manually or with tools) con-nected in series behind the directional valve (only flow pattern D and F, sect. 3.1 Table 4 a) mit Druckangabe

C bypass check valve (sect. 3.1 Table 4 a)

Connection sub-plate (ports, ISO 228/1 (BSPP))-1/4 G 1/4 -3/8 G 3/8 -1/2 G 1/2

Additional elements (see sect. 2.1 or 5.2)1 Return pressure stop (optional, with 2/2, 3/2, 3/3-way function; see sect. 2.1)/B 0,7 Orifice insert #0.7 mm (only with flow pattern D, F, H, M, W)/.. Pressure limiting valve in the intermediate plate, acc. to sect. 5.1 (only

with flow pattern D and F), e.g. in comb. with connection sub-plate -1/4(L)

Flow pattern (see sect. 2.1)D, Q, F, E 2/2-way function (seated valve)H, N, M, R 3/2-way function (seated valve)W, WX 4/2-way function (directional spool valve)J, U 3/3-way function (combination of two seated valves)L 4/3-way function (combination of two seated valves)M. / R. Double valve, two separately actuatable 3/2-way functions (flow pattern H(1), N(1), M(1), R(1), section 3.2 Table 5 b)

Basic valve type and size. For differences see sect. 1.WN 1 WH 1

WH 2 WH 3 WH 4

2/2-way directional seated valves type EM and EMPfor oil hydraulic systems, zero leakage in blocked state, available as on/off,

soft-shift or proportional valve

D 7490/12/2-way cartridge valve

type EM and EMP

October 2012-02


2.2


Operation pressure pmax = 450 barFlow Qmax = 160 lpm

Cartridge valve(see section 2)

Example: EMP 21 V Cartridge valve with indiv. con-nection block for pipe connec-tion or by means of a banjo bolt (see section 3)

Example: EM 31 V - 3/4 F - G 24

1. General

These 2/2-way directional cone seated valves show zero leakage while in blocked shifting position.The following versions are available:

Basic version

o Directly actuated, two sizes for up to 5 lpm (type EM..D.. and EM..DS..). Application, as piloting or discharge valves for hydraulic consumers, e.g. idle circulation circuit for 2/2-way cartridge valves, 3-way

flow control valves or piloted pressure limiting valves.o Piloted, four sizes for up to 160 lpm.

Basic flow pattern symbol

o Blocked in idle position, opening when energized (NC-characteristic)o Open in idle position, blocking when energized (NO-characteristic)

Switching characteristics

o On/Off, version with defined flow direction (type EM 11 ... EM 41) as well as for arbitrary flow direction (type EM 12 ... EM 42)o Soft-shift, hydraulically dampened shifting „hydraulic ramp“ (type EMP.. VG.. and EMP.. SG..)o Proportional, prop. throttle (type EMP.. V.. and EMP.. S..)

Versions

o Cartridge valve o Cartridge valve with indiv. connection block for direct pipe connection with various additional functions, e.g. drain valve, throttle

valve or as manifold mounting valve o Valve bank – series connection of several valves

The actuation solenoid is a wet armature type, i.e. all moving parts of the valve and the solenoid are lubricated by the hydraulic fluid, the coil cavity is sealed to the outside at the armature tube by means of O-rings. Therefore the solenoid is highly protected against ambient influences e.g. corrosion. The valves are bled automatically during operation.A tapered pin directly opens or closes the valvular passage with the directly actuated type. Whereas a tapered pin opens (NC) or closes (NO) the piloting duct of a stepped piston with the piloted type. Thereby creating an opening (lifting off from the valve seat) or closing force at the opposing cross section and annular areas which open or close the main valvular passage.The solenoid acts either on the tapered pin (directly actuated valves) or on the tapered piloting pin (piloted valves) thereby pulling with NC-valves or pushing with NO-valves and always acting against the spring return.The valve is designed to be self-locking i.e. it is vibration save.There are various passage cross sections available with type EMP.. to enable a customized shifting characteristic.Control of the prop. valve is via a proportional amplifier (see sect. 5.4). The mounting hole is a simple stepped hole where the transition from one to the next diameter shows a chamfer of 118° (std. point angle of drills). All valve versions of identical size (ON/OFF, soft-shift or prop.) do share the same mounting hole pattern - only exception are non-piloted valves.

D 7490/1 page 2

2. Available versions, main data2.1 Directional seated valves, ON/OFF-characteristic

Order example: EM 21 S - AMP 24 - M

EM 32 V - 3/4 F - G 24 - AT

Basic type

EM 11 D

EM 11 D 0,8

EM 11 D 1,2

EM 21 D

EM 11 V

EM 21 V

EM 31 V

EM 41 V

EM 12 V

EM 22 V

EM 32 V

EM 42 V

EM 11 DS

EM 11 DS 0,8

EM 21 DS

EM 11 S

EM 11 ST

EM 21 S

EM 31 S

EM 41 S

EM 12 S

EM 22 S

EM 32 S

EM 42 S

Pressure pmax (bar)

450 150 60 400

400 400 400 350

400 400 400 350

450 150 400

400 400 400 400 350

400 400 400 350

Flow Qmax approx. (lpm)

1 2.5 5 3

20 40 80 160

20 40 80 160

1 2.5 3

20 20 40 80 160

20 40 80 160

Flow direction

A d BB d A = inadmissible

Non-piloted

o For piloting applications

A d BB d A = Free flow, solenoid must be deenergized

Piloted

Piloted Any

Any


Non-piloted

o For piloting applications


Piloted

o With manual emer-gency actuation (not detailed)

o Type .ST with actuation button, see sect. 3.1

Symbol NoteBasic symbol

NC-valve

NO-valve

Note: Max. permissible pressure only with manifolds made of steel. Observe the reduced strength of the thread for other materials e.g. cast iron, light alloy!

Table 1a: Function lock (e.g. for emergency- or initial operation)

Note: Only available with type EM 11 DS, EM 21 DS, EM 1. S and EM 2 S!

Coding Description

(without) No function lock (std.) but incl. manual emergency actuation

M Winged nut (fixed laterally via lead seal)

Function lock, see table 1a

Seal spec., see table 5

Actuation solenoid, see table 4

Indiv. connection block, see sect. 2.4Table 1: Basic type, ON/OFF

D 7490/1 page 3

Piloted


o Type .SG 10(20) with customized throttling characte-ristic, see sect. 3.1

Piloted


o Type .S 10(20) with customized thrott-ling characteristic, see sect. 3.1

2.2 Directional seated valves, soft-shift

Application: For delayed activation and deactivation of consumers, e.g. for preventing pressure surges

Order example: EMP 21 VG 10 - WG 230

EMP 31 SG - 3/4 - G 24

Basic type

EMP 21 VG

EMP 21 VG 10

EMP 21 VG 20

EMP 31 VG

EMP 41 VG

EMP 21 SG

EMP 21 SG 10

EMP 21 SG 20

EMP 31 SG

400 400 400

400 350

400 400 400 350

40 40 40

80 160

40 40 40 80

Flow direction


Piloted

o Type .VG 10(20) with customized throttling characte-ristic (see |p-Q-curve in sect. 3.1)


Symbol NoteBasic symbol

NC-valve

NO-valve

Note: Max. permissible pressure only with manifolds made of steel. Observe the reduced strength of the thread for other materials e.g. cast iron, light alloy.

Note: Max. permissible pressure only with manifolds made of steel. Observe the reduced strength of the thread for other materials e.g. cast iron, light alloy.

A proportional amplifier is mandatory for this valve type. For recommended components, see sect. 5.4.

Actuation solenoid, table 4

Connection blocks, sect. 2.4Table 2: Basic type, soft-shift


Pressure pmax (bar)

2.3 Prop. directional seated valves, prop. throttle valves

Order example: EMP 21 S 20 - AMP 24 - M

EMP 31 V - 1/4 - G 24

Basic type

EMP 21 V

EMP 21 V 10

EMP 21 V 20

EMP 31 V

EMP 31 V 80

EMP 41 V

EMP 21 S

EMP 21 S 10

EMP 21 S 20

EMP 31 S

Pressure pmax (bar)

400 400 400 400 400 400 350

400 400 400 400


40 40 40 80 80 80 160

40 40 40 80

Flow direction

Piloted

o Type ..V 10(20,70,80) with customized throttling characteri-stic (see |p-Q-curve in sect. 3.1)



Symbol NoteBasic

NC-valve

NO-valve

Actuation solenoid, table 4

Connection blocks, sect. 2.4Table 3: Basic type, prop.

D 7490/1 page 4

Table 4: Actuation solenoid

Note: o The specified protection class is only valid when the plug is properly mounted. o Type EMP... only 12V DC and 24V DC

Connection pattern

Coding Note

(without) Standard, fluid seals made of NBR or AU, e.g. suited for mineral oil and synth. Ester HEES

PYD Fluid seals made of FKM

AT Fluid seals made of EPDM, e.g. suited for glycol based brake fluid (DOT4)

Table 5: Seal specification, for fluid exposed seals

Coding and nom. voltage 12 V DC 24 V DC 48 V DC 110 V 230 V 50/60 HZ 50/60 Hz

Basic valve type EM 1

EM 2

EM 3

EMP 2

EMP 3

EM 4

EMP 4

Protection class (IEC 60529)

Electrical connection

G 12 G 24 G 48 WG 110 WG 230

X 12 X 24 X 48 X 98 X 205

L 12 L 24 -- -- --

AMP 12 AMP 24 AMP 48 -- --

DT 12 DT 24 -- -- --

K 12 K 24 -- -- --

S 12 S 24 -- -- --

-- M 24 -- -- --

-- F 24 -- -- --

-- ITT 24 -- -- --

-- DTL 24 -- -- --

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

IP 65

(IP 65)

IP 65

IP 65

IP 67

IP 67

IP 67

IP 67

(IP 67)

IP 67

IP 67

DIN EN 175 301-803 A with plug

DIN EN 175 301-803 A without plug

DIN EN 175 301-803 A with LED-plug

Co. AMP Junior Timer

Co. DEUTSCH (DT 04-2P)

Co. KOSTAL

Co. SCHLEMMER (Bajonett PA 6)

M12x1

With lead ends

MIL-VG 95234

MIL-DTL-38999 series III

G .., X .., L .. AMP .. K .. S ..

M .. F .. ITT .. DTL ..

DT ..

D 7490/1 page 5

2.4 Indiv. connection blocks Suited for direct pipe connection of manifold mounting

2.4.1 Indiv. connection blocks without and with drain valve

Order example: EMP 21 S - 1/4 - G 24

Actuation solenoid, table 4Basic type acc. to table 1, 2, 3

Table 6a: Indiv. connection blocks

Description Ports A, B (BSPP)

EM 11 D

EM 11 DS

EM 1. V

EM 1. S

EM 21 D

EM 21 DS

Basic types EM. 2. V

EM. 2. S

EM. 3. V

EM. 3. S

EM. 4. V

EM. 4. S

Coding

For pipe

connection

For pipe

connection with

(accumulator)

discharge valve

For pipe connec-

tion with manual

bypass valve

For manifold

mounting

o

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 3/4

G 1

1 5/16-12UN-2B

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 3/4

G 1

G 3/8

--

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

1/4

3/8

1/2

3/4

1

1 5/16-12 UN

1/4 A

3/8 A

1/2 A

3/4 A

1 A

3/8 N 0,8

3/8 N 1,5

P

Coding3/8 N 0,8

3/8 N 1,5

CodingP

Coding1/4 A

3/8 A

1/2 A

3/4 A

1 A

Coding1/4

3/8

1/2

3/4

Coding 1 5/16-12UN

Below symbols are only exemplary and have to be completed with the flow pattern symbols, see table 1, 2, 3

Symbols

Orifice 0.8 mm or 1.5 mm

D 7490/1 page 6

Symbol

Symbols to be completed by the flow pattern symbol acc. to sect. 2.1

Coding ..F

Coding ..D

Coding ..DG

Coding ..SJ

Coding ..F - SB

1

2.5 ... 4

16 ... 21

SB 1

SB 2

3

4 ... 6.3

21 ... 28

5

6.3 ... 10

28 ... 37

7

10 ... 16

37 ... 50

9

16 ... 25

50 ... 57

90

25 ... 35

---

Desired flow rate setting acc. to the selected flow rate coding. Flow rate from ... to ... (lpm)

EM 21V - 1/2 F - K 12

EM 11S - 3/8 F - SB15H - 6,3 - G 24

Order example:

Basic type acc. to table 1, 2, 3

2.4.2 Connection block with additional functions

Table 6b: Indiv. connection blocks

EM 11S - 3/8 DG 35 - G 24

EM 11V - 1/4 D - K 12

Coding Description Tapped ports con-forming ISO 228/1(BSPP)A, F B

Basic type

EM 1. V EM. 2. V EM. 3. V EM 1. S EM. 2. S EM. 3. S

3/8 F

16 F

1/2 F

3/4 F

3/8 F - SB 1 . H -..

1/2 F - SB 2 . H -..

1/4 D

3/8 D

3/8 DG ..

3/8 SJ 0. C..

Banjo bolt version with (accumulator)discharge valve

Banjo bolt version with (accumulator) discharge valve and drop-rate braking valve acc. to D 6920 Note: pmax = 315 bar

With bypass throttle

With pressure switchacc. to D 5440

G 3/8

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 3/4

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 3/8 A

M16x1.5

G 1/2 A

G 3/4 A

G 3/8 A

G 1/2 A

o

o - -

- -

- -o

- - o

- -

33

200 ... 700

34

100 ... 400

35

20 ... 250

36

4 ... 12

364

4 ... 50

365

12 ... 170

G 1/4 G 1/4

G 3/8 G 3/8

G 3/8 G 3/8

o - -

With load independent flow limitation B d F via flow control valve type SJ acc. to D 7395. Note: pmax = 315 bar

G 3/8 G 3/8 - o -

- -o

o - -

o

-- o

Pressure range coding. Pressure range from ... to ... (bar)

1

1.0 ... 1.6

3

1.6 ... 2.5

5

2.5 ... 4.0

7

4.0 ... 6.4

9

6.4 ... 10.0

90

10.0 ... 15.0

Desired flow setting acc. to the selected flow range coding. Flow range from ... to ... (lpm)

D 7490/1 page 7

2.5 Valve combinations 2.5.1 Valve banks type BEM

Order example: BEM 11 - SS - 1/4 - G 12 BEM 11 - SS/SS/S - 1/4 - G 24

Actuation solenoid Note: Only available are actuations for 12 or 24 V DC,

type G..., X..., L... (see table 4)!

Basic type and sizeQmax = 20 lpmpmax = 400 bar

Table 7: Valve sections (max. 10 valve sections can be combined)

Note: The solenoid coils utilized are not standard as they show a flat side (see also sect. 5.3)

Coding Description

SS, VV, SV, VS Double valve, (port A = first letter, port B = second letter) S = NO-valve type EM 11 S V = NC-valve type EM 11 V

S, V Indiv. valve (B-side is blocked)

Ports A, B, R = G 1/4 (BSPP)

2.5.2 Valve bank type BEMD 21

Application: Various different pressure stages can be arbitrarily activated as over-load protection e.g. for the changing operation conditions of cranes

Symbols

Order example: BEMD 21 - DS 80/DS 140/DS 180 - G 24

Actuation solenoid table 4

Pressure setting per valve sectionBasic type Qmax = 3 lpmpmax = 400 bar

Symbol

Table 8: Valve sections (max. 10 valve sections can be combined)

Coding Description

D NC-valve, type EM 21 D

DS NO-valve, type EM 21 DS

D 7490/1 page 8

3. Further parameters3.1 General and hydraulic data (type EM.. and EMP..)

Nomenclature and design 2/2-way solenoid actuated seated valve (cone seated design)

Installed position Arbitrary

Operation pressure pmax = 450 bar (see restrictions in sect. 2.1); With type EM..V: pmin = 2 bar

Perm. flow Depending on type (section 2.)

Pressure fluid Standard (without coding acc. to table 5), hydraulic fluid (DIN 51524 table 1 to 3); ISO VG 10 to 68 acc. to (DIN 51519). The compatibility with the seal material has to be checked, when other pressure fluid types are intended (see table 5)!

Viscosity range min. 4; max. 1500 mm2/s; optimal operation range: 10...300 mm2/s Also suitable are biodegradable pressure fluids of the type HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES (synth. Ester) at operation temperatures up to +70°C. HETG (seed oil) is not suited.

Not suited for water based pressure fluids and see oil (HETG).

Temperatures Ambient: -40...+80°C Fluid: -25...+80°C, pay attention to the viscosity range! Start temperature down to -40°C are allowable (Pay attention to the viscosity range during start-up!),

as long as the operation temperature during consequent running is at least 20K (Kelvin) higher. Biodegradable pressure fluids: Pay attention to manufacturer‘s information. With regard to the

compatibility with sealing materials do not exceed +70°C. Attention: Observe the restrictions regarding the max. permissible operation of the solenoid

specified in sect. 3.2 !

Mass (weight) Cartridge valves

EM 1 0.3 kg

EM 2, EMP 2 0.35 kg

EM 3, EMP 3 0.4 kg

EM 4 0.6 kg EMP 4 0.7 kg

Indiv. connection blocks, see sect. 4.3 Valve banks, see sect. 4.4

|p-Q-curves

Fluid viscosity during measure-ment 60 mm2/s

AdB EM(P)...V energized solenoid

EM11D(S)..; EM21D(S); EM(P)...S deenergized solenoid

1) Only with EM...V: Free flow BdA, only while

solenoid is deenergized

2) Applies also to type EMP.. VG..(SG..)

Non illustrated flow direc-tions are like type EM.. of similar size

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)B

ack

pre

ssure

|p

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)B

ack

pre

ssu

re |

p (b

ar)

Flow Q (lpm)




D 7490/1 page 9

3.2 Electrical data (type EM.. and EMP..)

Protection class

Connector and connection

Switching time approx. ms

Switchings / h

Insulation material class

EM..S: On 150 EM..V: On 50 Off 50 Off 150The switching times with version WG.. are 2 to 3 times andwith type EMP.. VG.. and EMP.. SG.. 5 to 10 times longer

approx. 2000 (rather even distributed)

F; Contact temperature approx. 85 ... 95°C (solenoid housing) with an ambient temperature of 20°C.Classification F permits a max. winding temperature of approx. 150°C; This won‘t be exceeded if the guideline figures for %ED are observed during operation. The thermal load of the coil may be reduced when an economy circuit is employed (see sect. 5.4).

Depending on actuation solenoid, see table 4


DC-voltage AC-voltage G .. DT .. L.. WG 110..

X .. K ..

S ..

AMP..

F ..

M.. ITT..

DTL..

Relative duty cycle: 100% ED (Specification on the solenoid)

Reference value and restriction in the operation

Required connectors

Coding K.. 03888005 Co. KOSTAL

Coding S..Taper with quarter-turn 10 SL Co. SCHLEMMER

Coding AMP.. Co. AMP Junior 2-pole, Coding 1

Coding G.., X.., L.. DIN EN 175 301-803 A

Coding F.. Lead length approx. 600 mm

Cut-off energy

Dither frequencyfor type EMP..V(S)

Guideline for max: approx. < 10 Ws + approx. 10% when measuring at UN

50 ...150 Hz

Ambient temperature U °C

Nom. voltage UN 12 V DC 24 V DC 98 V DC 205 V DC

Nom. power PN EM 1.., EM 2.., EM 3.. 21 W 21 W 21 W 21 W EMP 2.., EMP 3.., EM 4.. 32 W 32 W 32 W 32 W EMP 4.. 30 W 30 W

Nom. current IN EM 1.., EM 2.., EM 3.. 1.75 A 0.89 A 0.2 A 0.1 A EMP 2.., EMP 3.., EM 4.. 2.67 A 1.33 A 0.3 A 0.15 A EMP 4.. 2.5 A 1.25 A

Max. current Ilim. EM 1.., EM 2.., EM 3.. 1.23 A 0.62 A -- -- EMP 2.., EMP 3.., EM 4.. 1.87 A 0.93 A -- -- EMP 4.. 1.75 A 0.88 A -- --

%E

D S

3-5

min

D 7490/1 page 10

Flow Q (lpm)

Flow Q (lpm)

Flow Q (lpm)

Flow Q (lpm)

Co

ntr

ol c

urr

ent

(A)

Co

ntr

ol c

urr

ent

(A)

Co

ntr

ol c

urr

ent

(A)

Co

ntr

ol c

urr

ent

(A)

24 V DC12 V DC

24 V DC12 V DC24 V DC12 V DC

Flow Q (lpm)

Co

ntr

ol c

urr

ent

(A)

12 V DC 24 V DC

24 V DC12 V DC

Curve a: Load pressure p = 50 bar;Curve b: Load pressure p = 200 bar

I-Q-curve

D 7490/1 page 11

4. Unit dimensions All dimensions in mm, subject to change without notice

4.1 Valve and actuation solenoid

Coding G.., WG.., X.., L.. Type EM 11 ST stop coding

Actuation solenoid

Coding AMP.. Coding K..

Plug may be installed rotated by 4x90°

Manual emergency actuation with EM(P)...S

Actuation forceat pressure 100 barat A = approx. 70 N

Function lock coding M Winged nut is laterally fixed at a/f 2, when delivered from HAWE

Type a/f 2 (Nm)

EM 1.. 12 30EM 2.. 12 30EM 3.. 12 60EM 4.. 14 90EMP 2.. 14 30EMP 3.. 14 60EMP 4.. 14 90

1)

1) This dimension depends on the manufacturer (of the plug) and may be up to 40 mm acc. to DIN EN 175 301-803!

Type EM 1 EM 4 EMP 4 EM 2 EMP 2 EM 3 EMP 3

a 36.5 --- ”37

a1 --- 37.5 -

b 12 15 18.3

c 22 25 28

d #36.5 #38.5 ”37

e Version G: 28 1) WG: 34.5 1) L: 40

a/f 2

a/f

2

app

rox.

25

D 7490/1 page 12

Coding ITT..

DTL..

Coding F..

Coding S.. Coding M..

approx. 600 mm

Type EM 1 EM 2

d #37

Type EM 1 EM 4 EMP 4 EM 2 EMP 2 EM 3 EMP 3

d #36,5 #38,5 ”37

d (DT) #36,5 #39

Coding DT..

D 7490/1 page 13

Type EM 2. V, EM 2. S

EMP 21 VG, EMP 21 SG

EMP 21 V.., EMP 21 S..

Mounting hole:

4.2 Screwed-in section of the valve

Type EM 21 D, EM 21DS

Mounting hole:

1) Detail “X” see page 14

1)

1)


Mounting hole:

1)

Type EM 11 D, EM 11 DS

EM 11 D 0,8, EM 11 DS 0,8

Mounting hole:

1)

Reaming depth 4.5 Reaming depth 4.5

Reaming depth 4.5Reaming depth 4.5

D 7490/1 page 14

Mounting hole:


EMP 41 V..


EMP 31 VG, EMP 31 SG

EMP 31 V.., EMP 31 S..

Mounting hole:

Detail X M 2:1

Type

EM 11(12)

EM(P) 21(22)

EM(P) 31(32)

EM(P) 41(42)

#dH8

15

19

29

35

#d1

14.75

18.75

28.75

34.75

a+0.3

5

5

5.5

5.5

Attention:

The angularity of the 118° chamfer of the stepped bore are tolerated with reference to the reamed core diameter #dH8 (reaming depth). The stated tolerance must be observed. Also see section 5.1!

Reaming depth 5

Reference ball #24

Reference ball #30

Reaming #

Drilling #

Rea

mer

cham

bfe

r

Reaming depth 5

D 7490/1 page 15

Coding

- 1/4

- 1/4

- 3/8

- 1/4

- 3/8

- 1/2

- 1/2

- 3/4

- 3/4

- 1

- 1 5/16-12 UN

- 1/4 A

- 3/8 A

- 3/8 A

- 1/2 A

- 1/2 A

- 3/4 A

- 3/4 A

- 1 A

- 3/8 N 0,8

- 3/8 N 1,5

P

4.3 Connection blocks

Note regarding the provision for mounting (dimension f): #.. -thru-hole, thread M.. on both sides (exception -3/8 N.. only rear side)

Port A and B ISO 228/1(BSPP)

G 1/4

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 1/2

G 3/4

G 3/4

G 1

- 1 5/16-12 UN-2B

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 3/8

G 1/2

G 1/2

G 3/4

G 3/4

G 1

G 3/8

--

L

35

35

40

45

45

50

55

60

65

70

81

40

45

45

50

56

60

65

70

50

--

B

20

20

25

30

30

30

40

40

40

50

51

20

25

30

30

40

40

40

50

40

--

H

40

40

40

50

50

50

60

60

70

70

85

45

45

50

50

60

60

70

70

50

--

a

14.5

16

16

13

18

18

20

20

25

25

25

13

13

14

14

20

20

25

25

18

--

b

10

10

15

14

14

14

20

20

22

22

28

10

15

14

14

20

20

22

22

14

--

c

25

25

32

30

30

32

37

40

50

55

63

35

40

28

31

34

40

41

47

25

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

27

33

33

36

42

46

49

52

--

--

e

30

30

32

35

35

35

38

40

55

55

60

25

27

32

32

36

40

45

50

--

--

f

#6.5

#6.5

#6.5

#8.5

#8.5

#8.5

#10.5

#10.5

#12.5

#12.5

M12, 12 deep

#6.3

#6.3

M8, 8 deep

M8, 8 deep

M10, 10 deep

M10, 10 deep

M12, 12 deep

M12, 12 deep

M8, 10 deep

--

Order No.Connection block wit-hout valve

7490 013

7490 010

7490 011

7902 310

7491 012

7491 013

7590 011

7590 012

7591 011

7591 012

7591 018

7490 038

7490 039

7491 015

7491 016

7590 015

7590 016

7591 015

7591 016

7902 150

7902 3607903 140B

Mass(weight)approx.(kg)

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.45

0.35

0.35

0.45

0.45

0.6

0.6

0.7

0.3

0.3

0.4

0.4

0.5

0.5

0.6

0.6

0.4

0.30.6

Main dimensions (mm)

Coding

-1/4

-3/8

-1/2

-3/4

-1

-1 5/16-12 UN

Coding

-1/4 A

-3/8 A

-1/2 A

-3/4 A

-1 A

Coding

-3/8 N 0,8

-3/8 N 1,5

c1

Drain screw a/f 5

Drain (push-button red galvanized)

1) only coding -1 5/16-12 UN M = 7/16-20 UNF-2B

1)

Basic type acc.to sect. 2

EM 11 D..EM 11 DS..

EM 1. V(S)

EM 21 D(DS)

EM 2. V(S)EMP 2. V.(S.)

EM 3. V(S)EMP 3. V.(S.)

EM 4. V(S)EMP 4. V.(S.)

EM 1. V(S)

EM 2. V..(S..)EMP 2. V..(S..)

EM 3. V..(S..)EMP 3. V..(S..)

EM 4. V(S)

EM 2. V..(S..)EMP 2. V..(S..)

EM 21 D(DS) - PEM(P) 3. - P

D 7490/1 page 16

Type EM 21 D - P

EM 21 DS - P

Type EM 3. - P

EMP 3. - P

Type EM 1. - .F

EM 2. - .F

EM 3. - .F

EMP 2. - .F

EMP 3. - .F

Type EM 1. - .F - SB 1. H

EM 2. - .F - SB 2. H

EMP 2. - .F - SB 2. H

Seal ring (see sect. 5.3)

a/f (banjo bolt) Can be mounted on both sides with - 3/4 F

Drain screw a/f 5

a/f(drop-rate braking valve cartridge acc. to D 6920)

Respec-tively 360° rotatable

EM(P) 3.: - 3/4 F

EM(P) 2.. - 1/2 F

EM(P) 2.. - 1/2 F-SB2.. G 1/2 A G 1/2 52 50 30 30 20.7 4.5 2.6 26.9 15 15 14 35 15 30 229.512.5 30

1.31.4

G 3/4 A G 3/4 70 60 -- 40 19.5 5 -- 36 20 20 20 50 18 40 20 10 36 1.7

EM 1.. - 16 F

EM 1.. - 3/8 F

EM 1.. - 3/8 F - SB1..

A

G 3/8 A

B

G 3/8

45M16x1.5 G 3/8

B

45

40

H

40

24

D

24

25

a

25

15

b

15

3

c

3

2.1

c1

2.1

21.9

d

21.9

12.5

e

12.5

15.5

e1

15.5

12

e2

12

30

f

30

12.5

h1

12.5

27

h2

27

18

g

18

7.5

m

7.511

24

a/f

24

1.0

Mass(weight)approx. (kg)

1.01.0

PortsISO 228/1 (BSPP)

DimensionsType

max

. 120

M = G 1/4

M6x55 ISO 4762

M4x35 ISO 4762

D 7490/1 page 17

Type EM 1.. - 1/4 D

EM 2.. - 3/8 D

EMP 2.. - 3/8 D

EM 1.. - 1/4 D

EM 2.. - 3/8 D

EMP 2.. - 3/8 D

Type

25

55

B

47

62

H

12

13.5

a

23

34

b

21.5

27

h

2

3

s Mass (weight)approx. (kg)

0.7

0.9

Type EM 2.. - 3/8 - SJ 0..

EMP 2.. - 3/8 - SJ 0..

Mass (weight) = approx. 0.9 kg

Type EM 1.. - 3/8 DG

Mass (weight) = approx. 0.9 kg

For missing specifications see D 5440 (DG 3..)

Plug may be installed rotated by 4 x 90°

app

rox.

37

app

rox.

71

s

D 7490/1 page 18

4.4 Valve combination

Type BEM 11

1)

M8, 10 deep

M6, 10 deep

a/f 12

approx. 5

approx. 10

app

rox.

66

approx. 10

Type BEMD 21

D 7490/1 page 19

The angularity of the 118° chamfer of the stepped bore tolerance is in reference to the reamed core diameter #dH8 (reaming depth). The stated tolerance must be observed. Also see section 4.2!This enables a max. edge force on the facial area of the tapped journal when the valve is screwed in with the correct torque and it also prevents distortion of functional valve parts which might cause malfunction (sticking).The correct angular orientation may be checked when the valve is installed the first time and can be remachined in case of minor deviation.

1. Screw in the valve and tighten steadily with the correct torque (see sect. 4.1).

2. Remove the valve again and check whether the journal of the valve a has produced an annular impact b at the chamfer of the stepped bore. When this impact is even everything is correct and the valve can be reinstalled as described above.

3. When the annular impact is not evenly distributed over its length or not complete the valve should be reinstalled but with up to 120% of the specified torque (see sect. 2.3.1). Remove the valve and check the annular impact again whether it is correct now (see above); It will be so in most cases and the valve can be reinstalled with the torque specified in sect. 2.

If it is still not correct after above procedure it will be necessary to remachine the bore.

5. Appendix5.1 Notes for initial operation

5.2 Tapped plugs

Type

EM 1... V(S)

EM 11 D(DS)

EM(P) 2... V(S)

EM 21 D(DS)

EM(P) 3...

EM(P) 4...

Tapped plug 1)

7490 105 b

7490 105 b

7491 105 b

7491 105 b

7590 105 b

7904 019

Tapped blockage 1)plug

7490 105 a

7490 105 c

7491 105 a

7902 315 a

7590 105 a

7904 018

a/f Torque (Nm)

6 30

6 30

8 30

8 30

12 40

14 60

Seal ring ;P5001 94*5 Shore

10.3x2.4

10.3x2.4

14.03x2.61

14.03x2.61

21x3.53

28.17x3.53

Seal ring <HNBR 90 Sh

7.65x1.78

7.65x1.78

12.42x1.78

12.42x1.78

18.72x2.62

25.07x2.62

Mounting holes in the manifold may be blocked if required by tapped plugs e.g. if uniform manufactured manifolds should be equipped with or without cartridge valves depending on application.

Passage open

Tapped plug

Passage blocked

Tapped blockage pluga/f

1) Complete with seal ring

Dimensions of the mounting holes acc. to sect. 2.3.2 !

Seal ring ; Seal ring ;

Seal ring <

a/f

D 7490/1 page 20

5.3 Seal kit

Plug coding/coding Order coding

G.. : MSD 3-309

L.. : SVS 3129020

L5K L5K

L10K L10K

WG.. : MSD 4-209 P 10

Seal kit:

Order coding

DS 7490-11

DS 7490-21

DS 7490-21P

DS 7490-31

DS 7490-31P

DS 7490-41

Type

EM 11(12)..

EM 21(22)..

EMP 21..

EM 31(32)..

EMP 31..

EM(P) 41(42)..

Seals for connection blocks with banjo bolt (acc. to sect. 2.4.2)

Order coding

KDS 16 A 3 C

KDS 22 A 3 C

7590 018

For valve type

EM 1... - F..

EM(P) 2... - F..

EM(P) 3... - F..

Recommended prop. amplifier for type EMP.. V(S): EV 22 K 2-12/24 (card) acc. to D 7817/1

EV 1 G 1-12/24 (module with housing) acc. to D 7837

EV 1 M 2-12/24 (module) acc. to D 7831/1

EV 1 D (module) acc. to D 7831 D

Plugs with clamp diode MSD 3-209 C 1 150 V DC acc. to D 7163

Plugs with LED and protective MSE 28026 24 V DC acc. to D 7832

circuitry SVS 3129020 24 V DC acc. to D 7163

Additional plugs available

Economy circuit plugs MSD 4 P 55 24 V DC acc. to D 7833

MSD 4 P 53 230 V DC acc. to D 7813

MSD 4 P 63 115 V DC acc. to D 7813

5.4 Additional components

These components have to be ordered separately!

Directional spool valves type HSF

manifold mounting, eIectro-hydraulicaIIy actuated for oil-hydraulic systems

D 7493 EDirectional spool valves HSF



2.1


Flow Qmax = 80 and 160 lpm

1. General

2. Types available, main data

This pamphlet is a supplement to D 7493 covering the directionalspool valve banks type HSR. The individual valves for manifoldmounting described here share the same functional principle, directional seated pilot valves and optional thread-type throttlesfor switching time adjustment, as outlined in the basic pamphlet D 7493. The switching time adjustment is detailed also there. Therequired manifolds are customer furnished, as they are not avail-able from HAWE. Important: The valve has two outlet ports R (see dimensionalsketches). Both must be connected at the manifold, but may beinternally joined there.

Order example: HSF 3 G - G 24


Table 2: Symbols

Table 3: Pilot valve

Standard, Without With plug with plug plug featuring LED’s Nom. voltage

G 12 X 12 L 12 12V DC

G 24 X 24 L 24 24V DC

G 98 X 98 --- 98V DC

G 205 X 205 --- 205V DC

WG 110 --- --- 110V AC

WG 230 --- --- 230V AC50 /60 Hz

Without pilotvalve, forhydraulic remote control

X

See section 5.1

Solenoid actuated via pilot valve type WN 1H (for missing data, see D 7470 A/1)

Coding

Nominal size appr.

Flow Qmax (lpm)

Pressure pmax (bar)

Attention: When several valves are con-nected in series, note that when the H(1)and F(1) valves are in their zero position,outlets connected to R are pressurizedwhen a downstream valve is operated.

HSF 3 HSF 4

NG 12 NG 16

80 160

400

Valve with blocked middle position,suitable for connection in parallel

Valve with middle position P→ R (circulation),suitable for connection in series

G D E C W B L H F

G 1 D 1 E 1 C 1 W 1 B 1 L 1 H 1 F 1

Switchingtime adjustment

SimpIifiedsymbol 2)

without

with 1)

Without pilot valve, for hydraulic remote control With switchingtime adjustmentG 1 to F 1

Without pilot valve...G (D, E, C, ...W - XL, H, F) - X (..B - X analog.)G, D, E, C, L, H, F W B

1) Thread type throttle, see dimensionaldrawings.

2) For detailed symbols e.g. to ease understanding of the function, see appendix in sect. 5 ++.

D 7493 E page 2

3. General parameter

Type and version Directional spool valve, full steel design. Housing zinc galvanized, giving a good resistance to corrosion.Valve spools hardened, ground and polished/deburred. Together with the diamond-honed and polished and deburred housing bore, this gives an exactly circular and even sealing gap with a minimum leakage rate. BuiIt-on directional ball seated valves type WN 1H acc. to D 7470 A/1 as pilot valves


Line connection Via manifold, customer-furnished, as not available from HAWE

Port coding P = Pump inlet R = Return. Important: 2 ports! (exception coding C, see section 5.1)A, B = ConsumersZ = Control oil inletX = Control oil outlet (tank) Control oil outlet (tank) for version with solenoid actuation

= Control oil inlet for version X with hydraulic remote control (table 3) at position a with 4/3-way directional spool valves (see sect. 5.1)

Overlapping Zero

Switching time Without switching time adjustment (not throttled) (guideline figures) HSF 3: ton = 30...40 ms; toff = 70...100 ms

HSF 4: ton = 50...60 ms; toff = 110...140 ms

Mass (weight) HSF 3 = 2,8 kgHSF 4 = 5 kg

Flow HSF 3 = 80 lpmHSF 4 = 160 lpm

Pressure P, A, B, and R = 400 bar; Z and X = 160 bar

Control pressure Max. 160 bar, min. 10 bar; optimum operation at 15... 40 bar, either from own control circuit or viaa pressure control valve ADC 1-25 (e.g. housed in base plate, see circuit examples, section 5.2). Refer to notes on flow diagrams L, F and H in example 3.

Control volume HSF 3 = approx. 1.8 cm3

HSF 4 = approx. 5 cm3

Surface Nitrided

Hydraulic fluid Fluids conf. DIN 51524 table 1 to 3; ISO VG 10 to 68 conf. DIN 51519Viscosity range: min. approx. 4; max. approx. 1500 mm2/secOptimal operation range: approx. 10...500 mm2/secAlso suitable are biologically degradable pressure fluids of the type HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) andHEES (synth. Ester) at operation temperatures up to approx. +70°C.

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40...+80°C Fluid: -25...+80°C, pay attention to the viscosity range! Start temperature down to -40°C are allowable (Pay attention to the viscosity range during start!),as long as the operation temperature during subsequent running is at least 20 K (Kelvin) higher.Biological degradable pressure fluids: Pay attention to manufacturer's information. With regard tothe compatibility with sealing materials do not exceed +70°C.

Pilot valves At 60°C ambient temperature not over 60 % duty cycle, at 80°C not over 35% duty cycle. The heat generation of the solenoid can be decreased by reducing the supply voltage. This gives somesafety marging as a balance for increased ambient temperatures and greater safety under normal conditions at possibily changing ambient temperaturesControl pressure $ 160 bar → Ureduc. = 0.75 Unom, permissible ambient temperature 60°C

Control pressure 35 bar → Ureduc. = 0.5 Unom, permissible ambient temperature 80°C

|p-Q-curves

(Type WN1H acc. to D 7470 A/1)

All flow

directions

Flow Q (lpm)

Bac

kp

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

HSF 3 HSF 4

D 7493 E page 3

4. Unit dimensions

Type HSF 3...

Type HSF 4...

Coding

G, D, E, C, L, H, F

(G1 to F1)

Coding

G, D, E, C, L, H, F

(G1 to F1)

Coding

B (B1) W (W1)

Coding

B (B1) W (W1)

Manual emergencyactuation


Cable gland

Cablegland

Actuation aid(do not useany sharp-edged tools)

Ports Sealing of theflange areavia O-ringNBR 90 Sh

A, B, P, R 13.95x2.62

X, Z 3.7x1.78

Sealing of theflange areavia O-ringNBR 90 Sh

A, B 18.75x2.62

P, R 20.29x2.62

X, Z 3.7x1.78

Hole pattern of

the manifold

(top view)

Hole pattern of

the manifold

(top view)

M12, 12 deep

M8, 10 deep

Screw for switching time adjustmentHexagon head screw a/f 10

Screw for switching time adjustmentAllan head a/f 3

Tapped plug(without switchingtime adjustment)

Tapped plug(without switchingtime adjustment)

1) This dimension is dependingon the manufacturer and maybe up to max. 40 (conf. DIN43650)

2) Not present with codes C, C1

All dimension in mm and subject to change without notice!

Manual emer-

gency actuation

(X,Z)

(X,Z)

2)

2)

Max. torque39 Nm

Max. torque140 Nm

Ports

Ports

D 7493 E page 4

5. Appendix5.1 Detailed flow symbols

Examples not listed should be drawn accordingly. Control port X serves as drain/leakage port to the tank with spools W1 and B1.

Standard versionwith pilot valves

Version ...-X, without pilot valve

To the tank or to port P of a subsequent spool valve coding L, F, or H

In the case of 4/3-way versions with switching time adjustment (e.g. G1,D1 etc.), only the control port Z can be influenced via the throttle screw.In the case of control port X, it is necessary to install a throttle (e.g. FG orFG-S 6 acc. to D 7275) externally into the connected control line. Thesymbol illustration opposite, applies to valve coding G and W and anal-ogously to D, E, C, B, L, H, and F.

5.2 Circuit examples The illustrated manifolds are not scope of delivery!

Example 1:

Most simple control with directional spoolvalves suited for parallel connection. Controloil pick-up and return is internal in the manifold.Permissible pressure is approx.160 bar (seecontrol pressure in sect. 3) and when no pres-sure surges (decompression surges) are ex-pected in the return line.

Example 2:

Same control task as example 1, but with control oil pick-up from a pressure circuit >160 bar. The pressure for the control oil circuit is reduceddown to approx. 30 bar here via pressure reducing valve type ADC1-25screwed into the manifold, see D 7458 for mounting hole deails).It is recommended to to provide an additional gallery for the control oil re-turn (as illustrated), when pressure surges are expected in the main returnline.

$

%

HSF 3 G1-G 24 HSF 3 D1-G 24 HSF 3 G1-WG 230 HSF 3 D1-WG 230

Type DV... - WN 1F-...acc. to D 4350 for idlepump circulation

Pressure reducing valve type ADC 1-25 acc. to D 7458

Example 3:

A direct control oil pick-up from the pumppressure line is not possible in most caseswith flow pattern symbols L, H, and F as theback pressure in idle position does not ex-ceed the minimum control pressure requiredfor switching operations (particularly if there isonly one single valve). It is therefore recom-mended to employ a pump, e.g. type R acc.to D 6010 S feeding a separate control oil cir-cuit (see example). Another way is to use acompletely separate control circuit pump, i.e.gear pump with approx. 0.5...1 lpm, limited toapprox. 20 bar, making an ADC 1-25 super-fluous. Otherwise, pay attention to the sum-mation of the back pressure, particularly whenseveral valves are connected in series.

TypeMVE 6C acc. to D 7000/1

TypeMVE 4Facc. to D 7000/1

Type ADC 1-25acc. to D 7458

Type R 58.6-1.2acc. to D 6010 S

HSF 3L- G 24 HSF 3L- G 24

Directional spool valves type HSLelectro-hydraulic actuation, direct pipe connection

for oil-hydraulic systems

D 7493 LDirectional spool valves HSL

Januar 2003-01© 2003 by HAWE Hydraulik


2.1


Flow Qmax = 80 and 160 lpm

1. General


This pamphlet is a supplement to D 7493 covering the directional spool valvebanks type HSR. The individual valves for direct pipe connection describedhere share the same functional principle, directional seated pilot valves and optional thread-type throttles for switching time adjustment, as outlined in thebasic pamphlet D 7493. The switching time adjustment is detailed also there.

Order example: HSL 3 G - G 24


Table 2: Symbols

Table 3: Pilot valve

50 /60 Hz

Without pilotvalve, forhydraulic remote control

X

Observe notein sect. 5.1 !

Solenoid actuated via pilot valve type WN 1H (for missing data, see D 7470 A/1)

Coding

Ports P, R, A, BISO 228/1 (BSPP)

Flow Qmax

(lpm)

Pressure pmax (bar)

HSL 3 HSL 4

G 1/2 G 3/4

80 160

400

G 12 X 12 L 12 12V DC

G 24 X 24 L 24 24V DC

G 98 X 98 --- 98V DC

G 205 X 205 --- 205V DC

WG 110 --- --- 110V AC

WG 230 --- --- 230V AC

Standard,with plug

Withoutplug

With plugfeaturingLED’s

Nom. voltage

Attention: When several valvesare connected in series, notethat when the H(1) and F(1)valves are in their zero posi-tion, outlets connected to Rare pressurized when a down-stream valve is operated.

Valve with blocked middle position,suitable for connection in parallel

Valve with middle position P→ R (circulation),suitable for connection in series

G D E C W W 2 3) B L H F

G 1 D 1 E 1 C 1 W 1 W 12 3) B 1 L 1 H 1 F 1

Switchingtime adjustment

SimpIifiedsymbol 2)

without

with 1)

Without switching time adjustment With switchingtime adjustmentG 1 to F 1

Without pilot valve...G (D, E, C, ...W - X ...B - X

L, H, F) - XG, D, E, C, L, H, F W B

1) Thread type throttle, see dimensional drawings.2) For detailed symbols i.e. to ease understanding of the function, see appendix in sect. 5 ++.3) Version with detent, only with type HSL 3

Version withdetentW 2, W 12

D 7493 L page 2

3. Further data

Type and version Directional spool valve, full steel designValve spool hardened, ground, polished and deburred. An exactly circular sealing gap with a minimum leakage rate is achieved by the diamond-honed and polish-deburred housing bore.Directional ball seated valves type WN1H acc. to D 7470 A/1 are utilized as pilot valves.


Ports P, R, A, B depending on size; X, Z = G 1/4 ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

Port coding P = Pump inletR = Return Attention: 2 ports! (exception spool C). See sect. 5.1A, B = ConsumerZ = Control oil inletX = Control oil outlet (tank) for version with solenoid actuation

= Control oil inlet for version X with hydraulic remote control (table 3) at position a with 4/3-way directional spool valves (see sect. 5.1)

Overlapping Zero

Switching times Without switching time adjustment (non-throttled)(guide line) HSL 3: ton = 30 ... 40 ms; toff = 70 ... 100 ms

HSL 4: ton = 50 ... 60 ms; toff = 110 ... 140 ms

Necessary pulse duration for sure switching operations with coding W2(12) = approx. 200 ms

Mass (weight) HSL 3 = 2.8 kgHSL 4 = 5 kg

Flow HSL 3 = 80 lpmHSL 4 = 160 lpm

Pressure P, A, B, and R = 400 bar; Z and X = 160 bar

Control pressure max. 160 bar, min. 10 bar; optimum operation range 15 ... 40 bar, either tapped from individual control circuit or via a pressure reducing valve i.e. ADC 1-25 acc. to D 7458. Observe the notes regarding symbols L, F, and H in example 3.

Control volume HSL 3 = approx. 1.8 cm3

HSL 4 = approx. 5 cm3

Surface Gas nitrided

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conf. DIN 51524 part 1 to 3; ISO VG 10 to 68 conf. DIN 51519.Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 1500 mm2/sec;opt. operation approx. 10 ... 500 mm2/sec.Also suitable are biologically degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES(Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70°C.

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80°CFluid: -25 ... +80°C, Note the viscosity range!Permissible temperature during start: -40°C (observe start-viscosity!), as long as the service temperature is at least 20 K (Kelvin) higher for the following operation.Biologically degradable pressure fluids: Observe manufacturer's specifications. By consideration ofthe compatibility with seal material not over +70°C.

Pilot valves Not over 60% duty cycle if the ambient temperature is 60°C and not over 35% duty cycle if the ambient temperature is 80°C.Heat generation of the solenoid can be reduced by reducing the supply voltage.This gives a tem-perature reserve as a balance for increased ambient temperatures and greater safety under normal conditions and if the ambient temperatures are fluctuating.Control pressure $ 160 bar → Ureduc. = 0.75 UNom, permissible ambient temperature 60°C

Control pressure 35 bar → Ureduc. = 0.5 UNom, permissible ambient temperature 80°C

|p-Q-curves (guideline)

(Type WN1H acc. to D 7470 A/1)

All flow

directions

Flow Q (lpm)

Bac

kp

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

HSL 3 HSL 4

D 7493 L page 3

4. Unit dimensions

Type HSL 3...

Coding

G, D, E, C, L, H, F, W2

(G1 to F1, W12)

Coding

B (B1) W (W1) Manual emergencyactuation

Cablegland

Actuation aid(do not useany sharp-edged tools)

Set screw for switch-time adjustment:Allan key 3 mm and spanner a/f 10 forthe lock nut

' Lock nutLoosen the SEAL-Lock nut prior toadjusting the throttle screw to pre-vent damage of the integrated threadseal.

' Blocked with tapped plug M6 forversions without switch-time adjust-ment.

All dimension in mm and subject to change without notice!

Manual emer-

gency actuation

Mountinghole M8,10 deep

Mounting holeM8, 10 deep

D 7493 L page 4

Type HSL 4...

Set screw for switch-time adjustment:Two spanners a/f 10 for hexagon headscrew and lock nut

' Lock nutLoosen the SEAL-Lock nut prior toadjusting the throttle screw to pre-vent damage of the integrated threadseal.

' Blocked with tapped plug M6 for versions without switch-time adjust-ment

Manual emergency

actuation

Actuation aid (do notuse any sharp-edgedtools)

Cable gland




Coding

G, D, E, C, L, H, F, W2

(G1 to F1, W12)

Coding

B (B1) W (W1)

D 7493 L page 5

5. Appendix5.1 Detailed flow illustrated symbols

Examples not listed should be drawn accordingly. Control port X serves as drain/leakage port to the tank with spools W1 and B1.

Standard versions with pilot valves

Version ...-X, without pilot valve

To the tank or to port P of a subsequent spool valve coding L, F, or H

In the case of 4/3-way versions with switching time adjustment (i.e. G1,D1 etc.), only the control port Z can be influenced via the throttle screw.In the case of control port X, it is necessary to install a throttle (i.e. FGor FG-S 6 acc. to D 7275) externally into the connected control line.The symbol illustration opposite, applies to valve coding G and W andanalogously to D, E, C, B, L, H, and F.

5.2 Example circuits

Example 1:

Most simple control with directional spoolvalves suited for parallel connection. Controloil pick-up and return are internal via ports Xand Z. Permissible pressure is approx.160 bar(see control pressure in sect. 3) and when nopressure surges (decompression surges) are ex-pected in the return line.

Example 2:

Same control task as example 1, but with control oil pick-up from a pressure circuit >160 bar. The pressure for the control oil circuit is reduced down to approx. 30 bar here via pressure reducing valve typeADC1-25 acc. to D 7458.It is recommended to to provide an additional line for the control oil return (as illustrated), when pressure surges are expected in the mainreturn line.

Type HSL 3 G1-G 24 Type HSL 3 G1-WG 230

Type DV... - WN 1F-... acc. to D 4350for idle pump circulation

Pressure reducing valve ADC 1-25 acc. to D 7458

Example 3:

A direct control oil pick-up from the pumppressure line is not possible in most caseswith flow pattern symbols L, H, and F as theback pressure in idle position does not exceedthe minimum control pressure required forswitching operations (particularly if there isonly one single valve). It is therefore recom-mended to employ a pump, e.g. type R acc. toD 6010 S feeding a separate control oil circuit(see example). Another way is to use a com-pletely separate control circuit pump, i.e. gearpump with approx. 0.5...1 lpm, limited to approx. 20 bar, making an ADC 1-25 superflu-ous. Otherwise, pay attention to the summa-tion of the back pressure, particularly whenseveral valves are connected in series.

Type MV 6C acc. toD 7000/1

Type MV 4F acc. toD 7000/1

Type ADC 1-25-1/4 acc. to D 7458Type R 58,6-1,2 acc. to D 6010 S

Type HSL 3L- G 24

4/3- and 3/3-way directional seated valves type VH (R) and VHPManually actuated, leakagefree

D 7647Directional seated valves of

VH(R), VHP

April 2008-05


2.2


Size 1 Flow Qmax = 12 lpm Operating pressure pmax = 700 barSize 2 Flow Qmax = 25 lpmOperating pressure pmax = 500 bar

Individual valve

Type VH 1(2) for pipe connection (photo)

Type VHP 1 for installation onto cus-tomer supplied manifolds

Directional valve bank

Type VHR 1 (2) for pipe connection

1. General

The 4/3- and 3/3-way directional ball seated valves feature zero leakage and are intended for the movement control of single and double acting consumers. The actuation is via hand lever with spring return into idle position or they will remain in the respecting working position by a detent. The shifting operation is transmitted via an eccenter shaft and pin onto the valve balls. All moving internal parts are lubricated by the hydraulic fluid and therefore maintenance-free. All these parts and the valve seats are hardened and ground. The valve balls are from ball bearings and conform industrial standard DIN 5401 ISO-class G 5 (DIN-class I).These valves are available either as individual valves for pipe connection (type VH) and for manifold mounting (type VHP) or as valve banks (type VHR). The valve banks are internally connected in parallel and held together by a strong tension rod. The individual valve type VH may be arranged later to form a valve bank.

D 7647 page 2

2. Type coding, main data

Order examples:

Individual valve


VH 1 - L 1K

VHR 1 - G1/N1/E2

Spring return 1) Detent

without 1 2

with 1 K 2 K

Switch 2)

Symbols acc. to order examples above

1) Automatic selfreturn into idle position up to approx. 50 bar. The lever must be returned manually with higher pressure.

2) Not available for flow pattern symbol coding N and S

Electrical data

Co. Burgess No. V 3S Protection class IP 67 (IEC 60529)

Note

230V AC 5 A cos ϕ = 0.6

15V DC 10 A

30V DC 7.5 A L/R , 3 ms

110V DC 0.07 A

230V DC 0.03 A

Service life, 105 opera-tions

Connection scheme

NO-contact (blue)NC-contact (grey)

Supply(black)

The switch is engaged via the hand lever in idle position of the valve and released if the valve is actuated (no matter to which side).


Coding

VH 1

VH 2

VHP 1

VHR 1

VHR 2

Nomen-clature

Individual valve


Tapped portsISO 228/1

(BSPP)

G 1/4

G 3/8

see dim. drawings sect. 4

G 1/4

G 3/8

Flow Qmax

(lpm)

12

25

12

12

25

Pres-surepmax(bar)

700

500

700

700

500

Type VH 1 - L1K

Type VHR 1 - G1 / N1 / E2


1 2 e.g. 1K

Table 3: Actuation


Available for:

Switching position

Individual valve type VH (P) 1 and VH 2 and valve banks type VHR 1(2)

G E M N D H L

Individual valve type

S

VH(P)1 and VH 2

Connec-tion

Pipe con-nection

Manifold mounting

Pipe con-nection

D 7647 page 3

Fluid viscosity during measure-ment 60 mm2/s

Bac

k p

ress

ure

Sp

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

Sp

(bar

)


3. Further parameters3.1 General data

Nomenclature, design Seated ball valve, versions with 4/3- and 3/3-way functions


Pipe connection Type VH(R): via pipe fittings with tapped journals shape B DIN 3852 page 2 Type VHP 1: via customer furnished manifolds

Ports P = Inlet port (pump) A, B = Consumer R = Return For pressure resistancy see „Operation pressure“ (hydraulic data)

Port size VH(R) 1: G 1/4 ISO 228/1 (BSPP) VH(R) 2: G 3/8 ISO 228/1 (BSPP) VHP 1: See dimensional drawings in sect. 4

Flow direction Only in arrow direction acc. to the resp. symbol

Over lapping Positive

Surface Valve housing zn-ni galvanized

Actuation force VH(R) 1: approx. 30 N at 700 bar approx. 11 N at 0 bar VH(R) 2: approx. 65 N at 500 bar approx. 15 N at 0 bar

Mass (weight) approx. VH 1: 1.6 kg VH 2: 3.0 kg VHP 1: 1.7 kg For VHR: Number of valves multiplied with factor 1.6 (VHR 1) or 3 (VHR 2)

Max. No. of valve sections VHR 1: 7 VHR 2: 5

3.2 Hydraulic data

Operation pressure Ports P, A, B: pmax = 700 bar R: pperm = 50 bar

Stat. over load capacity Ports P, A, B: > 1.5 pmax(nonactuated valve) R: > 5 pperm

Flow Pump delivery Q: VH(R) 1 and VHP 1 = 12 lpm VH(R) 2 = 25 lpm

Pressure fluid Hydraulic fluid ( DIN 51524 table 1 to 3); ISO VG 10 to 68 acc. to (DIN 51519) Viscosity range: min. 4; max. 1500 mm2/s Optimal operation range: 10...500 mm2/s Also suitable are biodegradable pressure fluids of the type HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES

(synth. Ester) at operation temperatures up to +70°C.

Temperatures Ambient: -40...+80°C Fluid: -25...+80°C, pay attention to the viscosity range! Start temperature down to -40°C are allowable (Pay attention to the viscosity range during start!). as long as the operation temperature during consequent running is at least 20K (Kelvin) higher. Biodegradable pressure fluids: Pay attention to manufacturer‘s information. With regard to the compatibility with sealing materials do not exceed +70°C.

Sp-Q curves Type VH(R) 1 and VHP 1 Type VH(R) 2

1 )1 )

1) not for symbol H

D 7647 page 4

4. Unit dimensions 4.1 Individual valve


Type VH 1 and VH 2

Flow pattern symbols G, E, M, N, D and H

Type VH 1 and VH 2

Flow pattern symbols of L and S

Plugged with a tapped plug with flow pattern symbol N !

Tapped plugVSTI R 1/8 ED ERMETO (VH 1)VSTI R 1/4 ED ERMETO (VH 2)

#12.2through hole

Mounting hole for rollpin (anti-rotation device)

Tapped ports ISO 228/1 (BSPP): VHR 1 = G 1/4 VHR 2 = G 3/8

When mounting onto a connection plate: Sealing of ports P and R by O-rings 14x1.78 (VH 1..) or 17.17x1.78 (VH 2..) NBR 90 Sh

M 12, 11 deepFastening thread for manifold mounting

Plugged with a tapped plug with type VH 1(2)-S For missing dimensions see VH 1(2) - G...H !

Spring return only for pressure below 50 bar!

Mounting hole for rollpin 1) (anti-rotation device)

1) When a customer furnished connection plate utilized rollpins ISO 8750-4x8-St (VH 1..) or ..-5x10 St (VH 2) must be provided

Type

VH 1 - L, S

VH 2 - L, S

d3

19

15.5

d4

13

15.5

e2

5

55

h2

39

46

h3

10

16

h4

29

33

l3

60

79

l4

44

53

Type L B H c c1 c2 d d1 d2 e e1 f g h h1 i i1 i2 l l1 l2 l3 l4 s

VH 1-.. 90 50app. 172

6 9 2.6 11.5 26.5 13 39 45 40M6, 8 deep

20 15 25 23 21 11 70 25 77.5 55.5#4.2, 4 deep

VH 2-.. 120 60 app. 162

7 12 5 12 39 13.5 46 55 54M6, 10 deep

27 16 30 30 23 12 91.5 29 107.5 74#5.2, 5.3 deep

D 7647 page 5

Type VHP 1

all flow pattern symbols

Sealing of ports A, B, P and R by O-rings 6.07x178 NBR 90 Sh.Available as seal kit DS 7647-1.

Socket head screw ISO 4762-M6x60-12.9 zinc coated

4.2 Switch assembly

Type VH 1(2) ... and VHR 1(2) ...

Switch

Switch

Type VHP 1 ...

app

rox.

192

D 7647 page 6

4.3 Directional valve bank

Hexagon nut ISO 4032-M8-8-A2K

VHR 1 = rollpin ISO 8750- 4x8-St

VHR 2 = rollpin ISO 8750-5x10-St

Inlet section

End section

Tension rod DIN 940-M12 Fo x (N x B)-8.8-A2K

Sealing of ports P and R by O-rings

Ports P and R plugged with tapped plugs.

For missing dimensions see section 4.1!

Type O-ring NBR90 Shore

Tapped plug (end section P, and R)

NNumber of valves

B

VHR 1 14x1.78 VSTI R 1/8 ED ERMETOmax. 7 50

VHR 2 17.17x1.78 VSTI R 1/4 ED ERMETOmax. 5 60

app.16 app.16

2/2- and 3/2-way directional seated valves type BVG 1 and BVP 1for any flow direction, zero leakage, all ports pressure resistant

D 7765Seated valves BVG(P) 1

September 2012-02© 1999 by HAWE Hydraulik


2.2

1. General, brief descriptionThe 2/2- and 3/2-way directional valves type BVG 1 and BVP 1 are seated cone valves, which are available with solenoid, hydraulic, pneumatic, or manual actuation. All ports are equally pressure resistant, due to the internal pressure compensation.Valves featuring a spring return will return automatically into their idle position when not activated. The detented version will achieve its idle or working position after a brief impulse at the opposing solenoid.

Pressure pmax = 400 bar Flow Qmax = 20 lpm

o Version for pipe connection

o Version for manifold mounting

o Version as double valve (distribution valve)

Example:Type BVP 1 R - WGM 230

Example:Type BVG 112 S - GM 24

Example:Type BVG 1 S - G 24 - 1/4

Additional valves with same function

o Type BVG 3, BVP 3 D 7400 (Qmax = 50 lpm, pmax = 315 bar)

o Type NBVP 16 D 7765 N (Qmax = 20 lpm, pmax = 400 bar, NG 6)

o Type BVE D 7921 (Qmax = 70 lpm, pmax = 400 bar, cartridge valve)

D 7765 page 2

2. Available versions2.1 Type coding, main data

BVP 1 R - WGM 230

BVG 1 Z - H - 3/8

BVG 1 R /B 1,1 - A - 1/4


1) 250 bar applies to solenoid actuation coding GM.., WGM.. (acc. to table 4)2) Only with solenoid actuation3) Not possible with port size G 3/8 (BSPP)4) Part No. for spare parts order etc. see section 5.1 “Appendix”

With detent

Coding Description

BVG 1 Pipe connection ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

BVP 1 Manifold mounting

Ports A, B, C acc. to ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

1/4

3/8

See dimensional drawing:Version with indiv. connection block, see sect. 5.2

Pressurepmax

(bar)

400/ 250 1)

Flow Qmax (lpm)

20

Table 1: Basic type

Table 2: Additional elements (for ports A, B, and C, see also section 3.1 „Flow limitation“)

Additional element

Orifice 3)

Orifice

Coding 4)

B 0,6

B 0,8

B 1,1

B 1,3

B 1,5

B 0,6

B 0,8

B 1,1

B 1,3

B 1,5

B 2,0

B 2,5

#(mm)

0.60.81.11.31.5

0.60.81.11.31.52.02.5

Suited for

BVG 1

BVP 1 RBVP 1 RKBVP 1 SBVP 1 SK

R S Z RK 2) SK 2) ZD 2)

With contact switch

Additional element

Orifice

Check valve(in A, B, or C)

Coding 4)

B 0,8

B 1,0

B 1,2

B 1,4

R

#(mm)

0.81.01.21.4

---

Suited for

BVP 1 ZBVP 1 ZD

BVP 1 ZBVP 1 ZD

Actuation, see table 4 on page 3

optional

Version as double valve (distribution valve)

Type BVG 112 see sect. 5.3

D 7765 page 3

Cod. H

1) Explosion-proof version 2) DC-solenoid (98 V DC, 205 V DC) with bridge rectifier in the device socket3) These symbols, together with solenoids GM, WGM, LM, XM, cost less than versions G, WG etc. but the max. pressure rating is lower!4) actuation via tool, a/f 13

Cod. H 1/4

Solenoid Hydraulic Pneumatic Manual MechanicalPin Roller

Flow pattern symbol


Main data, also see section 3.2 Coding with plug Plug with LED Without plug

G 24 EX 1) --- ---

G 12 L 12 X 12

G 24 L 24 X 24

WG 110 2) --- X 98

WG 230 2) --- X 205

GM 12 3) LM 24 XM 12

GM 24 3) LM 24 XM 24

WGM 110 2) 3) --- XM 98

WGM 230 2) 3) --- XM 205

220

Solenoid 400

250

Mechanical 400

Manual 400

Manual 400with detent

Hydraulic 400

Pneumatic 400

Actuation

P External control port G 1/4 (BSPP)

H 1/4 External control oil port G 1/4 (BSPP)

H Control oil port (type BVP 1)

A

CD with hand lever

KD 4) without handlever

T Pin

K Roller

Control: pcontr. min = 24 barpressure pcontr. max = 400 bar

Control: pcontr. min = 3 barpressure pcontr. max = 15 bar

Pressurepmax(bar)

Actuation torque: approx. 1.5 ... 3 Nm

Actuation torque: approx. 1.5 ... 3 Nm

Actuation force: F = approx. 80 ... 190 N

Actuation force: F = approx. 22 ... 35 N

For flow pattern symbols

R (RK), S (SK),

Z (ZD)

R (RK), S (SK),

Z (ZD)

all

R, S, Z

UN = 12 V DC

UN = 24 V DC

UN = 110 V AC, 50/60 Hz (98 V DC)

UN = 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz (205 V DC)

UN = 12 V DC

UN = 24 V DC

UN = 110 V AC, 50/60 Hz (98 V DC)

UN = 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz (205 V DC)

UN = 24 V DC

Table 4 a: Additionally locked at actuations CD and KD

without (no coding) switching position a

in switching position a and b

--

1

2

3switching position b

CD CD 1 KD KD 1

CD 2 CD 3 KD 2 KD 3

Symbols

D 7765 page 4

3. Further characteristic data3.1 General and hydraulic data


Negative (overlap only apparent during transition from one to the other end position). All ports are interconnected during the switching process.

Operating pressure According to table 4, sect. 2.1

Static overload capacity Ports A, B, and C approx. 2 x pmax

Housing material and Steel, gas nitrided (basic valve)surface coating


Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conf. DIN 51514 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conf. DIN 51519Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 1500 mm2/sec. Optimal operation: approx. 10 ... 500 mm2/sec

Also suitable for biological degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES (Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70°C

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40...+80°C; Fluid: -25...+80°C, pay attention to the viscosity range! Start temperature down to -40°C are allowable (Pay attention to the viscosity range during start!),

as long as the operation temperature during subsequent running is at least 20K higher. Biological degradable pressure fluids: Pay attention to manufacturer‘s information. With regard to the compat-ibility with sealing materials do not exceed +70°C.

Restrictions for version with ex-proof solenoid!

Attention: Observe the restrictions regarding the perm. duty cycles of the solenoids in sect. 3.2!

Flow Qmax acc. to sect. 2.1

Flow limitation It is necessary to limit the flow down to the permissible range depending on the system pressure via orifices (see sect. 2.1). This applies to all circuits fed by an accumulator or when connected to high pressure circuits fed by high delivery pumps.

The orifice must be located on the accumulator side always. With valves version ..Z.. it is installed in port C as standard. It must be specified in uncoded text, when the orifices are desired in ports A or B. For more detailed information, see table 2, section 2.1.

The check valve prevents an unintended reversal of the flow direction. Mounting possibility like with orifices.

Overlap with 3/2-way directional valves

Completewith actuation

G.., G 24 EX, L.., X.., WG.., M..

GM.., LM.., XM.., WGM..

Hydraulic H, H 1/4

Pneumatic P

Manual A

Manual CDWithout detent KD

Mechanical T

K

BVG(P) 1 RBVG(P) 1 S

1.0

0.9

0.6

0.5

0.9

0.9

0.6

0.9

BVG(P) 1 RKBVG(P) 1 SK

1.2

1.0

---

---

---

---

---

---

BVP 1 ZDBVG 1 ZD

1.7

1.5

---

---

---

---

---

---

BVG 1 ZBVP 1 Z

1.2

1.1

0.8

0.7

1.1

1.1

0.8

1.1

Solenoid

Bac

k p

ress

ure

. |

p (b

ar)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)


Viscosity during measurements approx. 60 mm2/sec

Additional orifices(Other diameters may be interpolated)

Basic valves|p-Q-curve

Orifice Check valve

D 7765 page 5

Electrical data forcontact switch

Type V4NC SET 7 Co. SAIA-Burgess

Mech. service life 5 x 106

Electr. service life (approx. cycles) 12 V, 3 A = 0.05 x 106, 100 mA = 3 x 106 (cos 9 = 1)

Power supply 12 V DC, 5 A 24 V DC, 5 A

To ensure save function the min. current specifications must be maintained; Imin (12 V DC) = 10 mA, Imin (24 V DC) = 100 mA

Plug DIN EN 175 301-803

Protection class (properly assembled) IP 65 (acc. to IEC 60529)

Circuitry Idle position 1-3 Working position 1-2

D 7765 page 6

Control pressure pcontr. min 24 bar 3 bar --- --- ---

pcontr. max 400 bar 15 bar --- --- ---

Permissible residual pressure in the control line for save < 2 bar --- --- --- --- return into the idle position

Prot. Z overload capacity approx. approx. --- --- --- 1.5 pcontr. max bar 1.5 pcontr. max bar

Control displacement (geometric) 1.4 cm3 9.3 cm3 --- --- ---

Housing material and Steel Light alloy Steel Steel (control housing) surface coating (control housing) (control housing) (lever housing) gas nitrided galvanized black anodized gas nitrided

Actuation moment --- --- approx. 1.5 ... 3 Nm --- ---

Actuation force --- --- --- approx. approx. 80...190 N 22...35 N

3.2 Actuations

Solenoid

All solenoids are built and tested acc. to VDE 0580

Connection and circuitry DC-voltage

Coding G 12 GM 12 G 24 GM 24 G 24 EX WG 110 WGM 110 WG 230 WGM 230 L 12 LM 12 L 24 LM 24 --- --- --- --- --- X 12 XM 12 X 24 XM 24 --- --- --- --- ---

Nom. voltage UN (V) 12 12 24 24 24 110 110 230 230

Nom. power PN (W) 29.4 26.2 27.6 26.5 23.4 28.6 24.8 30.2 28

DC-voltage AC-voltage AC, 50 and 60 Hz

Switching time (reference value) On or Off: approx. 50...60 ms, 2-3 longer with WG

Switchings/hour approx. 2000, approximately evenly distributed

Actuation pulse Symbole ZD: approx. 500 ms

Protection class IP 65 (IEC 60529) (plug properly mounted) IP 67 (IEC 60529) with G 24 EX


Contact. temperature approx. 120°C, with ambient temperature 20°C

Switch-off energy WA Ò 0.4 Ws

Surface coating (solenoid) DIN 50961-Fe/Zn 12 bk cC

Relative duty cycle during operation(100% ED stamping on the solenoid)

Type G... Type L.. Type WG..(applies also to the switches)

Rel. duty cycle %ED-5 min

Am

bie

nt

tem

p.

U (°

C)

Version G, GM, L, LM, WG, WGM:Plug conf. DIB DIN EN 175 301-803 A All plugs For additional plugs, see D 7163

Version G 24 EX: Cable cross section 3x0.5 mm2,Cable length 3 m, option 10 m (cable ÖLFLEX-440P ® Co. LAPP, D-70565 Stuttgart)

AC-voltage


ATEX-Certificate of conformity TÜV-A 03ATEX 0017 XCoding O II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 T4 O II 2 D Ex mbD 21 T135°COper. duration 100% EDDuty cycle IP 67 (IEC 60529)Nom. voltage UN 24 V DCPower PN 23 WRestrictions for use:

Ambient temperature -35 ... +40°Cmax. fluid temperature +70°Cel. protection against overload (conf. IEC 60127) IF < 1.6 A-TSurface coating Housing galvanically zinc coated Coil and connection cavity are moulded



Hydraulic Pneumatic Manual Mechanical

(coding H 1/4) (coding P) (coding A, CD, KD) (coding T) (coding K)

D 7765 page 7

Switch(For missing data of the plug, see solenoid actuation section 4.2)

Ports conf. ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A, B, and C = optional G 1/4 or G 3/8

4. Unit dimensions 4.1 Valve section


Type BVG 1 R(S) Type BVG 1 RK(SK)

Type BVG 1 ZDType BVG 1 Z

#6.5Thru-hole

#6.5Thru-hole

#6.5Thru-hole

1)

1)

1)

1)

1) For dimension of the differing actuations, see section 4.2!


#6.5Thru-hole

z xy

Ports (BSPP) z x y

G 1/4 25 24 20

G 3/8 27 26 18.5

a

BVG 1 R(S) - 1/4 10

BVG 1 R(S) - 3/8 12

app

rox.

35

D 7765 page 8


Sealing of the ports via O-ring NBR 90 Sh 1):A, B = 7.65x1.78Z = 2.54x1.78

Sealing of the ports via O-ring NBR 90 Sh 1):A, B, C = 8.73x1.78Z = 2.54x1.78

Type BVP 1 R(S) Type BVP 1 RK(SK)

Type BVP 1 Z

1) Part of seal kit DS 7765-1 (including O-rings for actuation H, H 1/4)

2) Port Z only with actuation coding H

3) For dimension of the differing actuations, see section 4.2!

M6,8 deep

Hole pattern manifold

(view from top)Hole pattern manifold

(view from top)

Hole pattern manifold

(view from top)

Switch(For missing data of the plug, see solenoid actuation section 4.2)

2)

M6,8 deep

2)

2)

3) 3)

3)

Type h h1

BVP 1-Z 53 8

BVP 1-ZD 60 132)

M5,6 deep

3)

For missing data, see below!

Type BVP 1 ZD

app

rox.

48

D 7765 page 9

4.2 ActuationsElectrical actuation



1) Attention: This dimension is depending on the manufacturer and can be max. 40 mm acc. to DIN EN 175 301-803 A.

2) Both solenoid and plug may be rotated 4x90°.

Coding G... and WG...

Coding G 24 EX

Coding GM... and WGM...

1) 1)



Manual emergency operation

The valve can be actuated, if required, by pushing the emer-gency actuation pin inward (visible from the top side) by means of a screw driver or similar.Attention: The pressure apparent at port B acts as a counter force resulting in approx. 195 N at 100 bar!

2)

2)

app

rox.

35

app

rox.

38.5 ap

pro

x.35

app

rox.

28.5

D 7765 page 10

Hydraulic actuation

Coding H 1/4

(with BVP 1)

Coding H

(with BVG 1)Coding H

(with BVP 1)

Pneumatic actuation

Coding P

Control port Z is located at the valve element (section 4.1!)

Manual actuation

Coding A

Coding CD, KD

Lock with CD (KD) 1(2, 3) CD

D 7765 page 11

Don‘t use as a stop!

Saf

ety

lift

Working stroke (mm) with

Start of function (H+h)

Functional travel h

Switching position range s

Actuation force N

BVG(P) 1 R-K

66

14

---

approx. 26

BVG(P) 1 S-K

66

10

*1

approx. 22

BVG(P) 1 Z-K

66

14

*1

approx. 35


Coding T Coding K

5. Appendix5.1 Parts No. for orifices (retrofitting)

Actuation force F for 100 ... 400 bar:Type BVG(P) 1 R-T = 80 ... 140 N

BVG(P) 1 Z(S)-T = 140 ... 190 N

1) Shares: 0.5 mm play1 mm operation travel0.5 mm safety lift

(to

tal)

1)

Pla

y

Continuation actuations

app

rox.

70

Coding

without hole

B 0,6

B 0,8

B 1,1

B 1,3

B 1,5

without hole

B 0,6

B 0,8

B 1,1

B 1,3

B 1,5

B 2,0

B 2,5

Suited for type

BVG 1..-1/4

BVP 1 R(S)

Parts No.

7406 012 a

7406 012 b

7406 012 c

7406 012 d

7406 012 f

7406 012 h

7921 012

7921 012-0,6

7921 012-0,8

7921 012-1,1

7921 012-1,3

7921 012-1,5

7921 012-2,0

7921 012-2,5

Coding

without hole

B 0,8

B 1,0

B 1,2

B 1,4

R

Suited for type

BVP 1 Z

BVP 1 Z(ZD)

Parts No.

7785 018

7785 018 a

7785 018 b

7785 018 c

7785 018 d

ER 12

D 7765 page 12

5.2 Individual connection block for valves type BVP 1

Available versions Dimensions

BVP 1 - ... - R(RK)

S(SK)

1/4

3/8

BVP 1 Z(ZD) - ... - 1/4

3/8

7921 092

7921 093

Order No.

7921 094 20

7921 095 24

Order No. a

M6, 8 deep

Ports conf. ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A and B = G 1/4 or G 3/8

Ports conf. ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A, B, and C = G 1/4 or G 3/8

D 7765 page 13

5.3 Double valve (distribution valve)

Order coding: BVG 112 R - G 24

Qmax = 20 lpmpmax = According actuation (see table 4, page 3)

Actuations (see table 4, page 3)

Flow pattern symbol R or S (see table 2, page 2)possible combinations (coding RS or SR)

Basic type double valve

Flow pattern symbol (illustrated here with solenoid actuation)

Type BVG 112 R - G 24

Dimensions

Type BVG 112 S - G 24

Ports conf. ISO 228/1 (BSPP):P, A, B = G 3/8A 1 = M 18x1.5

For dimension of the differing actuations, see section 4.2

Directional seated valves in a twin compact design type VZP 1

solenoid actuated, zero leakage,

mounting on manifolds

D 7785 ADirectional seated valve VZP1

October 1999-02


2.2



Flow Qmax = 15 lpm

For directional valve banks type BVZP 1 see D 7785 B

Symbols

4/3- and 4/4-way directional 2 x 3/2-way directional seated valvesseated valveExample: VZP1 G22 - G 24 Example: VZP1 H12 B1,2 H2 - G 24

1. General informationThe directional seated valves type VZP serve to control the movement direction (ahead -- stop -- back) of single and double acting consumersin hydraulic systems.These valves are designed as manifold mounting valves.Their compact design enables valve banks i.e. hydraulic controls withvery little spatial requirements. The various versions of these valves asvalve banks type BVZP 1 are detailed in D 7785 B.The following flow pattern symbols are available with the directional valves type VZP 1:

' 4/3- and 3/3-way function, cone seated valve design' Two independently acting 3/2- or 2/2-way functions, ball seated valve

design' Two independently acting 4/2-way functions, spool valve design

Main advantage, when compared to valves with similar function, is the unique two in one solenoid design (two coils share one housing). This allows significant downsizing of the complete valve.All cone and ball seated valves show zero leakage in blocked state.

4/3-way directional seated valvewith pressure switch

Example: VZP1 D52 - WG 230

1 x 3/2- and 2/2-way directional seated valve(2/2-way for idle circulation)Example: VZP1 H2 F2 - G 24

1 x 3/2-way directional seated and 4/2-way directional spool valve

2 x 4/2-way directional spool valveExample: VZP1 W2 W2 - G 24

Example: VZP1 R4 WX2 - WG 230

D 7785 A page 2

2. Available versions, main data(for complete type overview, see sect. 6)

2.1 4/3 (4/4)- or 3/3 (3/4)-way directional seated valves up to 400 barFor the actuation of a double or one single-acting consumer.The control of the two solenoid coils takes place alternately to achieve either switching positions a (1-3) or b (1-2). When one coil isused only , it may be energized permanently, as long as the ambient temperature is below approx. 40°C. A reduced duty cycle applies if both coils are energized (switching position a (1-2) + b (1-3)) or the ambient temperature is higher (see sect. 3.2).

Order examples:

1) A pressure gauge (type 9/... D 7077 A) or a miniature accumulator (type AC.. acc. to D 7571) may be installedinstead of a pressure switch, see also SK 7077A. Thishas to be added to the order in uncoded text.Example: VZP1 G22/0-G24 with pressure gauge 9/250-Y9mounted at DG connection (port A)

2) Order coding for a throttle complete with filter section,see C in sect. 5.1

3) May be used also for pressure switches, when mounted

VZP 1 G 22 - G 24

VZP 1 D 45 B1,2 - WG 230

VZP 1 J 2 - G 12

VZP 1 P 4 B1,0 - WG 110

Table 1: Basic type

Table 3: Pressure switch type DG 3.. acc. to D 5440,optional for connection A and/or B 1)

VZP 1 Twin valve, size 1

22

2

3 DG 33 200...450 bar

4 DG 34 100...400 bar

5 DG 35 20...250 bar

6 DG 36 4... 12 bar

7 DG 365 12...170 bar

22 = Ports A and B withflow patterns E, G, D, and O

2 = Ports A with flow patterns P a. J.Ports A or B with symbols H, M, N, R,W, and WX

Only for flow pattern E, G, D, and O respec-tively 1st or 2nd coding:DG... with A only = 32, 42 etc.DG... with B only = 23, 24 etc.DG... with A and B = 45, 73 etc.

For flow pattern P, J, H, M, N, R, W, and WX:Only one coding 3, 4 etc. for port A or B

Standard, withoutDG.., prepared forretrofitting

Without Standard

0,8 Ø 0.8

1,0 Ø 1.0

1,2 Ø 1.2

1,4 Ø 1.4

Table 4: Additional elements, inserted in port P (optional) 2)

B

Orifice tolimit theflow

Symbolsaccording to above order examples

Table 2: Symbols

E

G

D

O

P

J

G 12 X 12 L 12 3) --- 12 V DC

G 24 X 24 L 24 3) L 5 K 24 3) 24 V DC

G 48 X 48 --- --- 48 V DC

G 102 X 102 --- --- 102 V DC

WG 110 --- --- --- 110 V AC

WG 230 --- --- --- 230 V AC

Table 5: Nom. voltage of the solenoid

Only with flow patterns E, D, P, H, M, W.This orifice is not available for flow patterns G, O, J, N, R, and WX, becauseof the check valve installed.

50 /60 Hz

4/3(4/4)-way directional seated valve, basic version

4/3(4/4)-way directional seated valve with pressure switches for ports Aand B as well as throttle in port P

3/3(3/4)-way directional seated valve, basic version

3/3(3/4)-way directional seated valve with pressure switch for port A andthrottle in port P

Type VZP1 G 22 - G 24

Type VZP1 D 45 B1,2 - WG 230

Type VZP1 J 2 - G 12

Type VZP1 P 4 B1,0 -WG 110

The 4th switching position a+b is apparent, when both coils of the sole-noid are energized simultaneously. It should be detailed in circuit diagramsonly when really used, see also restrictions in sect. 3.2!

With plug AconformingDIN EN 175 301-803

Without plug Plug withLED

Plug incl.leads 5 m

Nom. voltage

D 7785 A page 3

Table 6: Basic type

VZP 1 Twin valve, size 1

Nom. voltage of the solenoid, see table 5 in sect. 2.1

2.2 3/2 (2/2)-way directional seated valves for up to 450 bar and 4/2-way directional spool valve up to 300 bar

These valves are mainly intended for the actuation of single acting (3/2-way function) or double acting consumers (2 x 3/2-way functions ore 1 x 4/2-way function).The simultaneous, permanent actuation of both solenoid coils is permissible up to an ambient temperature of approx. 40°C, beyondthis the restricted duty cycle is to be observed, see sect. 3.2!The 4/2-way directional spool valves are rated for 450 bar when one of the switching positions is achieved but only 300 bar duringthe switching operations. This enables use of these spool valves in combination with directional seated valves in circuits rated for 450 bar. Attention: Also the consumers connected must have a rating for such high system pressure! Otherwise some kind ofpressure reduction to the consumer has to be provided. In case of valve banks type BVZP (acc. to D 7785 B ) there is the possibility to install a 2-way pressure reducing valve section (..-CZ../.- ) upstream of the respective spool valve section.

Order examples:

Port A Port B

VZP1H 2 N 2 - G 24

VZP1N1 2 M1 4 B1,2 - WG 230

VZP1H 3 B0,8 F 2 - G 24

VZP1W 4 B0,8 WX2 - WG 110

VZP1R 4 W 4 - G 12

Table 7: Symbols

Directional seated valves Directional spool valves

H

H1

N

N1

F

M

M1

R

R1

C

W

WX

1) The return pressure stop at flowpattern symbols H1, M1, N1 andR1.It prevents any pressure surgesto migrate via port R to ports Aor B, which otherwise mightcause unintended movementsof easily moving or unloadedconsumers

2 x 3/2-way directional seated valves, basic version

2 x 3/2-way directional seated valves with pressure switch for port B as well asthrottle in port P2

Combination of 3/2- and 2/2-way directional seated valves, with pressure switchfor port A as well as throttle in port P1

2 x 4/2-way directional spool valve, with pressure switch for port A1 as well as throttle in port P1

Combination of 3/2-way directional seated valve and 4/2-directional spool valvewith pressure switches for ports A1 and A2

Type VZP1H 2 N 2 - G 24

Throttle, see table 4 in sect. 2.1

Pressure switches, see table 3 in sect. 2.1

Type VZP1N1 2 M1 4 B1,2 - WG 230

Type VZP1H 3 B0,8 F 2 - G 24

Symbols

according to above order examples

1)

1) 1)

1)

Port H, M, WPort A N, R, andB H1...R1 WX

H, M, N, R '

H1, M1, N1, R1

F and C '

W and WX ' '

Possible combinations:

Type VZP1W 4 B0,8 WX 2 - WG 110 Type VZP1R 4 W 4 - G 12

D 7785 A page 4

3. Technical data3.1 General information and hydraulic data

Nomenclature, design Directional seated valve, zero leakage, with 4/3- and 3/3-way function and with 2 x 3/2-or 3/2- plus 2/2-way functions in a twin lay-out per valve bodyDirectional spool valve with 2 x 4/2-way function or combination of 4/2-way function (spool valve) and3/2-way function (seated valve) in a twin lay-out per valve body

Unit surface Zinc galvanized

Pipe connection Manifold mountingIndividual sub-plates have to be customer furnishedFor directional valve banks in parallel connection see type BVZP, acc. to D 7785 B

Ports P, P1, P2 = Inlet port (pump side)A, B = ConsumersR, R1, R2 = Return

Direction of flow Only in arrow direction in accordance with symbol

Over lapping Negative, i.e. the transition into the other switching positions is only completed at the end of stroke. Allpassages are interconnected during the switching operation, however this may be neglected becauseof the short switching time.Directional spool valves (Coding W, WX): zero

Use in the open Directional seated valve:Possible, due to good surface protection of solenoid and valve body and the pressure and moisture proof coil design. Nevertheless the valves should be protected against direct sun and direct contact withwater should be avoided.

Mass (weight) approx. kg Valves acc. to sect. 2.1: Coding E, G, P, J = 1.9 kg Coding D and O = 2.2

Valves acc. to sect. 2.2: Coding H ... R1, F and C = 2.2 kg Coding W and WX = 1.9 kg

Operating pressure Valves acc. to sect. 2.1: Port P, A, B pmax = 400 bar with VZP 1 E, D, P, G, O, J

Port R, L pmax = 20 bar

Valves acc. to sect. 2.2: Port P1(2); A1(2); B1(2) pmax = 450 bar with VZP 1 H, N, M, R, F, C

pmax = 300 bar with VZP 1 W, WX

(450 bar in achieved switching position)Port R1(2); L pmax = 20 bar

Static overload capacity Approx. 2.5 pmax, applies to the valve in idle position only

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conforming DIN 51524 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conforming DIN 51519Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4; max. approx. 1500 mm2/s (Viscosity during start of operation)Optimal operation: approx. 10 ... 500 mm2/sAlso suitable for biological degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES (Synth.Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70°C

Temperature range Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80°CFluid: -25 ... +80°C, Note the viscosity rangePermissible temperature during start: -40°C (observe start-viscosity!), as long as the service tempera-ture is at least 20K (Kelvin) higher for the following operationBiological degradable pressure fluids: Observe manufacturer's specifications. Considering the compatibility with seal material not over +70°C.Attention: Observe the permissible operation time of the solenoids, see also sect. 3.2!

Flow Symbols

sect. 2.1 VZP 1 E, D, P, G, O, J 1)

sect. 2.2 VZP 1 H, N, M, R, F, C

VZP 1 W, WX

SolenoidCoding

G 24

G 12, WG 110, WG 230

All solenoids G.. and WG..

Guideline for permissible, switchable flow in lpm at

operating pressure up to approx.250 bar 400 bar 450 bar

12 8 ---

9 7 ---

9 7 5

16 16 ---(300 bar)

1) The perm. flow during switching operations may be 30...50% (G 24) or even 100 % (G 12, WG 110, and WG 230) higher, whenthe duty cycle is $ 10%, see also sect. 3.2.

add 0.3 kg per directly mountedpressure switch

L = Relief line, led pressurelessly tothe tank always (return)!

D 7785 A page 5

Note regarding valves acc. to section 2.1:

The flow in return direction Qout is lower or higher than in inflow direction Qin depending on motion direction of connected double

acting consumers with unequal area ratio (differential cylinders, e.g. acc. to DIN ISO 7181) and, therefore the corresponding

figures acc. to the |p-curve,

Fluid viscosity approx. 60 mm2/s during measurements

A stronger increase of the back pressure at viscosities above approx. 500 mm2/s

Extend Retract

Bac

kp

ress

ure|

p(b

ar)

Bac

kp

ress

ure|

p(b

ar)

Bac

kp

ress

ure|

p(b

ar)

Directional seated valves Symbols E, D, P, G, O, andJ acc. to sect. 2.1

Directional seated valves Symbols H, M, N, R, F, andC acc. to sect. 2.2

4/2-way directional spool valve Symbols W and WX acc. to sect. 2.2

Orifice B 0.8...1,4


Flow Q (lpm)

The total back pressure is the sum of inflow and return shares

|ptotal = |pin + |pout

|p-Q-curves

The curves apply to valves including a test manifold, which features a similar lay-out forgallery P and R as illustrated in sect. 5.1 or table 5 in sect. 2.3 of D 7785 B. The backpressure for fittings have to be added. A common fitting for tube 8 mm shows approx. 1 bar at 10 lpm and 3 bar at 16 lpm.

Flow Q (lpm)

Ain

Ain

AinQin

Qin

QinQout Qout

Aout

AoutQout =

Ain

Aout

Aout

D 7785 A page 6

Protection class IP 65 (IEC 60529), with properly mounted plugIEC 70 (Co)13

Circuitry:Plug shape DIN EN 175 301-803 3-terminals + PE (gnd)

All plugs feature a cable gland (except type L5K 24)

Insulation material class H

Contact temperature max. approx. 100°C at 20°C ambient temperature and max. performance

Switch-off energy W = 0.5 Ws (guideline for max. + approx. 10% acc. to tests with nom. voltage UN)

Mounting In case of an electrical defect the twin solenoid may be removed from the valve body by undoing thefour mounting screws. Remove the armature together with the actuation parts and the armatures fromthe unscrewed solenoid body and correctly reassemble everything, together with the new coil housing,in its original position (do not interchange!).

3.2 Electric data

Solenoid Twin solenoid, wet armatureelectrical design and tests conforming DIN VDE 0580

Nom. voltage, nominal power and switching times

Coding G 12 G 24 WG 110 1) WG 230 1)X 12 X 24 X 48 X 102L 12 L 24, L5K 24 2)

Nom. voltage UN (V) 12 DC 24 DC 110 AC/48 DC 230 AC/102 DC

Nom. power PN (W) 24.5 27.4 29.8 29.6

Nom. current I20 (A) 2.04 1.14 0.62 0.29

on 70 70 110 110

off 40 40 155 155

on 50 50 70 70

off 65 65 130 130

Switchingtime(guide-line)

4/3- and 3/3-directionalseated valves acc. tosect. 2.1

3/2-, 2/2-way direct.seated valves and 4/2-way directional spoolvalves acc. to sect. 2.2

1) Solenoids equipped with plugs including a double one-way rectifiercircuit feature coils 48 V DC (WG 110) or 102 V DC (WG 230), see also circuitry.

Switching frequency Approx. 2000/h, approx. evenly distributed

Duty cycle The permissible duty cycle of switching position a, b ora+b with alternating or simultaneously operated solenoidsmay be estimated for applications with continuos cyclesby %EDa + %EDb ≤ 100 k.

The factor k in accordance with the diagram below takesinto account the ambient fluid and the oil temperature.

Ambient temperatur (°C)

Fac

tor

(k)

Example 1: VZP1 H2 N2 - G 24 (sect. 2.2, example 1)

Example 2: VZP1 G22 - G 24Only alternating actuation of a or b usually makes recalculation usually superfluous. With actuation mode a + b acc. to above scheme.

Ambient temperature of < 40°C Ambient temp. > 40°C, e.g. 52°C

%EDa + %EDb = 100 x 2 = 200 %EDa + %EDb = 100 x 1.6 = 160

each single coil may be operated each single coil may beoperated with with 100% ED (100 + 100 = 200) max. 80% ED (80 + 80 = 160) or with a differing

distribution with a %ED sum of 160

DC-voltage DC-voltageCoding G.. Coding L5K 24 2) Coding WG..

2) Plug coding L5K, features LED's and a lead 5 m,for detailed specifications see D 7163.

Solenoid viewedfrom top

D 7785 A page 7

These ports are not requiredwith VZP 1 P and J

When mountedat port BWhen mounted at port A

4. Unit dimensionsAll dimensions are in mm and are subject to change without notice!

4.1 4/3 (4/4)- or 3/3 (3/4)-directional seated valves acc. to sect. 2.1

Type VZP 1 E, G, D, and O

Manual emergency

actuation

Hole pattern of

the manifold

(view from top)

Type VZP 1 P and J

Version with pressure switch (for missing data see pamphlet D 5440)

Manualemergencyactuation

O-rings NBR 90 Sh:8.73x1.78 3.68x1.78

PortsA, B, P, R

M6, 11 deep

Port L

Actuation aid(do not useany sharp-edged parts)

Cable gland (coding G.., WG.. and L..)

Cable gland

Stampedon top

roundedor flat end

Socket head screws ISO 4762M 6x45 (valve E,G,P, and J)M 6x50 (valve D and O)-12.9 zinc galvanizedmax. torque 13 Nm

Prepared for retrofittingof a pressure switch.

Type H B h h1

VZP1E a. G 110 35 35 21.5

VZP1D a. O 115 39 40 18.5

VZP1P a. J 110 35 35 21.5

app

rox.

27

app

rox.

61

approx. 75

approx. 35

D 7785 A page 8

Manual emergency

actuation


O-rings NBR 90 Sh:7.65x1.78 6.07x1.78

8.73x1.78

Ports R1 and R2

Ports P1 and P2

Ports A and B

These ports are notrequired with codingF and C

When mountedat port BWhen mounted at port A

1) Port plugged

1)

Hole pattern of the

manifold

(view from top)



Cable gland(coding G.., WG.. and L..)

Cablegland

Stampedon top

Roundedor flat end

Socket head screws ISO 4762M 6x50 zinc galvanizedmax. torque 13 Nm

4.2 3/2- and 2/2-directional seated valves acc. to sect. 2.2

Type VZP 1 H, N, M, R

for ports A and BType VZP 1 F and C

with idle circulation P2→R2

M 6, 11 deep

Prepared for retrofittingof a pressure switch

app

rox.

61

approx. 75

app

rox.

27

approx. 35

D 7785 A page 9

Manual emergency

actuation


O-rings

all ports

For type VZP1 W.. W..-.. For type VZP1 H.. W..-..

When mountedat port A2When mounted at port A1

Hole pattern of the manifold

(view from top)



Cablegland

Stampedon top

Roundedor flat end

Socket head screws ISO 4762M 6x45 zinc galvanizedmax. torque 13 Nm

4.3 4/2-way directional spool valve, also available in combination with a 3/2-way directional seated

valve acc. to sect. 2.2Type VZP 1 W.. W..-..

2 x 4/2-way directional spool valveType VZP 1 H.. W..-.. etc.

Combination of a 3/2-way directional seatedvalve and a 4/2-way directional spool valve, formissing data see VZP1 W.. W..-..!

1) Figures in brackets applyto type VZP1 H.. W..

M 6, 11 deep

M 6, 11 deep

Port

A1 a. A2B1 a. B2

P1 a. P2

R1 a. R2

For complete seal kits,see E 7785 a, table 2

O-ring NBR 90 Sh

6.07x1.78

8.73x1.78

10.82x1.78

Cable gland(coding G.., WG.. and L..)

Prepared for retro-fitting of a pressureswitch.

approx. 35

approx. 75

app

rox.

61

D 7785 A page 10

Twin solenoid, housing surface zinc galvanized

Terminals for plug, 3 pins + PE, DIN EN 175 301-803

Valve body, housing surface zinc galvanized

Functional valve seat parts hardened and ground

Bearing quality steel, DIN 5401 class I (ISO 3290G5)

Consumer sides A and B prepared for retrofitting of a pressure switch type DG 3.. as standard

Fine screen filter element, protecting the functional valve parts from sporadically washed up coarse contamina-tion (wire mesh 0.25x0.16 DIN 4189 made from stainless wire).Seated valves (sect. 2.1) flow pattern E, D: in ports P, A, and B

flow pattern G, O: in ports A and Bflow pattern P: in ports P and Aflow pattern J: in port A

Seated valves (sect. 2.2) flow pattern H, M, W: in ports P1 and P2

Check valve type ER 12 acc. to D 7325Seated valves (sect. 2.1) flow pattern G, O: in PSeated valves (sect. 2.2) flow pattern N, R, WX: in ports P1 and P2

Orifice (optional) with inflow sided fine screen filter element, protecting the orifice from sporadically washed upcoarser contamination particles (wire mesh 0.25x0.16 DIN 4189 made from stainless wire).

flow pattern E, D, P: in port Pflow pattern H, M, W: in ports P1 and P2

Order coding for a throttle complete with filter element:B 0.8 = 7785 021B 1.0 = 7785 022B 1.2 = 7785 023B 1.4 = 7785 024

When several valves are operating in parallel, the return pressure stop prevents pressure surges out of the com-mon return pipe from entering unoperated, unloaded or easily moving consumers, when there is a connectionA→R1 or B→R2. Thus preventing uncontrolled movements.Only for ball seated directional valves (sect. 2.2), with flow pattern H1, N1, M1, R1: in ports R1 and R2

5. Appendix5.1 Schematic cross sectional views

4/3-way directional seated valve (cone seated valve) 2 x 3/2-way directional seated valves (ball seated valve)

example VZP1 G22-G... example VZP1 H2 M2-G...

1

2

7 78

8

1

2

33

4

4

5

6

6

7

9

10 10

D

C

B

A

@

?

>

=

<

;

D 7785 A page 11

Symbols (see sect. 2.1 and 2.2)

F, C 2/2-way function (directional seated valve, together with an other 3/2-way directional valve)

H, N, M, R 3/2-way function (directional seated valve, together with an other 2/2-, 3/2- or 4/2-way directional valve)

P, J 3/3-way function (directional seated valve)

E, G, D, O 4/3-way function (directional seated valve)

W, WX 4/2-way function (directional spool valve, together with an other 3/2- or 4/2-way directional valve)

6. Type overview

Order examples: VZP1 G 22 - G 24

VZP1 D 45 B1,2 - WG 230

VZP1 H 12 B1,0 M 14 B0,8 - G 12

Nominal voltage (see sect. 2.1, table 5)

G 12, G 24, WG 110, and WG 230

X 12, X 24, X 48, and X 102

L 12, L 24 and L5K24

Additional elements (see sect. 2.1 and 2.2)1 Return pressure stop optional for 3/2-way directional valves

(symbols H, N, M, R)2 Prepared for retrofitting of a pressure switch

(type DG 3. acc. to D 5440)with 2/2-, 3/2-, 4/2- or 3/3-way directional valves (symbols F, C, H, N, M, R, W, WX, P, J)

22 Prepared for retrofitting of two pressure switches (type DG 3. acc. to D 5440)with 4/3-way directional valves (symbols E, G, D, O)

3 ... 7 Pressure switch (DG 3. acc. to D 5440) in the consumer portA (A1) or B (A2, P)with 2/2-, 3/2-, 4/2- or 3/3-way directional valves (symbols F, C, H, N, M, R, W, WX, P, J)

33 ... 77 Two pressure switches (DG 3. acc. to D 5440) in the consumerports A and B with 4/3-way directional valves (symbols E, G, D, O) also available 32, 27 etc.

B.. Orifice insert Ø0.8; Ø1.0; Ø1.2; Ø1.4 mm (symbols E, D, P, H, M, W)

Basic valve type and size

VZP 1

HAWE HYDRAULIK SE


2.1

Clamping modules type SMD 2 and NSMD 2 for actuating hydraulic clamping devices

D 7787Clamping modules (N)SMD 2

April 1998-01

Flow Qmax = 25 lpm

Operation pressure pmax = 120 bar

' One valve for the control of functions, clampingpressure and monitoring of the clamping pressure

' One adjustment element for both clamping pressureand monitoring of the clamping pressure(either manual or electro-proportional)

' The clamping pressure is safely controlled even withlow clamping pressure

' The pressure is controlled directly at the consumerport

' A special protective circuit supervises the switchingposition of the directional valve

' The pressure reduction applies either for both con-sumer ports (A and B) or for (A) only

' Connection hole pattern DIN 24340-A6 with typeNSMD 2


This complete control unit is designed as a manifold mounting valve which is suitable for the actuation of hydraulic clamping de-vices, such as draw-in collets (hollow or massive) at CNC-lathes. A solenoid actuated 4/3- or 4/2-way directional valve and a 3-waypressure reducing valve with integrated pressure switch are housed in a common body.

The 3-way pressure reducing valve reduces the existing pressure in gallery P (primary side) down to the clamping pressure (sec-ondary side). The especially shaped spool of the directional valve creates a control passage to the pressure reducing valve accord-ing to the respective switching position. The micro switch integrated into the pressure reducing valve (monitoring of the clampingpressure) triggers a signal at a certain difference to the set pressure. When the setting of the pressure reducing valve is altered, thepressure switch will follow automatically still maintaining this predefined difference. This feature is unique and makes any readjust-ment of the pressure switch unnecessary.

The clamping module was designed in such a way that the pressure switch gives always a clear acknowledgment signal or super-visory signal over the complete adjustment range. This is accomplished by a switch-over of the pressure switch mode independentof the clamping pressure setting. In the lower adjustment range both the clamping pressure and the flow are supervised. This makessure that the (clamping pressure acknowledgment) signal, triggered by the pressure switch, takes place only after the draw-in col-let is in its final position and the clamping pressure is reached. Therefore the clamping module can supervise the complete clamp-ing procedure (start and end), detect any pressure loss due to a defect (e.g. line rupture, pump malfunction). The curves in sect. 4.1 illustrate the relations of the pressure where a signal is triggered, the flow and the clamping pressure

Several flow patterns (4/3- and 4/2-way) are available for this directional valve, see sect. 3.1 and 3.2. The pressure reduction including pressure monitoring can be opted for consumer ports A and B or for port A only. The internal connection of thecontrol gallery and the respective consumer port is provided only shortly before the final position of the spool is achieved. Beforethis the control gallery is connected to the reflow gallery. This makes sure that both, clamping pressure acknowledgment and pres-sure monitoring, take place only if the directional valve has achieved the selected switching position.

Attention: Take into account the safety regulations in section 6!

Selection criteria: ' Flow patternsl (section 3.1)

' Clamping pressure range (section 2 and page 7)

' Type of pressure adjustment (section 3.2)

' Possibilities for influencing the consumer velocity

(avail. orifices, see sect. 2 and additional functions, see sect. 3.3)

D 7787 page 2

2. Type coding, over view

Order example: SMD 2 K / E / B 2 - G 24

NSMD 2 D1 60 / G 3 R K / B 2,5 - G 24

Nom. voltage of the actuation solenoids (for

directional spool valves, see also D 7451)

G 12 = 12V DC

G 24 = 24V DC

X 24 = 24V DC, no plug

Means of adjustment for the clamping pressure

(also see table 3a and 3b in sect. 3.2)

manual: no coding = Slotted screw + nut

D = Wing screw + nut

R = Wing screw + wing nut

V = Turn knob (self-locking)

L = Turn knob (lockable)

P = Proportional actuation without

function monitoring

Q = Proportional actuation with

function monitoring

electro-proportional:

Basic type (see table 1, section 3.1)

SMD 2 = Standard version with HAWE hole pattern (superior flow

characteristic)

NSMD 2 = Version with hole pattern conforming DIN 24340-A6

For additional versions, see section 7

Orifice in gallery P

(flow limitation, being required if the system is

fed via an accumulator)

no coding = no orifice

B 1 = # 1

B 1,5 = # 1.5

B 2 = # 2.0

B 2,5 = # 2.5

B 3 = # 3.0

Pressure switch

no coding= No pressure switch

K = with tracked pressure switch

Clamping pressure range

G = 5 ... 50 bar

E = 8 ... 80 bar

Min. actuation flow (clamping - undoing)

no coding = Standard (2-4 lpm, see characteristics page 7)

3 = 3-5 lpm

4 = 4-6 lpm

Flow pattern (see table 2, section 3.1)

B, W, K = 4/2-way (pressure monitoring for both sides)

B1, W1, K1 = 4/2-way (pressure monitoring in port A)

D, E, G = 4/3-way (pressure monitoring for both sides)

D1, E1, G1 = 4/3-Way (pressure monitoring in port A)

Additional functions (see section 3.3)

no coding= Standard

66, 60 = Can be throttled in switching position (both sides, single-sided)

2062 = Rapid traverse and creep speed in both directions

206, 307 = Rapid traverse and creep speed in one direction only

D 7787 page 3

3. Available versions, main data3.1 Selection tables

Order examples: SMD 2 G / E - G 24

NSMD 2 K K / B 2,5/ G R - G 24

Table 1: Basic type, connection hole pattern

Coding

(type and

size)

Connection hole

pattern (manifold

mounting) 1)

Flow

Qmax

Operation

pressure

pmax

SMD 2

NSMD 2

standard with HAWE

hole pattern (superior

flow characteristic)

hole pattern conf.

DIN 24340-A

25 l/min 120 bar

1) For nom. size,

see dimen-

sional draw-

ings in sect. 5


Suited for type Coding and flow pattern

4/3-way 4/2-way

SMD 2

NSMD 2

Version without pressure switch

The symbols below must be completed with the flow pattern symbols above. Illustrations below are with pressure switch (coding K).

Version with throttle (coding B... )

and pressure switch (coding K)

D

E

G

D

E

G

D1

E1

G1

D1

E1

G1

B

B1

B

B1

W

W1

W

W1

K

K1

K

K1

4/3-way:

Coding D, E, G

and D1, E1, G1

4/2-way:

Coding B and B1 Coding W and W1 Coding K and K1

Orifice in gallery P

(For avail. diameter, see section 2)

Pressure switch

no coding = without

K = with tracked pressure switch

D 7787 page 4

3.2 Actuations for adjustment of the clamping pressure

Order example NSMD 2 K / G K / B 2,5 - G 24R

NSMD 2 K / G K / B 2,5 - G 24P

Table 3a: Manually adjustable adjustment device

Table 3b: Electro-proportional actuation

Coding

no coding

D

R

V

L

P

Q

Description (for illustrations, see unit dimensions sect. 5)

Slotted screw + nut

Wing screw + nut

Wing screw + wing nut

Turn knob (self-locking)

Turn knob (lockable)

The adjustment knob can only be manipulated, if the key is plugged in.

The turn knob is disengaged when the key is removed, disabling

(arbitrary) alternation of the pressure setting.

electro-proportional adjustment

electro-proportional adjustment

with additional function supervisioning

Coding, description, detailed flow pattern symbol

P Without function monitoring

Functional description

With function monitoringQ

The clamping module type (N) SMD 2 can be adjusted

manually and electro-proportional by means of a directly

mounted ancillary block. Thus enabling electro-proportional control

of the pressure at ports A or B, within the respective pressure range.

The system can therefore be operated either from the control panel

of the machine or directly from an external control

system such as SPS, CNC, PC. An additional safety function main-

taines the pressure setting even if the power supply fails.

The electro-proportional ancillary block consists a piloting pressure

reducing valve ; , a check valve < , a control piston = applying

force on the spring > of the 2-way pressure reducing ? valve in theclamping module.

The piloting pressure reducing valve generates a proportional

control pressure which is lower than the one apparent in the pres-

sure gallery. This control pressure acts on the piston, pre-loading a

spring which loads the control spool of the 2-way pressure reduc-

ing valve.

Safety function:

The additional 3/2-way function of the piloting pressure reducing

valve has to open up the check valve, enabling free flow from the

pressure reducing valve to the control piston, before the proportional

pressure regulation actually takes place. In case of a power

failure (e.g. failure of the electronics or cable disruption) the piston

of the piloting pressure reducing valve will jump back in its initial

position, the check valve will close and lock in the pressure appar-

ent at the control piston.

The clamping pressure will drop only approx. 4% if this should hap-

pen.

Function monitoring:

An additional pressure switch in the control line to the check valve

supervises the function of the complete control electronics and the

piloting pressure reducing valve.

Electrical control:

A proportional amplifier is necessary for the control e.g. type EV1M2

(D 7831/1) or EV1G1 (D 7837).


D 7787 page 5

Order examples 1: SMD 2 G1 /E V K - G 2466

Order examples 2:

NSMD 2 / E R K / B 2,0 - G 24D 307

SMD 2 / G R K / B 2,5 - G 24G 2062

3.3 Additional functions

Table 4: Clamping module with throttle 1)

(Limitation of the max. velocity)

Table 5: Clamping module section - tailstock 1)

(Selection of the currently available types, further variants on inquiry)

Pressure reducing function

in the switching position

Throttle in the switching

positions

Coding 66 60 166 160

Spool flow

pattern

(here for

type NSMD,

analogous

available for

type SMD

G..

E..

D..

a and b a and b b b

a and b b a and b b

Complete flow pattern symbol

(Example G 166)

Coding Use and description Flow pattern symbols 2)

G 2062

D 2062

E 2062

G 307

D 307

E 307

G 207

D 207

E 207

Rapid traverse and creep speed in both directions

' Approach tailstock in rapid traverseActuate solenoid "a"

Orifice # 2.5 in the gallery PNo function of pressure reducing valve and pressure switch

' Approach tailstock in creep speedActuate solenoid "c"

Orifice # 0.6 (2 x # 0.4) P → AFull function of pressure reducing valve and pressure switch

' Retract tailstock in rapid traverseActuate solenoid “b”

Orifice # 2.5 in the gallery P, throttle # 2 P → BNo function of pressure reducing valve and pressure switch

' Retract tailstock in creep speedActuate solenoid "d"

Orifice # 0.6 (2 x # 0.4) P → BNo function of pressure reducing valve and pressure switch

Rapid traverse and creep speed (tailstock motion) one way only with

simultaneous limitation the rapid traverse (throttling).

Rapid traverse in opposite direction (retracting the tailstock)

' Approach tailstock in rapid traverseActuate solenoid "a"

Orifice # 2 in the gallery PVersion .207 = Fixed rapid traverse speed; no function of pressure

reducing valve and pressure switch

Version .307 = Speed limitation possible by means of an orifice (P →A);full function of pressure reducing valve and

pressure switch

' Approach tailstock in creep speedActuate solenoid "c"

Orifice # 0.7 (2 x # 0.5) P → AFull function of pressure reducing valve and pressure switch

' Retract tailstock in rapid traverseActuate solenoid "b"

Orifice # 2 in gallery PNo function of pressure reducing valve and pressure switch

NSMD 2 D1 /G R K / B 2,5 - G 2460

3)

3)

1) The pick-up of the load signal is not influ-

enced by the orifice / throttle as it is lo-

cated directly at the consumer port.

2) Illustration for type SMD..., analogous

available for type NSMD..

3) The orifice diameter can be selected ac-

cording to the required consumer speed

(on request)

Type G (D, E) 2062

Type G (D, E) 207

G (D, E) 307

D 7787 page 6

4. Further parameters4.1 General and hydraulic

Type coding SMD 2 or NSMD 2 see section 3

Design Clamping module (combination of directional spool valve, pressure reducing valve a. tracked

pressure switch)

Installed position any

Ports P = pressure inlet

R = reflow

A, B = consumers

M = for pressure gauge (on the mounting area)

Mx = for pressure gauge (top side of the valve)

Port size P, R, A, B and M = NW see hole patterns section 5

Mx = G 1/8

Surface termination All surfaces corrosion inhibiting gas nitrided

Mass (weight) approx. kg Basic type

SMD 2

NSMD 2

Spool coding

D.. to K1..

B(1) and W(1)

manual

2.7

2.2

P and Q

3.8

3.3

Actuation

electro-proportional

Version ..2062 + 1.1 kg

Version ..207, ..307 + 0.6 kg

Operation pressure P = max. 120 bar

A, B, M, Mx = acc. to the pressure range

R = 20 bar

Pressure fluid Hydraulic fluid (DIN 51524 table 1 to 3); ISO VG 10 to 68 (DIN 51519)

Viscosity range: min. 4; max. 1500 mm2/s

Optimal operation range: 10...500 mm2/s

Also suitable are biologically degradable pressure fluids of the type HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and

HEES (synth. Ester) at operation temperatures up to +70°C.

Temperatures Ambient: -40...+60°C

Oil: -25...+80°C, (Note: Viscosity range!)

Start temperature down to -40°C are allowable (Note: Viscosity range!), as long as the operation

temperature during consequent running is at least 20K (Kelvin) higher.

Biodegradable pressure fluids: Pay attention to manufacturer's information. With regard to the

compatibility with sealing materials do not exceed +70°C.

/p-Q-curve

Oil viscosity during measurement approx. 60 mm2/s

SMD 2 NSMD 2

Flow Q (l/min)Flow Q (l/min)

Back p

ressure

|

p (b

ar)

Back p

ressure

|p

(b

ar)

D 7787 page 7

Clamping pressure / trigger pressure - curve

(Pressure ranges E and G)

Clamping pressure / trigger flow - curve

(Pressure ranges E and G) - standard version

Trig

ger

pre

ssure

(b

ar)

1)

Cla

mp

ing

pre

ssure

(b

ar)

Cla

mp

ing

pre

ssure

(b

ar)

Trig

ger

flo

w (l/m

in) 1

)

Clamping pressure (bar) Clamping pressure (bar)

Oil viscosity during measurement approx. 60 mm2/s

Example:

A clamping pressure of 11 bar will result in a trigger pressure of $ 11 bar during clamping whereas the resulting trigger pressure will

be % 9.2 bar during undoing. The trigger flow is % 2 lpm during clamping and $ 4 lpm during undoing. This means that the contactswitch will trigger a signal, if either if the work piece is clamped and the clamping pressure is achieved (no more cylinder movement)

or the flow drops below 2 lpm. A signal will be triggered during undoing if a flow of 4 lpm is exceeded or the clamping pressure

drops below 9.2 bar.

Pressure range of G = 5 ... 50 bar

Pressure

range

G

E

Pressure range of E = 8 ... 80 bar

Flow Q (l/min)Flow Q (l/min)

clam

ping

undoi

ng

clamping

undoing

1) System pressure when adjusting the

pressure range G ppu = 70 bar

pressure range E ppu = 100 bar

The trigger flow changes insignificantly in dependence of the

system pressure.

Trigger pressure is the pressure at which the pressure switch triggers a signal at a definite clamping pressure.

Trigger flow is the flow which must flow through the valve (at a definite clamping pressure) enabling the pressure switch to trigger

a signal.

Attention: The maximum leakage must be smaller than the flow necessary for "undoing".

It is possible to recalibrate the clamping pressure / trigger flow - curve. For setting (by HAWE) and order coding, see

sect. 2 “min. trigger flow ”).

D 7787 page 8

4.2 Electrical data

electro-proportional

control:

Solenoid

Nom. voltage UN

Coil resistance R20 ()

Current, cold I20 (A)

Nom. current IN (A)

Power, cold P20 (W)

Nominal power PN (W)

Relative duty cycle


Protection class DIN 40050

Nec. dither frequency

Pressure switch

Pressure setting (bar)

Pressure resistance (bar)

Switch

switching performance (VA)

max. current (V)

Protection class

Switching frequency

Mechanical service life

Diaphragm material

12V DC

6

2.0

1.26

24

9.5

24V DC

24

1.0

0.63

24

9.5

Co. Suco type: 0166 41503 1 059

30

up to 300

NO-contact

100

42

IP 65; pins IP 00

200 / min

106 cycles

NBR

100% ED

DIN 43650 B (industrial standard)

IP 65

100 ... 150 Hz

conforming VDE 0580

Control via electronic

intensifier

e.g. type: EV1G1-12/24 (D 7837)

type: EV1M1-12/24 (D 7831/1)

Min. current: The solenoid current should be set via the Imin - poten-

tiometer in such a way, that the requested min. pressure

pmin % 5 bar (system pressure 5 ... 50 bar) or pmin % 10 bar

(system pressure 10 ... 80 bar) is achieved.

Max. current: Imax must not exceed the nom. current IN of the solenoid.

Adjustment in-

structions for min.

and max. current:

Function

monitoring:

Consumer pressure /

solenoid current - curve

Directional spool

valve and pres-

sure switch:

Solenoid

Nom. voltage UN

Nominal power PN (W)

Relative duty cycle

Device connector

Protection class DIN 40050

Pressure switch

Mechanical service life

Resistor load

Inductive load

Circuitry of the pressure switch

12V DC

24.4

24V DC

24.4

110V AC

24.4

230V AC

24.4

100% ED (duty cycle) at ambient temperature < 40°C

DIN 43650 A Pg9

Solenoid IP 65, plug IP 65 (plug fitted)

Co. Burgess type F1T8-ZBK

107 cycles

up to 30V DC 5A up to 15V DC 10A

up to 30V DC 3A up to 15V DC 10A

Idle position 1-2

Switching position 1-3

conforming VDE 0580

f = 150 Hz

f = 100 Hz

Co

nsum

er

pre

ssure

p A

, B

(bar)

Current I (A)

24V DC

12V DC

f & dither frequency

D 7787 page 9

5. Unit dimensions5.1 Type SMD 2


Coding D, D1, E, E1, G, G1, K, K1

Orientation

with B, B1

Orientation

with W, W1

Port for pressure gauge Mx = G 1/8

Solenoid may

be rotated

3 x 90°

Pressure switch, coding K

(Plug may be rotated 3 x 90°).

See also notes for assembly

on page 10!

Pressure reduc-

ing valve with

standard adjust-

ment mode (no

coding)

For coding D to L,

see below!

Port seals; O-rings NBR 90 Sh:

A, B, P = 9.25x1.78

R = 10.82x1.78

M = 5.28x1.78

There is a seal

kit (DS 7787-11)

available !

Differing adjustment modes for the pressure reducing valve

coding D

coding R

coding V

coding L

electro-proportion control coding P and Q

Coding. P

Coding. Q

Required hole pattern of the manifold

Cable gland Pg 9, Plug may be rotated 4 x 90°

Cable gland

Pg 9

M6,

6 deep

Coding B, B1, W, W1

Plug may

be rotated

by 180°

1) additionally with type ..66 or ..166 (sect. 3.3 table 4) 2) additionally with type ..60 or ..160 (sect. 3.3 table 4)

4 socket head screws ISO 4762 M6x55-8.8-A2K,

torque 8 Nm

D 7787 page 10D 7787

Coding D, D1, E, E1, G, G1, K, K1 Coding B, B1

Coding W, W1

Port for pressure gauge Mx = G 1/8

Solenoid may be

rotated 3 x 90°

Pressure switch, coding K

(Plug may be rotated 3 x 90°).

Port seals; O-rings NBR 90 Sh:

P, R, A, B = 9.25x1.78

M = 2.90x1.78

There is a seal kit (DS 7787-12) available !

Required hole pattern of the manifold

5.2 Type NSMD 2

Cable gland Pg 9, Plug may be rotated 4 x 90°

Pressure reducing valve,

here with adjustment

mode D. For other ad-

justment modes, see

type SMD 2 on page 9.

M5, 6 deep

Installation of the pressure switch

The plug is provided with a rubber seal, tightening

the screw (thread M3) with a torque of 25...30 Nm

ensures proper sealing.

Procedure if no torque wrench is handy: Screw in the

screw until the plug contacts the surface and turn

the screw 1.5 turns more.

Attention: Overtightening of the screw may cause

mistriggering of the contact switch!

4 socket head screws

ISO 4762 M5x95-12.9 galvanized

torque 6 Nm

1) additionally with type ..66 or ..166 (sect. 3.3 table 4)

2) additionally with type ..60 or ..160 (sect. 3.3 table 4)

5.3 Clamping module sections for the tailstock

D 7787 page 11

Type SMD 2 G2062 / ...

Type SMD 2 .207 / ...

SMD 2 .307 / ...

For missing dimensions see sect. 5.1 !

Velocity limitation for

“ Approach tailstock in rapid traverse ”

(throttle P → A),no actuation with version .207/..

For missing dimensions see sect. 5.1 !

See also "Installation of

the pressure switch" on

page 10!

See also "Installation of

the pressure switch" on

page 10!

D 7787 page 12

6. Notes for the safety

The following notes for the safety should be observed when doing the layout for the machinery or the control system as well as the

later use of it. They should be added to the corresponding documentation also, if necessary.

' Operator protection classification:Category 2 (conforming DIN EN 954-1) under the prerequisite of a cyclical supervision (testing) of the micro switch installed in

the pressure switch. This can take place e.g. at every operation of the directional valve.

The following notes are basis for this statement:

The micro switch incorporated in the pressure switch is used as a "switch for the operator protection". This usually takes a re-

lays lift off system (according to EN 60947-5-1: 1991, sect. 3)

The utilized micro switch does not fulfill these requirements (like a switch conforming DIN VDE 0630).

Nevertheless the " Berufsgenossenschaftlichen Instituts für Arbeitssicherheit Fachbereich 5, Maschinenschutz/Steuerung-

stechnik" (official German approval institute for operator safety) specifies in a letter dated 25.09.97, that a comparable safety can

be achieved with such a "less reliable" device (micro switch) by means of cyclical supervision.

' Function safety of the pressure switch:Correct grounding of the valve is required (operator safety)

(The micro switch won't trigger a signal no matter if it fails or if it detects "No clamping pressure")

' Travel dependent stroke control for the collet:A travel dependent stroke control (e.g. by means of a limit switch) is still required for the collet as any mechanical blocking would

let the clamping pressure rise and the pressure switch would trigger an acknowledge signal. Such a blocking may be caused by

e.g. swarf or incorrect positioning of the work piece in the collet

' Control of the release movement of the collet:The clamping modules are usually equipped with pressure switches for consumer ports A and B and the flow pattern symbols

B1, W1 etc. are the only exception, where the pressure is monitored only on one side. Therefore the following must be observed:

Internal clamping: The control for the machine tool must cope with the situation that the "clamping pressure" will rise although

the cylinder for the collet reaches its mechanical stop during a release sequence. Therefore this acknowledged signal from the

pressure switch must not be sensed by the control system under this condition (misinterpretation).

External clamping: Under this condition the cylinder would have the same direction of movement but this time the acknowledged

signal from the pressure switch has to be sensed by the control system as it is a real clamping movement.

' Installation of the pressure switchThe plug is provided with a rubber seal, tightening the screw (thread M3) with a torque of 25...30 Nm ensures proper sealing.

Procedure if no torque wrench is handy: Screw in the screw until the plug contacts the surface and turn the screw 1.5 turns more.

Attention: Overtightening of the screw may cause mistriggering of the contact switch!

The valves are supplied with a tag ex-works which gives the same information and this shouldn't be removed.

D 7787 page 13

7. Circuit examples and possible combinations

Example 1: HK43LDT/1M - Z Z2,7/9,8 - AN21F2 - D45 - F50 -BA2 - NSMD2K/GRK/0 - 1 - G24

Compact hydraulic power pack

with connection block

type HK43LDT/1M - Z Z2,7/9,8 -

- AN21F2 - D45 - F50

Clamping module with sub-plate

type NSMD2K/GRK/0 - G24

Travel stop

monitoring

Clamping device

Stand-still monitoring

Releasable double

check valve

Compact hydraulic power

pack (D 7600-4)

with connection blocks

(Sk 7881 a. Sk 7788)

Clamping module

D 7787 page 14

Example 2: HK43L/1M - Z9,8 - AL21F2 - F60/70 - 2 -BA2

Compact hydraulic power

pack with connection block

type HK43L/1M - Z9,8 -

- AL21F2 - F60/70 - 2

- SMD2K/GRK/B2,5/0 -

- SMD2 D307/GRK/B2/0 - 11 - G24

Clamping module with sub-plate

type SMD2 D307/GRK/B2/0 - 11 - G24Clamping module with sub-plate

type SMD2K/GRK/B2,5/0

Tailstock sleeve

Travel stop monitoring Clamping device

Stand-still monitoring

Releasable check

valve

Releasable double

check valve

Compact hydraulic power pack (D 7600-4)

with connection blocks (D 6905 AF/1 and Sk 7788) Clamping modules

End plate

coding 11

D 7787 page 15

Example 3: HKF438LD/1M - Z11,3 - AL21D D10 - F70/80 - 2 -BA2

Compact hydraulic power pack with connection blocks

type HKF438LD/1M - Z11,3 - AL21D D10 - F70/80 - 2

- BA2 - SMD2K/E/B2,5/0

- SMD2K/E/B2,5/0 -- BVZP1F - W2B1,2 W2B1,2/0 - CZ5/20/5 - WN1H/0/22 - 1 - G24

Valve bank

type BVZP1F - W2B1,2 W2B1,2 /0 - CZ5/20/5 - WN1H/0/22 - 1 - G24

Valve bank

BA2 A5 -

- SMD2K/GRK/B3/0

- SMD2D207/GRK/B2/0 - 1 - G24

Compact hydraulic power pack

(D 7600-4) with connection blocks

(Sk 7881 and Sk 7788)Clamping module and valve

bank BVZP1 (D 7785 B)

Directional seated valves type VP 1

zero leakage, intended for general hydraulic applications and grease lubing systems

D 7915Directional seated valves

type VP 1

May 2009-01


2.2


Flow Qmax = 15 lpm


1. General informationThe valves type VP 1 are zero leakage, seated cone valves available as 2/2-, 3/2- and 4/2-way directional valves.The internal pressure balance enables an arbitrary flow direction and maximum pressure for all ports.The essential internal parts operate maintenance-free in the medium and are hardened and ground.The actuation is separated from the hydraulic fluid, therefore any interaction between control elements and the pressure fluid is prevented, i.e. a temperature dependant fluid viscosity won't harm the movement of the control elements, side effect is that gumming due to excessive fluid temperature is prevented.Gumming or sticking caused by higher temperature cannot occur.The individual manifold mounting valves (2/2- and 3/2-way functions) feature the same connection hole pattern and actuation as thedirectional valves sizes 1 acc. to D 7300, i.e. all connection blocks and actuations listed there may be utilized.Main field of application for these valves are lube systems especially when lubricants with high viscosity e.g. oil or grease are used.Any other fluid with similar viscosity may be suited as well, as long as it is compatible with the seal material.

Note: Observe restriction, when outside use is intended. The valve has to be protected from intruding moisture.

Individual valve Individual valve with connection

block for pipe connection

D 7915 page 2


Order examples: VP 1 - R - D

VP 1 - W - 3/4 - G 24



Table 4: Optional connection connection block for direct pipe mounting


VP 1 Flow Qmax = 15 lpm

Oper. pressure pmax = 400 bar

R S Z G W 1)

Cod-ing

1/4

3/8

1/2

3/4

Ports A, B, C, P, R (ISO 228/1)(BSPP)

1/4

3/8

1/2

3/4

Suited forflow patternsymbol

R, S, Z, G

R, S, Z

W


R, S Z G W

Note: Valves with flow pattern R, S and Z can be also combined withconnections blocks intended for directional seated valves size 1acc. to D 7300.

1) Only available with solenoid actuation

For main data also

see section 2.2.1

UN = 12V DC

UN = 24V DC

UN = 110V AC, 50/60 Hz (98V DC) 2)

UN = 230V AC, 50/60 Hz (205V DC) 2)

Symbols

Solenoid

Hydraulic Pneumatic

pin

Manual

roller

Mechanical

Control pressure: pSt min = 12 bar

pSt max = 700 bar

Control pressure: pSt min = 4 bar

pSt max = 15 bar

Actuation force: 25 ... 28 N



Actuation torque: 63 Ncm

For othervoltage, seesect. 2.2.1

Hydraulic

Pneumatic

Mechanical(roller)

Mechanical(pin)

Manual(lever)

Manual(turn knob)

A 12

A 24

---

---

N 12

N 24

---

---

UN = 12V DC

UN = 24V DC

UN = 110V AC, 50/60 Hz (98V DC) 2)

UN = 230V AC, 50/60 Hz (205V DC) 2)

GM 12

GM 24

WGM 110 1)

WGM 230 1)

UN = 24V DCG 24 EX

XM 12

XM 24

XM 98

XM 205

LM 12

LM 24

---

---

Coding

Central plug(serie)

Central plugwith adapterwithout std.plug

Central plugwith adapterwith std.plug

coil with std. plug

Explosion proof

coil without std. plug

coil with std. plug and LED

2) DC-solenoid (98V DC, 205V DC) with bridgerectifier in the plug

H

P

K

T

F

D

lever turn knob

G 12

G 24

WG 110 2)

WG 230 2)

Solenoidstandard

Solenoidwith replaceablecoil

UN = 24V DCG 24 EX

H

P

K

T

F

D

D 7915 page 3

2.1 Further parameters

General and hydraulic parameters

Bac

kp

ress

ure|

p(b

ar)

Bac

kp

ress

ure|

p(b

ar)

Bac

kp

ress

ure|

p(b

ar)

Bac

kp

ress

ure|

p(b

ar)

Flow Q (lpm)

Coding R and S

Coding G Coding W

Coding Z

Flow Q (lpm)


Fluid viscosity during testsapprox.. 60 mm2/s

Nomenclature 2/2-, 3/2- and 4/2-way directional valve

Design Seated cone valve

Mounting and Manifold mounting, optional via connection block, see dimensional drawings at sect. 3.1 and3.3

Installed position Any; Best Vertically with actuation upwards

Flow direction Any, conf. flow pattern symbol in table 2

Over lapping negative (transverse of one into the other switching position is gradual and only completed whenthe final position is achieved). All passages are interconnected during the switching operation(3/2-way directional valves).

Permissible operation pressure pmax = 400 bar, All ports are pressure resistant up to pmax

Static over load capacity approx. 2 x pmax (applies to valves in idle position)

Permissible flow Qmax = 15 lpm; Observe the area ratio with double acting consumers (differential cylinders) as

the reflow might be higher than the inflow.

Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conf. DIN 51524 part 1 to 3: ISO VG 10 to 68 conf. DIN 51519Viscosity limits: min. approx. 4, max. approx. 800 mm2/sOptimal operation: approx. 10 ... 200 mm2/sAlso suitable for biological degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) andHEES (Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70 °CGrease, based on mineral or synthetic oils, with NLGI-classification 000 ... 2 acc. to DIN 51818up to operation temperature of approx. +70°C.

Temperature range Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80 C; Fluid: -25 ... +80°C, Note the viscosity rangeRestriction for version with ex-proof solenoid:

Ambient: -35 ... +40°C; Fluid: max. 70°CPermissible temperature during start: -40°C (observe start-viscosity!), as long as the servicetemperature is at least 20K higher for the following operationBiological degradable pressure fluids: Observe manufacturer's specifications. Considering thecompatibility with seal material not over +70 °C.Attention: Observe the restrictions regarding the perm. duty cycles of the solenoids in

sect. 2.2.1 !

|p-Q curves (guideline)

Basic valve complete with actuation:

Actuation mode

R, S, Z 0.7 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4

G 1.0 0.8 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

W 1.0 --- --- --- --- --- ---


Flowpatternsymbols

Connection block(without valve):

Coding 1/4 = 0.5 3/8 = 0.51/2 = 1.03/4 = 1.2

Sole-noid

Hy-draulic

Pneu-matic

Mechanical(roller) (pin)

Manual(lever) (turn

knob)

D 7915 page 4

2.2 Actuation modes2.2.1 Solenoid actuation (standard)

All solenoids are manufactured and tested conforming DIN VDE 0580.

The given device sockets are automati-cally contained in the valve coding. For other plugs e.g. with clamp diode,economy circuits or LED's, see D 7163.

Curves in the margin apply only to nonneighboring valves!Loovers should be provided when thesevalves are installed in control cabinets!General rule for valve banks and ambienttemperature above 40°C: It is advisable tolocate at least one unactuated valve be-tween valves actuated simultaneously orfor longer periods. Otherwise neighboringvalves would hinder heat dissipation andheat each other up.

1) Only with adaptor, see sect. 2,table 2.

Relative duty cycle

Plugs and circuitry DC-voltage AC-voltage

G 24A 24N 24L 2424V DC

20

0.83

G 12A 12N 12L 1212V DC

20

1.7

Coding

Nom. voltage

Nominal power

Current

GM 12XM 12LM 12

12V DC

26.2

2.2

GM 24XM 24LM 24

24V DC

26

1.1

WGM 110 1)------

110V AC(50/60 Hz)

20

0.2

WGM 230 1)------

230V AC(50/60 Hz)

20

0.1

G 24 EX------

24V DC

23

0.9

Switching time (reference value) On: approx. 100 ms, Off: 50 ms (G..) and 125 ms (WG..)

Switching/hour approx. 2000, approximately evenly distributed

Protection class IP 54 acc. to IEC 60529 (plug properly mounted)IP 65 acc. to IEC 60529 (plug properly mounted)IP 67 acc. to IEC 60529 with explosion-proof solenoid

G.., A.., N.., L..:GM.., XM.., LM..:G..EX:


Contact temperature approx. 98°C, with ambient temperature 20°C

Switch-off energy 0.24 Ws (max. guideline figure + approx. 10% acc. to measurements at UN and 20°C)

Relative duty cycle 100% ED (stamping on the solenoid), but observe the max. duty cycle !

Relative duty cycle duringoperation(100% ED stamping on thesolenoid)

Relative duty cycle %ED-5 min Continuous operation

Am

bie

nt

tem

per

atu

re

U(°

C)

Coding G... Coding WG..

Terminal atthe solenoid

Hirschmann plug MSD 1(G..)

Adaptor + plug AMSD 1-MSD 3 + MSD 4-209 P10

Note: The electric data for G and WG solenoids are only guideline and may very slightly depend onmanufacture.

Electrical data for explosion-proof solenoids

ATEX-Certificate of conformity TÜV-A-03 ATEX 0017 XCoding II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 T4

II 2 D Ex mbD 21 T135°C Oper. duration 100% EDDuty cycle IP 67 (IEC 60529)Nom. voltage UN 24 V DC

Power PN 23 W

Restrictions for use:

Ambient temperature -35 ... +40°Cmax. fluid temperature +70°Cel. protection against overload(conf. IEC 60127) IF < 1.6-A-T

Surface coating Housing galvanically zinc coatedCoil and connection cavity are moulded

Electrical connection 3x0.5 mm2


Attention : Protect the complete valve against direct sun light.Observe the operation manuals B 03/2004 and B ATEX!Electrical lay-out and testing conforming EN 60079, VDE 0170-1, VDE 0170-5

Note:

Only 40 % ED are permissible ifthe valves are neighboring, it isadditionally recommended thatneighboring valves are not actu-ated simultaneously.

)ED(%100T

tt einr ⋅=

PE 1 2 Housing

UN

PN (W)

IN (A)

T (operation cycle period)

t on

WG 230 ------

230V AC

30.2

0.1

WG 110------

110V DC

28.6

0.2

Time

D 7915 page 5

Special voltage

The table below lists all voltage available incl. the one listed on page 2.

Notes to the lay-out:

DC-voltage:The voltage specification (solenoid lay-out)shall correspond to the actual supply voltage(perm. tolerance ± 5...10%).A reduced voltage leads to reduced solenoidforce, an exceeded voltage causes an unper-missible solenoid heat built-up.

AC-voltage:The voltage specification shall correspond tothe actual supply voltage (50/60 Hz).The solenoid DC-voltage is approx. 0.9 UAC-2V because of the utilized rectifier plug.

The table above lists the corresponding DC-solenoids for various AC supply voltage(e.g. for 110V AC 50 Hz, solenoid with UN = 98V DC & stamping on the solenoid!).

Examples: VP1 - R - G 48VP 1 - Z - X 110VP 1 - W - WG 200

The specified power ratings are only guide line figures, they may vary slightly depending on voltage and manufacturer. The cold current can be calculated: I20 = PN/UN (see examples)

G 12

G 24

G 36

G 42

G 48

G 80

G 98

G 110

G 125

G 185

G 205

G 220

GM 12

GM 24

GM 36

GM 42

GM 48

GM 80

GM 98

GM 110

GM 205

GM 230

WG 24

WG 42

WG 48

WG 110

WG 200

WG 230

WGM 24

WGM 42

WGM 48

WGM 110

WGM 230

G 24 EX

P , 26,5 W

DC (& UN [V])

P , 20 W

Voltage specification

P , 28 W

AC 50/60 Hz

P , 20 W

ExplosionproofversionP , 23 W

2.2.2 Further actuation modes

Hydraulic (coding H) The actuation element is a single acting control piston with spring return.The switching position is maintained as long as the control pressure is applied. The valve will return automatically to its idle position (0) when the control pressure is removed.The control piston is sealed and shows zero leakage.

Means of control OilControl pressure max = 700 bar

min = 12 barControl displacement 0.4 cm3

Temperature -40 ... +80°C (ambient and control fluid)

Pneumatic (coding P) The actuation element is a single acting control piston with spring return.The switching position is maintained as long as the control pressure is applied. The valve will return automatically to its idle position 0 when the control pressure is removed.The control piston is sealed and shows zero leakage.

Means of control Compessed air, lubed and filteredControl pressure max =15 bar

min = 4 barControl displacement 1.0 cm3

Temperature -20 ... +70°C (ambient and compressed air)

Mechanic (coding K and T) The actuation element is a pin with spring return. This pin is either directly actuated or via leverwith roller following a cam. Switching position a of the valve is achieved when the pin is presseddown (see dimensional drawing sect. 3.2).

Actuation force = 25 ... 28 N (coding K)= 51 ... 57 N (coding T)

Actuation travel see dimensional drawing sect. 3.2

Manual (coding F) The actuation element is a lever acting on a pin with spring return. Switching position a of the valveis achieved when the pin is pressed down.

Actuation force = 25 ... 28 NActuation travel see dimensional drawing sect. 3.2

(coding D) Actuation with detent. The achieved switching position a or 0 changes with every 90° turn, no matter of the rotation direction.

Actuation torque = 63 NcmActuation travel see dimensional drawing sect. 3.2

D 7915 page 6

3. Unit dimensions


3.1 Valve (illustration with solenoid actuation)

Symbol

R and S

Symbol G

Symbol Z

Symbol W

Adapter may bemounted, rotatedby 22.5° 2) or 180°

Press down the so-lenoid pin hiddenunder the rubbercap, max. actua-tion force 80 (N)

Sealing of the ports:

Coding R, S and Z: A, B and C = O-ring 6.07x1.78 NBR 90 ShCoding G: A, B, C and D = O-ring 8.73x1.78 NBR 90 ShCoding W: A, B, R and P = O-ring 6.07x1.78 NBR 90 Sh


Cablegland

app

rox.

127

app

rox.

116

app

rox.

117

1) This dimension depends onthe manufacturer and may beup to 11 mm longer acc. to DIN EN 175 301-803 A.

2) Not all angled positions arepossible, when the valves areneighboring

Versions with replaceable coil Explosion-proof solenoid

1)

app

rox.

84

app

rox.

84

3.2 Further actuation modes

Cam for roller leverStart direction

Do not use as astop!

Do not useas a stop!

M5,6.5 deep

Idle

trav

el

Do not useas a stop!

Switching position 0

Switchingposition a

Coding H Coding P Coding T

Arrangement with flow pattern R, S and Z

Coding K


Coding F


Arrangement withflow pattern G and W

Arrangement with flow pattern G and W

Arrangement with flow pattern G and W

Coding D

a/f 27

D 7915 page 7

D 7915 page 8

3.3 Connection blocks

Type VP 1- R(S) - 1/4

VP 1- R(S) - 3/8

VP 1- R(S) - 1/2

Type VP 1- Z - 1/4

VP 1- Z - 3/8

VP 1- Z - 1/2

Type VP 1- W - 3/4Type VP 1- G - 1/4

VP 1- G - 3/8

M6, 10 deep

M6, 10 deep

M6, 10 deep

Thru-hole10.5

Type

H B a a1 a2 l l1

VP1-R(S, Z)-1/4 G 1/4 30 45 29 21 20 10 5

VP1-R(S, Z)-3/8 G 3/8 30 45 27 23 18 10 5

VP1-R(S)-1/2 G 1/2 45 50 25 25 -- 10 5

VP1-Z-1/2 G 1/2 45 50 20 20 25 5 --

Ports A, B, C, P, R conformingISO 228/1:(BSPP)

3/2- and 2/2-way cartridge valve type BVEfor any flow direction, zero leakage,

all ports pressure resistant

July 2012-02


2.2


D 7921Directional seated cartridge

valve type BVE

Flow Qmax = 300 lpmPerm. pressure pmax = 500 bar

Cartridge valve Version with connection block

Additional valves with same function:o Type EM, EMP D 7490/1o Type BVG 1, BVP 1 D 7765 (Qmax = 20 lpm, pmax = 400 bar)o Type NBVP 16 D 7765 N (Qmax = 20 lpm, pmax = 400 bar)o Type BVG 3, BVP 3 D 7400 (Qmax = 60 lpm, pmax = 315 bar)

1. GeneralThe solenoid actuated 2/2- and 3/2-way directional valves type BVE are designed as seated cone valves. All ports are equally pressure resistant due to the internal pressure compensation.The valve returns automatically into its idle position because of the spring return, while not actuated. The valves are completely made of steel, with all functional internal components being hardened, permanently lubed by the hydraulic fluid. As these valves are designed as cartridge valve, installation is most simple and quick.The solenoid coil can be easily replaced, without opening the hydraulic system e.g. when a different voltage is required.There are also individual connection blocks available for these valve, enabling direct pipe connection.

BVE 1

BVE 3

BVE 5

Flow

Qmax(lpm)

20

70

300

Pressure

pmax

(bar)

500

400

400

Symbols

R S Z


Order example: BVE 3 Z - B 2,5 - G 24 - 1/2

Table 3, see page 2

Table 3 and 3a, see page 3

Table 2,see page 2

Table 4, see page 3

Type BVE 5 only with symbol R

D 7921 page 2

Coding # System or accumulator (mm) charging pressure range

B 0,6 0.6 ≤ 500 barB 0,8 0.8 ≤ 500 barB 1,1 1.1 ≤ 500 barB 1,3 1.3 ≤ 400 barB 1,5 1.5 ≤ 210 bar

-- (without hole) --B 0,4 0.4 ≤ 500 barB 0,5 0.5 ≤ 500 barB 0,6 0.6 ≤ 500 barB 0,7 0.7 ≤ 500 barB 0,8 0.8 ≤ 500 barB 0,9 0.9 ≤ 500 barB 1,0 1.0 ≤ 500 barB 1,1 1.1 ≤ 500 barB 1,3 1.3 ≤ 400 barB 1,5 1.5 ≤ 210 barB 2,0 2.0 ≤ 70 barB 2,5 2.5 ≤ 30 barB 4,0 4.0 --

B 2,5 2.5 ≤ 320 barB 3 3 ≤ 170 barB 3,5 3.5 ≤ 90 barB 4 4 ≤ 50 bar

B 3,0 3.0 ≤ 400 barB 4,0 4.0 ≤ 400 barB 5,0 5.0 ≤ 400 barB 6,0 6.0 ≤ 190 bar

Basic type,size

BVE 1.. - 1/4

BVE 1.. - 3/8

BVE 3.. - 1/2

BVE 5.. - 1

Table 2: Orifice (additional element) only available for versions with indiv. connection block for pipe connection, see table 4, For individual orders, see sect. 5.3

D 7921 page 3

Basic type, Coding Description Ports A, B and Csize (ISO 228/1) (BSPP)

BVE 1 - 1/4 For pipe connection G 1/4 - 3/8 G 3/8 - P For manifold mounting --

BVE 3 - 1/2 For pipe connection G 1/2

BVE 5 - P For manifold mounting --

- 1 For pipe connection G 1

Coding Description

without standard

B Actuation lock (only available for symbol R), for notes regarding use, see sect. 5.2

T with detent

Table 3: Actuation solenoidNote: o The specified protection class is only valid when the plug is properly mounted. o Type BVE 5 only 24V DC

Coding and nom. voltage 12V DC 24V DC 110 V 230 V 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz BVE 1 BVE 3 BVE 5

Protection class (IEC 60529)


G 12 G 24 WG 110 WG 230

X 12 X 24 X 98 X 205

L 12 L 24 -- --

L 5 K.. L 5 K.. -- --

L 10 K.. L 10 K..

AMP 12 AMP 24 -- --

-- M 24 -- --

-- DT 24 -- --

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o (only 24 V)

o (only 24 V)

IP 65

(IP 65)

IP 65

IP 65

IP 65

IP 65

IP 67

DIN EN 175 301-803 A with plug

DIN EN 175 301-803 A without plug

DIN EN 175 301-803 A with LED-plug

DIN EN 175 301-803 A with LED-plug and 5 or 10 m cable

Co. AMP Junior Timer

M12x1

DEUTSCH

Table 4: Indiv. connection block

Connection pattern G.., X.., L.. AMP.. M..

Table 3a: Actuation solenoid options (only type BVE 1)

D 7921 page 4

3. Additional parameters3.1 General and hydraulic


Negative (transition from one to the other valve position is only completed in the respective end position). All ports are interconnected until the end position is achieved.

Operating pressure see table 1

Material and surface treatment Steel, DIN 50979-Fe ZnNi 8 BVE 1 and BVE 5 Steel, zinc galvanized / gas nitrided BVE 3

Mass (weight) Basic type Cartridge valve Indiv. connection block

BVE 1 0.5 kg + 0.8 kg BVE 3 0.7 kg + 0.7 kg BVE 5 3.8 kg + 3.8 kg

Hydraulic fluid Hydraulic oil acc. to DIN 51524 table 1 to 3; ISO VG 10 to 68 acc. to DIN 51519Viscosity range: min. approx. 4; max. approx. 1500 mm2/sOptimal operation range: approx. 10 ... 500 mm2/s

Also suitable are biologically degradable pressure fluids type HEPG (Polyalkylenglykol) and HEES (synth. ester) at operation temperatures up to approx. +70°C.

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80°C Fluid: -25 ... +80°C, pay attention to the viscosity range! Start temperature down to -40°C

are allowable (Pay attention to the viscosity range during start!), as long as the opera-tion temperature during subsequent running is at least 20K higher. Biological degradable pressure fluids: Pay attention to manufacturer‘s information. With regard to the compatibility with sealing materials do not exceed +70°C.

Flow limitation It is necessary to limit the flow down to the permissible range depending on the system pressure via throttles (see sect. 2). This applies to all circuits fed by an accumulator or when connected to high pressure circuits fed by high delivery pumps.

The orifice must be located on the accumulator side always. With valves version ..Z.. these should be installed in port C. For more detailed information, see table 2, section 2

|p-Q-curve

Over lapping at 3/2-waydirectional valves

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)B

ack

pre

ssure

|p

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)B

ack

pre

ssure

|p

(bar

)

Flow Q (lpm)


Flow Q (lpm)

Ölviksosität während der Messung ca. 60 mm2/s

Orifice (add. element)

Basic valves

D 7921 page 5

3.2 Electrical data

Protection class

Connector and connection

Switching times approx. ms

Switchings / h


On 50 ... 60 (type BVE 5 approx. 100 ms)Off 50 ... 60 (type BVE 5 approx. 100 ms) approx. 2000 (rather even distributed)

F; Contact temperature approx. 85...95°C (solenoid housing) with an ambient temperature of 20°C.Classification F permits a max. winding temperature of approx. 150°C; This won‘t be exceeded if the guideline figures for %ED are observed during operation. The thermal load of the coil may be reduced when an economy circuit is employed.



DC-voltage AC-voltage

G.. AMP.. L.. WG 110..

X.. G.. EX

M..

Relative duty cycle: 100% ED (Specification on the solenoid)

Reference value and restriction in the operation

Required connectors

Coding AMP.. Co. AMP Junior 2-pole, Coding 1

Coding G.., X.., L.. DIN EN 175 301-803 A

Cut-off energy

Additional solenoid voltagesType BVE 1, BVE 3

Guideline for max: approx. < 10 Ws + approx. 10% when measuring at UN

48V DC80V DC

Ambient temperature U °C

%E

D S

3-5

min

Nom. voltage UN 12V DC 24V DC 98V DC 205V DC

Nom. power PN BVE 1 26.2 W 26.5 W (30 W) 24.8 W 28 W BVE 3 35.1 W 32.7 W 31.4 W 30.2 W BVE 5 63 W

Nom. current IN BVE 1 2.34 A 1.17 A 0.28 A 0.14 A BVE 3 2.5 A 1.4 A 0.33 A 0.16 A BVE 5 4.76 A 2.45 A 0.63 A 0.33 A


ATEX-Certificate of conformity TÜV-A 03ATEX 0017 XCoding O II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 T4 O II 2 D Ex mbD 21 T135°COper. duration 100% EDDuty cycle IP 67 (IEC 60529)Nom. voltage UN 24 V DCPower PN 23 WRestrictions for use:

Ambient temperature -35 ... +40°Cmax. fluid temperature +70°Cel. protection against overload (conf. IEC 60127) IF < 1.6 A-TSurface coating Housing galvanically zinc coated Coil and connection cavity are moulded



D 7921 page 6

All dimensions in mm, subject to change without notice! 4. Unit dimensions4.1 Cartridge valve type BVE 1

Mounting hole for type BVE 1 Z

Type BVE 1 Z Type BVE 1 R, BVE 1 S

Mounting hole for type BVE 1 R, BVE 1 S

Detail at “X” Detail at “Y”

Rounded edge

Seal between coil and nut

Seal between coil and valve cartridge

Seal between coil and valve cartridge

Manual emergency actuation Manual emergency actuation

Seal between coil and nut

rotatable rotatable

a/f 24 70 Nm

a/f 24 70 Nm

D 7921 page 7

Coil system:

Coding Order No.

Solenoid G12, L12, X12 7329 785-12V

coil G24, L24, X24 7329 785-24V

G48, X48 7329 785-48V

G72, X72 7329 785-72V

G80, X80 7329 785-80V

WG110, X98 7329 785-98V

WG230, X205 7329 785-230V

AMP12 7329 051-12V

AMP24 7329 051-24V

M24 7329 788-24

DT24 7329 791-24V

Plug:

Coding Nomenclature

G.. MSD 3-309L.. SVS 3129020WG.. MSD 4-209 P10L 5 K.. 7163 112/1L 10 K.. 7163 118

Seal kit (O-rings): DS 7921-1

Solenoid version

- G..

- L..

- X.. (without plug)

- AMP..

- DT..

Order coding for spare parts (e.g. replacement)

- M..

- .. B

Actuation solenoid option

- .. T

D 7921 page 8

Version with indiv. connection block

Type BVE 1 Z - ... - 1/4

BVE 1 Z - ... - 3/8

Type BVE 1 R - ... - P

BVE 1 S - ... - P

Type BVE 1 R - ... - 1/4

BVE 1 R - ... - 3/8

BVE 1 S - ... - 1/4

BVE 1 S - ... - 3/8

Ports conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A, B and C = G 1/4 or G 3/8

Ports conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A and B = G 1/4 or G 3/8

Hole pattern

O-ring 7.65x1.78 AU

D 7921 page 9

4.2 Cartridge valve type BVE 3

O-ring 21x3.53Polyurethane 95 Sh

O-ring 17.12x2.62NBR 90 Sh

Mounting hole for type BVE 3 Z

Mounting hole for type BVE 3 R and S

1) This groove improves the flow characteristic, but is not necessary for proper function

Manual emergency actuationa/f 19 max. 40 Nm

Detail at “X”


Coil system:

Coding Order No.

Solenoid G12, L12, X12 7177 720-12V

coil G24, L24, X24 7177 720-24V

G48, X48 7177 720-48V

G72, X72 7177 720-72V

G80, X80 7177 720-80V

WG110, X98 7177 720-98V

WG230, X205 7177 720-205V

Cable gland

app

rox.

34

approx. 34.5

app

rox.

70.5

Reaming depth 5.5+0.2

Reaming depth 5.5+0.2

Plug:

Coding Nomenclature

G.. MSD 3-309L.. SVS 3129020WG.. MSD 4-209 P10


1)

1)

D 7921 page 10

Ports conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A, B and C = G 1/2

Ports conforming ISO 228/1 (BSPP):A and B = G 1/2

Type BVE 3 Z - ... - 1/2

Type BVE 3 R (S) - ... - 1/2


D 7921 page 11

4.3 Cartridge valve type BVE 5

Mounting hole

Manual emergency

a/f 50 200 Nm

Detail at “X” Detail at “Y”Rounded edge


Coil system:

Coding Order No.

Solenoid G24, L24, X24 7750 563-G24

coil

rotatable

deep

Plug:

Coding Nomenclature

G.. MSD 3-309L.. SVS 3129020L 5 K.. 7163 112/1L 10 K.. 7163 118


D 7921 page 12


Type BVE 5 - ... - P

Hole pattern

M12, 20 deep

90 Nm

Type BVE 5 - ... - 1

D 7921 page 13

Actuation aid(do not use any sharp-edged parts)

5.1 Manual emergency actuation

5. Appendix

The valve may be actuated by pressing down the brass bolt visible from above by means of a steel pin or a screw driver etc.

Attention: Any pressure at B puts a load on the brass pin, which results in a pressure dependent counter force. The pin diameter with type BVE 1 and 3 is #3 mm, i.e. 100 bar & 70 N; whereas it is #4 mm with type BVE 5, i.e. 100 bar & 125 N !

5.2 Actuation solenoid option B used as actuation lock (see table 3a)

This actuation lock may be used as safety device e.g. during maintenance works or initial operation / set-up operation.

o Standard operation - Solenoid (coil) is mounted - The locking nut fixes the coil at the armature tube - Actuation is unlocked - Valve can be actuated via the solenoid

o Maintenance works / initial operation - Solenoid (coil) is not mounted - The locking nut is only lightly screwed onto the armature tube - Valve is fixed in working state

Standard operation Maintenance works / initial operation

Locking nut

D 7921 page 14

Coding # Order coding (mm)

-- (without hole) 7406 012 a B 0,6 0.6 7406 012 bB 0,8 0.8 7406 012 c B 1,1 1.1 7406 012 dB 1,3 1.3 7406 012 f B 1,5 1.5 7406 012 h

-- (without hole) 7400 003 aB 0,4 0.4 7400 003 kB 0,5 0.5 7400 003 lB 0,6 0.6 7400 003 d B 0,7 0.7 7400 003 mB 0,8 0.8 7400 003 eB 0,9 0.9 7400 003 nB 1,0 1.0 7400 003 oB 1,1 1.1 7400 003 g B 1,3 1.3 7400 003 hB 1,5 1.5 7400 003 c B 2,0 2.0 7400 003 fB 2,5 2.5 7400 003 iB 4,0 4.0 7400 003 b

B 2,5 2.5 7405 014 bB 3 3.0 7405 014 c B 3,5 3.5 7405 014 dB 4 4.0 7405 014 e

-- (without hole) 7750 562 -0.0B 3,0 3.0 7750 562 -3.0B 4,0 4.0 7750 562 -4.0B 5,0 5.0 7750 562 -5.0B 6,0 6.0 7750 562 -6.0

for type

BVE 1.. - 1/4

BVE 1.. - 3/8

BVE 3.. - 1/2

BVE 5 - 1..

Blenden

Mounting holes in the manifold may be blocked if required by tapped plugs e.g. if uniform manufactured manifolds should be equipped with or without cartridge valves depending on application.

for type Order coding

BVE 1 7750 181BVE 3 Sk 7405 260 bBVE 5 7750 524

BVE 1 7750 191BVE 3 Sk 7405 260 aBVE 5 7750 526

BVE 1 7750 181BVE 3 Sk 7405 260 c

BVE 1 7750 171BVE 3 Sk 7405 260 d

Tapped plug

5.3 Options

Tapped plugs

Basic type a/f h

BVE 1 24 12.5

BVE 3 30 18.5

BVE 5 50 20

a/f

Directional spool valve banks type SWS

Directly solenoid actuated (on/off or proportional)

D 7951Directional spool valve banks

type SWS

March 1999-02


2.1

Flow Qmax = 25 lpm



The directional valve banks type SWS are a refined version of type SWR. Basic function is the directional control of hydraulic consumers (cylinders, motors). But this new concept enables also the incorporation of additional functions for each individual valve section on both the pump (check or throttle valves) and the consumer side (over-center, shock, or check valves).The actuation is carried out via pressure tight, single acting solenoids which act directly on the valve spool.A variety of connection blocks (featuring pressure and return ports) as well as end plates offer solutions to many applications.

Order examples

Example 1:Combination with compact-hydraulic powerpack

Example 2:Valve bank withproportional-flowcontrol valve inthe connectionblock

Example 3:Lifting module forreach trucks

HK 448/1 - Z12.3 - AS1F2/120 - SWS2F - G06 /MP /DW /2AN130 BN80

- W /M /R /2

- D /MF /0 /2AL4B140 BL4C140 -1 - G24

SWS2 SE22F-A6 - G12 /MP /DW /2AS250 BS310

- D06 /M /DW /2AL320

- B /M /Q /2 -1 - G24 - 300

HMT34DH - 1/220 - 90F - D12 /MPF/DW/2AL4B200 BL4C200

- G /M /0 /02

- G /M /0 /02 - G24

Hydraulic circuit and illustration acc. to example 1

Pre

-rel

ease

A_

D 7951 page 2

2. Type coding key, overview

Order example:

SWS2 A6 - G06 /MP /DW /2AN130 BN310

- W /M /0 /02 - 1 - G24 - 200

Pressure setting (bar)

Solenoid voltage (see section 4.2)

End plates (see table 2)

Ancillary blocks, additional functions on the consumer side (see table 7)

/01, /02 Without ancillary block (A, B = G 1/4 or G 3/8)

/1, /2 Ancillary block (A, B = G 1/4 or G 3/8) no additional functions

/2AS.. BS.. Shock valve at A and B (G 3/8) with pressure setting

/2AN.. BN.. Shock and suction valve at A and B (G 3/8) with pressure setting

/2AN.. Shock and suction valve at A (G 3/8) with pressure setting

/2AL.. BL.. Over-center valve at A and B (G 3/8) with pressure setting

/2AL.. Over-center valve at A (G 3/8) with pressure setting

/1AV.. Sequence valve at A (G 1/4 or G 3/8) with pressure setting

/2RH Releasable check valves

Ancillary blocks, additional functions on the pump side (see table 6)

/0 Without additional function, retrofitting is not possible

/2 Without additional functions, prepared for refitting of /Q, /B or /R

/B.. Orifice with diameter

/R Check valve

/Q Throttle (adjustable)

/DW Flow control valve

/TV Preference flow divider (only available for the first valve section)in combination with over-center valve

Solenoid actuation (see table 5)

/M On/off solenoid (standard)

/MF (A, B) Elevation stop at A and B (or only at A or B)

/MD (A, B) Knob to the elevation stop at A and B (or only at A or B)

/MP Proportional solenoid

/MPF (A, B) Proportional solenoid with elevation stop

/MM (A, B) Double solenoid (rapid transverse or creeping operation) at A and B (or onlyat A or B)

Flow, only in combination with /DW or /MP (see table 4)

03, 06, 12, 20 Max. flow at A and B (lpm)

Flow pattern symbols (see table 3)

G, D, E, O, N, Flow pattern symbolsB, Q, W, R

Z Pressure reducing valve to the pressure reduction of all subsequent valve sections

Connection block / adapter plate (see table 1)

A5 Without pressure limiting valve

A6, A7 With pressure limiting valve

S6, S7, V6, V7 Additional idle circulation valve

SE..A6, SE..A7 Additional 3-way flow control valve

F Direct mounting onto compact-hydraulic power packs

Basic type and size

SWS 2

D 7951 page 3

3. Available versions, main data3.1 Connection blocks, adapter plates, and end plates

Basic type and sizeFlow Qmax = 25 lpm


For valve sectionssee sect. 3.2

SWS 2 A6 - G/M/0/02 - 1 - G 24 - 200

For actuation solenoids G 12 to WG 230, see sect. 4.2

Table 1: Connection block, adapter plate

P (pump port) and R (return port) = G 3/8 DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP)M (Port for pressure gauge) = G 1/4 DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

Coding

5

6

7

6

7

Pressurelimitingvalve 1)

No pres-sure limit-ing valve

Tool ad-justable

Manuallyadjustable

Tool ad-justable

Manuallyadjustable

Idle circula-tion valveacc. to D 7490/1

without

EM 21SIdle cir-culationwhiledeener-gized

6

7

F

Tool ad-justable

Manuallyadjustable

Direct mounting ontocompact-hydraulicpower packsMP acc. to D 7200HHK acc. to D 7600-...HC acc. to D 7900

3-way flow control valvewith metering throttleclosed, while deener-gized (Regulation range start-ing from approx. 0.1 lpmup to the respectivespecified max figure e.g.30 F & Qmax = 30 lpm)

Is to be directlymounted onto con-nection block A(AS,AV)1, and 2 (3, 4)acc. to D 6905 A.

EM 21VIdle cir-culationwhile en-ergized

Symbole

A

S3)

V3)

30 F

22 F

15 F

10 F

SE 6 F3) 4/18 F 2)

3/26 F 2)3/7 F 2)3 F

1) The spring dome of the pressure limiting valve is made of zinc pressure die-cast (standard). The (optional) steel spring dome should beused, wherever pressure surges of more than 20 ... 25 bar could occur in the return duct. This must be specified in uncoded text.

2) Metering throttle with non-linear characteristic and specification of the fine control block and the max. flow at completely open metering throttle

3) There is also an end plate available featuring a (optionally proportional) by-pass valve (type 31 E or 31 EP acc. to table 2)

Desired pressure setting (bar)available pressure ranges:

(0) ... 80 bar(0) ... 160 bar(0) ... 315 bar

Specification is superfluous withconnection block A5 and adapterplate F

Pressure specifi-cation deter-mines the spring

= ..6 = ..7

S 6 and S 7 V 6 and V 7

A 5 A 6 and A 7

Order example:

A 6andA 7

Tool ad-justable

Table 2: End plates

Coding

1

2

3

25 E

21 E

21 EP

31 E

31 EP

Flow pattern symbols 2 3

1

25 E 21 E 21 EP

31 E 31 EP

Brief description

Standard

Additional pump and return port (P1, R1 = G 3/8)

Additional pump port P1, P2 and return port R1 (G 1/2)

Switchable additional return port A (G 3/8)

Switchable additional pump outlet port to the supply for further valve banks

Like 21 E, but with prop. valve to the step-less quantity dosage (e.g. for a smooth start or for pumps)

End plate with idle circulation valve (e.g.as alternative for connection blocks)

Like 31 E, but with prop. valve (e.g. to prevent start jumps)

Order example: SWS 2 SE 22F-A6-...-200

With preference flow devider, for flow patternsymbol and order example see table 6

... / TV ...

D 7951 page 4

3.2 Valve sections3.2.1 Directional spool valves

Order example: SWS2 A6 - G /M /0 /02

- D06 /MP/DW/2AS180 BS180 - 1 -G24 - 200


Table 4: FlowAttention: Only in connection with coding /MP(table 5) and/or /DW (table 6)!

Table 5: Solenoid version

Flow pattern symbolsG D E O N B Q W R K

Coding 03 06 12 20 without

Flow 3 6 12 20 ---QA, B max (lpm)

Coding

/M

/MF

/MFA

/MFB

/MD

/MDA

/MDB

/MP

/MPF

/MMD

/MMA

/MMB

Brief description

On/off solenoid

On/off solenoid with eleva-tion stop (set screw) for Aand B (/MF), for A (/MFA) orfor B (/MFB)

On/off solenoid with eleva-tion stop (turn knob) for Aand B (/MD), for A (/MDA) orfor B (/MDB)

Proportional solenoid

Proportional solenoid with elevation stop

Double solenoid for rapidtransverse/creeping opera-tion for A and B (/MM), for A(/MMA) or for B (/MMB)

A d d i t i o n a lfunctions onthe consumerside (table 7)

A d d i t i o n a lfunctions onthe pumpside (table 6)

Solenoid ver-sion (table 5)

Flow patternsymbol (table3 and 4)

Table 6: Pump sided additional function

Coding

/0

/2

/B..

/R

/Q

/DW

/TV

Brief description

Without additional function, retro-fitting is not possible

Without additional functions, pre-pared for refitting of /Q, /B or /R

Orifice with -# (mm)

Check valve

Throttle (adjustable)

Flow control valve (retrofitting is notpossible), for a load independentflow limitation, most advantageousin combination with /MP(F) table 5and coding for flow acc. to table 4

Preference flow devider with a de-fined for this consumer. Attention:This is only available for the first valvesection (this feature is housed in theconnection block) and in combinationwith over-center valve (/2AL.. BL..)acc. to table 7, see order example


/0/2

/B0../B1..

/R /Q

/DW /TV

For basic type, size,actuation solenoid,end plate, and pres-sure setting, seesect. 3.1

Additional func-tions on the pumpside (table 6)

Flow (table 4)

Additional functionson the consumerside (table 7)

Order example:SWS 2 -D06/MP/TV/2AL4D180 BL4D180

-G/M/0/2-31EP-G24

D 7951 page 5

Table 7: Additional functions on the consumer side

Brief description

Without additional function (no connection block), cannot be combined with additional functions acc.to table 6

Without additional function, ports in the ancillary block

Shock and suction valve, with pressure specification for A and B or A only

Shock valves for A and B

Sequence valve for the consumer port A

Over-center valve (example: /2AL4C200 BL4B180) for A and B or A only

4 = Release ration

Valve version (flow dependent)A = appr. 20 lpmB = appr. 14 lpmC = appr. 10 lpmD = appr. 6 lpm

Pressure setting max. 380 bar

Double check valve (Release ration 1 : 2.5)

Coding

/01

/02

/1

/2

/2AN.. BN..

/2AN..

/2AS.. BS..

/1AV..

/2AL... BL...

/2AL...

/2RH

Tapped portsA and B

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 3/8

G 3/8

G 1/4

G 3/8

G 3/8


/01 and /02

/1 and /2 /2AN... BN... /2AS... BS... /2AL... BL...

/2AN...

/2RH

/1AV... /2AL...

D 7951 page 6

Valves coding Z are always set for max. pressure at HAWE, if a specification is missing in the order. When a specific pressure setting is desired, thus should be specified in the order coding in uncoded text.

Example: SWS 2 A6 - .. Z3 ... - 1 - G 24 - 210, Z3 set for 100 bar

The order coding for spares or storing is as follows:

ADM 22 PA for Z1; ADM 22 PC for Z2; ADM 22 PD for Z3; ADM 22 PF for Z4

ADM 22 PAR for Z5; ADM 22 PCR for Z6; ADM 22 PDR for Z7; ADM 22 PFR for Z8

Sub-plate for pressure reducing valve HAWE-No. 7451 004

3.2.2 Intermediate sections

Pressure reducing valve

Order example and flowpattern symbol

The valve can be ordered anywhere between the directionalspool valve sections. All subsequent spool valve sections receive only pressure fluid with the set pressure (secondarypressure), independent of the higher system pressure upstream. Coding Z1 ... Z8 may be added any position within the complete valve bank coding, see order example inthe margin.

SWS 2 A7 - G/M/R/02

-Z3

-D/M/0/02 - 1 -G24 - 250

Primaryside up to250 bar

Pressurereducingvalve

Secondaryside up to130 bar

250 bar

30 to 130 barTable 8: Pressure reducing valve

Adjustablepressure range1) from ... to(bar)

Coding

Tool ad-justable

Manuallyadjustable

160 ... 250

60 ... 160

30 ... 130

10 ... 30

Z 1

Z 2

Z 3

Z 4

Z 5

Z 6

Z 7

Z 8

Pressure specifications corresponding to theorder example

pA(B) - QA(B) - curve (tendency)

, -10 ... -15%of the pres-sure settingd e p e n d i n gon pressurerange

1) Pressure setting (monitored by a pressure gauge) atQA(B) = 0 lpm (Consumer on the secondary side in

stop position)

Intermediate section with flow limitation for all subsequent functions

Intermediate section with proportional 3-way flow control valve

Order example: SWS 2 A6 - G/M/R/02

- ZSB 15

- D/M/0/02 - 1 - G 24 - 200

CodingBasic type Metering throttle

22 F

15 F

ZSE 10 F

6 F

4/18 F

3/26 F

3/7 F

3 F

Brief description

A inter-section with a 3 way-proportional-flow control valve is usedto limit the flow for all subsequent valve sectionsA bypass nozzle prevents blocking of the 3 way flow control valvewhen all valves are closed.The control characteristics corresponds is like with connectionblocks type SWS 2 SE.. (see table 1 and curve in sect. 4.1).

Flow pattern symbol correspondingthe order example

ZSB ...

Intermediate section featur-ing a drop-rate braking valve type SB 1 acc. to D 6920pressure pmax = 315 bar

Adjustable response flow 2.5 ... 35 lpm

200 bar

Flow patternsymbol

D 7951 page 7

4. Additional parameter4.1 General and hydraulic data

Design Directional spool valve

Surface protection Spool valve housing nitrous hardened, solenoid zinc galvanized

Installed position Any, for fastening see dimensional drawings in section 5.1 ++

Pipe connection Pipe thread DIN ISO 228/1 (BSPP)

Port coding P = Pressurized fluid inlet port (pump) G 3/8A, B = Consumer G 3/8 or G 1/4 (dep. on type)R = Return port G 3/8M = Port for pressure gauge G 1/4

Flow direction In accordance with arrow direction in the flow pattern symbols; It is not permissible to reversethe flow direction !

Over lapping Positive

Operation pressure pmax = 315 bar (all ports)

Flow Flow Qmax = 25 lpm; Permissible return flow approx. 50 lpm

(The piston side of a differential cylinder should be connected to A, if the return exceeds 25 lpm)

Hydraulic fluid: Fluids acc. to DIN 51524 table 1 to 3; ISO VG 10 to 68 acc. to DIN 51519Viscosity range: min. approx. 4; max. approx. 1500 mm2/sOptimal operation range: approx. 10...500 mm2/sAlso suitable are biologically degradable pressure fluids of the type HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) andHEES (synth. Ester) at operation temperatures up to approx. +70°C.HETG (seed oil) is not suited.

Temperature Ambient: approx. -40...+80°C; Fluid: -25...+80°C, pay attention to the viscosity range! Start temperature down to -40°C are allowable (Pay attention to the viscosity range during start!),as long as the operation temperature during subsequent running is at least 20K higher. Biological degradable pressure fluids: Pay attention to manufacturer's information. With regardto the compatibility with sealing materials do not exceed +70°C.Restrictions for version with ex-proof solenoid!

Max. contamination Conforming 18/14 ISO 4406

Mass (weight) Spool valve (incl. actuation)

Coding appr. kg

G, D, E, O, N 1.8

B, Q, W, R, K 1.3

Connection blocks

Coding appr. kg

A 5 0.8

A 6, A 7 1.5

S 6, S 7, V 6, V 7 1.8

F 0.8

SE 2.6

Ancillary blocks

Coding appr. kg

/1. /2 0.5

others 1.0

Intermediate sections

Coding appr. kg

Z1 ... Z 8 1.5

ZSB 1.1

ZSE 2.0

|p-Q curveThe characteristics apply toall spool valve sections, nomatter where they are in-stalled within the valve bank.The measurable deviationsare insignificant.

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)

Bac

k p

ress

ure

|p

(bar

)Flow pattern codingG, D, E, Q, O, N

Flow pattern codingB, W, R, K


Eff

ectiv

e co

nsu

mer

flo

wQ

A in

% o

f Q

A m

ax

(see

sel

ectio

n t

able

)

Control current ISt in % in IN

These curves always apply to one flow direction only P→R (idle circula-tion), P→A(B) or A(B)→R. The total back pressure ( |ptotal) with 4/3- or 4/2-

way directional valves is taken at P. It consists of an inflow share (|pin) and

an outflow share (|pout). Important: Consumers with unequal area ration(e.g. differential cylinders) show uneven flow at the consumer ports, i.e. also (|pin) and (|pout) won't be equal regardless of the direction of move-ment!

Q-I curve for proportionalflow control valve (connectionblock)

Viscosity during the measur-ing approx. 60 mm2/s

in

outinreturn

A

AQQ =

in

outoutinreturn

A

Appp ∆+∆=∆

Qreturn Qreturn

Aout

AoutAin

Qin Qin

Ain

D 7951 page 8

4.2 Solenoid

Electrical data (/M... table 5)

Grayplug

Blackplug

A DIN 43650 Pg 9 (see also D 7163)

Coding G (...V DC) is only available with gray orblack plugsCoding WG (..V AC) is only available with blackplug, featuring an internal bridge rectifier circuit

Circuitry(valid for solenoida and b)

DC-voltage Coding G... Coding L...

AC-voltage Coding WG..

Plug

Relative dutycycle

Switching times (refer-ence value)

Switching operations

Protection class DIN40050


Surface temperature

Mounting

On: approx. 60 ... 70 ms Off: approx. 30 ... 60 ms

approx. 3600 switchings / h

Solenoid IP 54, connection area IP 65 (device socket in assembled state)

F

approx. 85°C at 20°C ambient temperature

The solenoid can be simply removed after slackening the knurled nut, easing replacement in case of anelectrical defect.

100% EDStamping on thesolenoid

Operation:At ambient temperature (°C)

Duty cycle (%)

< 40

100

60

approx. 60

80

approx. 40

2) These solenoids are intended to be connected via a cus-tomer furnished bridge rectifier to mains 50/60Hz.: G 98 for mains 110V AC; G 205 for mains 230V AC

Solenoid Manufactured and tested conforming VDE 0580, operating pressure resistant in the pressure fluidReference value for nom. power PN , 24.4 W * approx. 6% dep. on nom. voltage UN and brand

Coding G 12 G 24 G 24 EX G 48 G 80 G 98 G 205 WG 110 WG 230X 12 X 24 1) X 48 X 80 X 98 X 205L 12 L 24 2) 2)

Nom. voltage UN 12V DC 24V DC 24V DC 48V DC 80V DC 98V DC 205V DC 110V AC 230V AC

50/60Hz 50/60Hz

Nom. power PN (W) 28 28 23.6 28 28 28 28 28 28

Nom. current I20 (A) 2.34 1.17 1.0 0.58 0.35 0.28 0.14 0.28 0.14

Solenoid Conforming VDE 0580

Nom. voltage UN 12V DC 24V DC

Coil resistance R20 6.0 Ω 24.0 Ω

Current , cold I20 2.5 A 1.25 A

Nom. current IN , 70% of I20 1.35 A 0.88 A

Power , cold 30 W 30 W

Nominal power 21 W 21 W

Recom. dither frequency 50 ... 150 Hz

Dither amplitude 20 ... 40% of IN

Relative duty cycle 100% ED (ref. temp. 11 = 50°C)

Electrical connection DIN 43650 B (industrial standard)

Protection class DIN 40050 Solenoid IP 54, connection area IP 65 (device socket inassembled state)

P R x I20 20 202

=

P R x IN = 20 202

Proportiona solenoid (/MP.. table 5): 1) Ex-proof solenoid

ATEX-Certificate of conformity TÜV-A 03ATEX 0017 XCoding II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 T4

II 2 D Ex mbD 21 T135°CDuty cycle IP 67 (IEC 60529) Restrictions for use:

Ambient temperature -35 ... +40°Cmax. fluid temperature +70°Cel. protection against overload (conf. IEC 60127) IF < 1,6 A-T

Surface coating Housing galvanically zinc coatedCoil and connection cavity aremoulded

Electrical connection 3x0,5 mm2


Attention : Protect the complete valve against direct sun light.Observe the operation manuals B 03/2004 and B ATEX!Electrical lay-out and testing conforming EN 60079, VDE 0170-1,VDE 0170-5

D 7951 page 9

5. Unit dimensions

All dimensions in mm, subject tochange without notice !

Coding A 5 Coding A 6, A 7

Coding S(V) 6, S(V) 75.1 Connection blocks and adapter plates

Ancillary block(sect. 5.3)

Connectionblock (sect. 5.1)

Cablegland Pg 9

Double solenoid Coding /MM

Solenoid coding /MD(A, B)

Solenoid coding /M Solenoid coding /MPF

Solenoid coding /MP

M 6, 6 deep M 6, 6 deep

Provisionfor a leadseal


Solenoid (ex-proof version)Coding G 24 ex

Directional spool valveEnd plate (sect. 5.3)

max

. 91

(man

ual

ly a

dju

stab

le)

max

. 80

(to

ol a

dju

stab

le)

app

rox.

87

app

rox.

76.5 ap

pro

x.159

app

rox.

103.5

app

rox.

70

app

rox.

80.5

D 7951 page 10

5.2 End plates

Coding 1 Coding 2 Coding 3 Coding 25 E Coding 21 E(EP)

31 E(EP)

Coding F Coding SE ... F

M 6, 6 deep

Connection block directlymounted onto the pump

Ports DIN ISO228/1 (BSPP):

R = R e t u r nport G 3/8

M = Port forpressuregauge G 3/8

Ports DIN ISO228/1 BSPP):

P, R = G 3/8M = G 1/4

Cablegland Pg 9

M 6, 6 deep


A, P and R = G 3/8 with coding 2, 25 E, 21 E(P) and 31 E(P)

P1, P2, R1 = G 1/2 with coding 3

1)

1) Ports P and R areblocked with tappedplugs for 31 E(EP)

app

rox.

77

app

rox.

31

app

rox.

78.5

app

rox.

77

app

rox.

77

app

rox.

90.5

approx. 13

D 7951 page 11

5.3 Ancillary blocks

Coding /1(2) Coding /2AN.. BN..

/2AN..

/2AS.. BS..

Coding /2AL.. BL..

/2AL..

Coding /1AV..

Coding /2RH

Coding /TV


Coding /TV /1 /2/1AV.. /2AN.. BN..

/2AN/2AS.. BS../2AL.. BL../2RH

P and R G 3/8 --- ---

A and B G 1/4 G 3/8

Omitted atversion/2AL...

app

rox.

87

app

rox.

87

D 7951 page 12

Coding Z 1 ... Z 8 Coding ZSECoding ZSB

5.4 Intermediate sections

app

rox.

108

app

rox.

77

app

rox.

105.5

app

rox.

88.5

Shut-off valves type DA and EA - Comar Fluid Power

Documents

Transcript of Shut-off valves type DA and EA - Comar Fluid Power